FP0R USERS MANUAL fp0r Hard F475e-2 PDF

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
FP0R
,
Users Manual
ARCT1F475E-2
2011.8 | panasonic-electric-works.net/sunx
Safety Precautions
Observe the following notices to ensure personal safety or to prevent accidents.
To ensure that you use this product correctly, read this User’s Manual thoroughly before use.
Make sure that you fully understand the product and information on safety.
This manual uses two safety flags to indicate different levels of danger.
WARNING
If critical situations that could lead to user’s death or serious injury is assumed by
mishandling of the product.
-Always take precautions to ensure the overall safety of your system, so that the whole
system remains safe in the event of failure of this product or other external factor.
-Do not use this product in areas with inflammable gas. It could lead to an explosion.
-Exposing this product to excessive heat or open flames could cause damage to the lithium
battery or other electronic parts.
-Battery may explode if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of fire.
CAUTION
If critical situations that could lead to user’s injury or only property damage is
assumed by mishandling of the product.
-To prevent excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation, use this product at the values
less than the maximum of the characteristics and performance that are assured in these
specifications.
-Do not dismantle or remodel the product. It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke
generation.
-Do not touch the terminal while turning on electricity. It could lead to an electric shock.
-Use the external devices to function the emergency stop and interlock circuit.
-Connect the wires or connectors securely.
The loose connection could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation.
-Do not allow foreign matters such as liquid, flammable materials, metals to go into the inside
of the product. It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation.
-Do not undertake construction (such as connection and disconnection) while the power
supply is on. It could lead to an electric shock.
Copyright / Trademarks
-This manual and its contents are copyrighted.
-You may not copy this manual, in whole or part, without written consent of Panasonic Electric
Works SUNX Co., Ltd.
-Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other
countries.
-All other company names and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective owners.
PLC_BAT
Table of Contents
Before You Start
Programming Tool Restrictions
When Using FP0 Programs
1. Functions and Restrictions of the Unit .................................1-1

1.1 Unit Types................................................................................................ 1-2
1.2 Restrictions on Unit Combination ............................................................. 1-7
1.3 Programming Tools.................................................................................. 1-8
2. Specifications and Functions of Control Unit .....................2-1

2.1 Part Names and Functions....................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Input and Output Specifications ............................................................... 2-4
2.3 Terminal layout diagrams ......................................................................... 2-7
2.4 Functions of T32 Control Unit................................................................. 2-10
3. Expansion.................................................................................3-1
3.1 Expansion Method ................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Part Names and Functions....................................................................... 3-3
3.3 Input and Output Specifications ............................................................... 3-4
3.4 Terminal layout diagram........................................................................... 3-7
4. I/O Allocation ...........................................................................4-1

4.1 I/O Allocation ........................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 I/O Allocation for FP0R Control Unit ......................................................... 4-3
4.3 I/O Numbers of FP0/FP0R Expansion Unit .............................................. 4-4
5. Installation and Wiring ............................................................5-1

5.1 Installation................................................................................................ 5-2
5.2 Wiring of Power Supply ............................................................................ 5-6
5.3 Wiring of Input and Output ....................................................................... 5-8
5.4 Wiring of MIL Connector Type................................................................ 5-11
5.5 Wiring of Terminal Block Type ............................................................... 5-13
5.6 Wiring of Molex Connector Type ............................................................ 5-15
5.7 Wiring of COM Port ................................................................................ 5-16
5.8 Safety Measures .................................................................................... 5-19
6. Preparation of USB Port .........................................................6-1

6.1 USB Connection ...................................................................................... 6-2
7. Communication .......................................................................7-1
7.1 Functions and Types................................................................................ 7-2
7.2 Communicaton Port Type ........................................................................ 7-4
7.3 Communication Specifications ................................................................. 7-5
7.4 Computer Link.......................................................................................... 7-7
7.5 General-purpose Serial Communication................................................. 7-18
7.6 PC(PLC) link Function............................................................................ 7-34
7.7 MODBUS RTU Communication ............................................................. 7-49
i
8. High-speed Counter, Pulse Output and PWM Output
Functions ..................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Overview of Each Functions .....................................................................8-2
8.2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items ...........................................8-4
8.3 High-speed Counter Function ...................................................................8-9
8.4 Pulse Output Function ............................................................................8-19
8.5 PWM Output Function ............................................................................8-57
9. Security Functions .................................................................. 9-1

9.1 Password Protect Function .......................................................................9-2
9.2 Upload Protection .....................................................................................9-8
9.3 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader ...................................................9-9
9.4 Table of Security Settings/Cancel ...........................................................9-12
10. Other Functions ................................................................... 10-1

10.1 P13 (PICWT) Instruction .......................................................................10-2
10.2 Sampling Trance Function ....................................................................10-3
10.3 Time Constant Processing ....................................................................10-6
11. Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting ............................... 11-1

11.1 Self-Diagnostic function ........................................................................11-2
11.2 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................11-3
11.3 Operation Errors ...................................................................................11-9
12. Precautions During Programming..................................... 12-1

12.1 Use of Duplicated Output......................................................................12-2
12.2 Handling Index Registers......................................................................12-4
12.3 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method ....................................12-6
12.4 Precautions for Programming ...............................................................12-9
12.5 Rewrite Function During RUN.............................................................12-10
12.6 Processing During Forced Input and Output ....................................... 12-15
13. Specifications ...................................................................... 13-1

13.1 Table of Specifications..........................................................................13-2
13.2 I/O Number Allocation...........................................................................13-8
13.3 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants................................................ 13-10
13.4 Power Supply Unit and I/O Link Unit Specifications ............................ 13-11
14. Dimensions and Others ...................................................... 14-1

14.1 Dimensions...........................................................................................14-2
14.2 Cable/Adapter Specifications ................................................................14-7
ii
15. Appendix.............................................................................. 15-1
15.1 System Registers/Special Internal Relays/Special Data Registers ...... 15-2
15.2 Table of Basic Instructions ................................................................ 15-39
15.3 Table of High-level Instructions ......................................................... 15-47
15.4 Table of Error codes.......................................................................... 15-67
15.5 MEWTOCOL-COM Communication Commands ............................... 15-80
15.6 Hexadecimal/Binary/BCD.................................................................. 15-81
15.7 ASCII Codes ..................................................................................... 15-82
iii
iv
Before You Start
Operating environment (Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when
installing)
* Ambient temperature: 0 to +55°C
* Ambient humidity: 10 to 95 % RH (at 25 °C, non-condensing)
* For use in pollution Degree 2 environment.
* Do not use the unit in the following environments.
- Direct sunlight
- Sudden temperature changes causing condensation.
- Inflammable or corrosive gas.
- Excessive airborne dust, metal particles or saline matter.
- Benzine, paint thinner, alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia
or caustic soda.
- Direct vibration, shock or direct drop of water.
- Influence from power transmission lines, high voltage equipment, power cables, power equipment,
radio transmitters, or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges.(100 mm or more)
Static electricity
- Do not touch connector pins directly to prevent static electricity from causing damage.
- Always rid yourself of any static electricity before handling this product.
Power supply
- Use a power supply wire that is twisted.
- The unit has sufficient noise immunity against the noise generated on the power line. However, it is
recommended to take measures for reducing noise such as using an isolating transformer before
supplying the power.
- Allocate an independent wiring for each power supplying line, input/output device and operating device.
- If using a power supply without a protective circuit, power should be supplied through a protective
element such as fuse. If an incorrect voltage is directly applied, the internal circuit may be damaged or
destroyed.
- Be sure to supply power to a control and an expansion unit from a single power supply. Turning on/off
of the power of all the units must be conducted simultaneously.
Power supply sequence
- Have the power supply sequence such that the power supply of the control unit turns off before the
power supply for input and output. If the input/output power supply is turned off before the control unit,
or if the control unit is not shut off momentarily, the controller detects change of input level, and might
conduct an unexpected operation.
Before turning on the power
When turning on the power for the first time, be sure to take the precautions given below.
- When performing installation, check to make sure that there are no scraps of wiring, particularly
conductive fragments, adhering to the unit.
- Verify that the power supply wiring, I/O wiring, and power supply voltage are all correct.
- Sufficiently tighten the installation screws and terminal screws.
- Set the mode selector to PROG. mode.
Before entering a program
Be sure to perform a program clear operation before entering a program. Refer to the respective tool
software manuals for the details of the operation procedure. (Tool software: FPWIN Pro, FPWIN GR)
Request concerning program storage
To prevent the accidental loss of programs, the user should consider the following measures.
- Drafting of documents
To avoid accidentally losing programs, destroying files, or overwriting the contents of files, documents
should be printed out and then saved.
- Specifying the password carefully.
The password setting is designed to avoid programs being accidentally overwritten. If the password is
forgotten, however, it will be impossible to overwrite the program even if you want to. Also, if a password
is forcibly bypassed, the program is deleted. When specifying the password, note it in the specifications
manual or in another safe location in case it is forgotten at some point.
v
Programming Tool Restrictions
Restrictions on usable programming tools depending on the units.
Type of programming tool Type of unit

Used
FPWIN GR Ver.2
Windows software (Ver.2.80 or later)
FPWIN GR Ver.1 Not used

Windows software Used
FPWIN Pro Ver.6
Conforms to IEC61131-3 (Ver.6.10 or later)
AFP1113V2
Not used
AFP1114V2
AFP1113
Not used
Handy programming unit AFP1114
(Discontinued product) AFP1111A
AFP1112A
Not used
AFP1111
AFP1112
AFP8670 Used
FP memory loader
AFP8671 (Ver.2.0 or later)
Note:
- In case of using FPWIN GR Ver.1, please purchase upgrade model FPWIN GR Ver.2.
- FPWIN GR Ver.2 can be upgraded free of charge at our web site.
- FPWIN Pro Ver.6 can be upgraded free of charge at our web site.
- The handy programming unit cannot be used.
Do not download any programs for other units such as FP1 to the FP0R using the handy programming
unit.
http://panasonic-denko.co.jp/ac/e/dl/software-list/patch/plc.jsp
vi
When Using FP0 Programs
The programs used on the existing FP0 can be used on the FP0R in the following 2 cases.
1. Using the programs in the FP0R specifications.

It enables to make maximum use of the performance and functions of the FP0R.
2. Using the programs in the same specifications as the FP0.

It enables to execute the programs in the same specifications as the FP0 (FP0 compatibility mode).
The points to take care when using the FP0 programs on the FP0R are described below in the above 2
cases.
- When using the programs in the FP0R specifications
- When using the programs in the same specifications as the FP0
When using the programs in the FP0R specifications.

As the FP0 programs cannot be used as they are, it is required to change the following 3 items for the
FP0 programs before downloading the programs into the FP0R.
1. Change in the model setting

Change the model for the FP0 programs to the one for the FP0R with a tool software.
2. Resetting of system registers

As the system registers will be initialized once the model setting is changed, reset the system registers if
necessary.
3. Modification of the programs

Depending on programs, they should be changed according to the specifications of FP0R.
vii
Differences between specifications of FP0 and FP0R effecting program change
Change in As the size of the data area and the settings of hold and non-hold areas changes,
data areas check if the address of the used data memory is correct. The area that has been used
as a hold area might be a non-hold area.
Change in The following instructions that are supported on the FP0 cannot be used. Replace
supported them with the instructions for the FP0R based on the following description.
instructions [FP0] [FP0R]
F144(TRNS) instruction → F159(MTRN) instruction
F168(SPD1) instruction → F171(SPDH), F177(HOME) instructions
F169(PLS) instruction → F172 (PLSH) instruction
F170(PWM) instruction → F173(PWMH) instruction
As for the following instructions, the specifications change. Modify the programs in
accordance with the specifications after the change.
[FP0] [FP0R]
F12(ICRD) instruction
Unit of read: 64 words → Unit of read: 2048 words
P13(PICWT) instruction
Unit of write: 64 words → Unit of write: 2048 words
Change in The addresses of the following special internal relays are changed.
special High-speed counter control flag
internal [FP0] [FP0R]
relays R903A: For CH0 → R9110 : For CH0
R903B: For CH1 → R9111 : For CH1
R903C: For CH2 → R9112 : For CH2
R903D: For CH3 → R9113 : For CH3
Change in The contents of the following special data registers are changed.
special data
[FP0] [FP0R]
registers DT9052(DT90052) DT90052
:High-speed counter control flag :High-speed counter control flag
As each 4 bits of the control code for all 4 As the areas to write the channel
channels are allocated, write the control code numbers to be changed and the
in the area of the corresponding channel. control codes are separated, write the
corresponding channel numbers and
control codes.
The addresses of the following special data registers are changed.

Elapsed value of high-speed counter CH0 to
CH3 [FP0R]
[FP0] → DT90300-DT90301
DT9044(DT90044)-DT9045(DT90045) → DT90304-DT90305
DT9048(DT90048)-DT9049(DT90049) → DT90308-DT90309
DT9104(DT90104)-DT9105(DT90105) → DT90312-DT90313
DT9108(DT90108)-DT9109(DT90109)
Target value of high-speed counter CH0 to
CH3
[FP0] [FP0R]
DT9046(DT90046)-DT9047(DT90047) → DT90302-DT90303
DT9050(DT90050)-DT9051(DT90051) → DT90306-DT90307
DT9106(DT90106)-DT9107(DT90107) → DT90310-DT90311
DT9110(DT90110)-DT9111(DT90111) → DT90314-DT90315
Note) The numbers in parentheses are for FP0-T32.

viii
When using the FP0R in the same specifications as FP0
The FP0R supports an operation mode "FP0 compatibility mode". Using this mode enables to use the
programs of the FP0 as they are.
In the FP0 compatibility mode, the programs except some programs can operate with the same
specifications as the FP0.
Note:
The FP0 compatibility mode is not available for the F32 type.
The speed of arithmetic processing in the FP0 compatibility mode is the same as the FP0R, so the
timing for processing the program may differ from the original timing for the FP0 program.
If you want to execute the program in the condition close to the original timing, set a constant scan or
insert a program that does not affect the external operation to adjust the timing.
How to use FP0 compatibility mode

Download the programs uploaded from the FP0 or the programs that the model code is created as the
FP0, using an applicable programming tool for the FP0R A confirmation message will be shown on the
tool, and the mode will be automatically changed to the FP0 compatibility mode.
Tools supporting FP0 compatibility mode

FPWIN GR Ver. 2.80 or later/FPWIN Pro Ver.6.10 or later
Restrictions on switching to FP0 compatibility mode

For downloading the FP0 programs to the FP0R in the FP0 compatibility mode, the model setting for the
FP0 programs should match the model type of the FP0R as the table below.
Model setting for FP0 program Applicable FP0R model

C10 C10RM, C10RS, C10CRM, C10CRS
C14 C14RM, C14RS, C14CRM, C14CRS
C16 C16T, C16P, C16CT, C16CP
C32 C32T, C32P, C32CT, C32CP
T32 T32T, T32P, T32CT, T32CP
ix
Differences between the specifications of FP0 compatibility mode and FP0
Basically, the FP0 programs do not need to be modified to activate the FP0 programs in the FP0
compatibility mode, however, as for the following items, the specifications are different. Check the
contents, and change the programs if necessary.
1. P13(PICWT) instruction specifications - EEPROM(FROM) write instruction

The execution time of this instruction differs. Depending on the number of write blocks, the execution
time may be longer or shorter.
No. of write blocks (No. of words) FP0 FP0 compatibility mode
1 block (64 words) Approx. 5ms Approx. 100ms
2 blocks (128 words) Approx. 10ms Approx. 100ms
②F170(PWM) instruction specifications - PWM output instruction

The settable frequencies differ. Especially, the setting for the low frequency band cannot be specified.
FP0 FP0 compatibility mode
Setting
Frequency (Hz) Cycle (ms) Frequency (Hz) Cycle (ms)
H11 1000 1.0 1000 1
H12 714 1.4 750 1.3
H13 500 2.0 500 2
H14 400 2.5 400 2.5
H15 200 5.0 200 5
H16 100 10.0 100 10
H0 38 26.3 40 25
H1 19 52.6 20 50
H2 9.5 105.3 10 100
H3 4.8 208.3 6 166.7
H4 2.4 416.7
H5 1.2 833.3
Cannot specify
H6 0.6 1666.7
(Error occurs)
H7 0.3 3333.3
H8 0.15 6666.7
x
3. Data size of elapsed value and target value of pulse output and high-speed counter
The data size is changed.
FP0: 24 bits
FP0 compatibility mode: 32 bits
4. F144(TRNS) instruction specifications - Serial data communication

The following 2 items in the specifications for sending data are changed.
1)Processing of starting data of send buffer
FP0: Stores the number of unsent bytes every one-byte transmission.
FP0 compatibility mode: Stores 0 after the completion of all data transmission.
2)Restriction on the number of sent bytes

FP0: No restriction
FP0 compatibility mode: 2048 bytes
5. F169(PLS) instruction specifications - Pulse output (JOG operation)

The following 2 items in the specifications are changed.
1)"Operation mode and direction output" setting process
FP0: "00: No counting mode" is selectable.
FP0 compatibility mode: "00: No counting mode" is not selectable.
Performs the same operation as the one when specifying "10: Incremental counting mode with not
direction output".
2)Pulse width specification

FP0: It is possible to set the fixed pulse width (80μs) or duty ratio.
FP0 compatibility mode: The settings are invalid and the duty ratio of pulse width is fixed at 25%.
6. F168(SPD1) instruction specifications - Positioning control (Home return)

The specifications during pulse output are changed.
FP0 : The elapsed value during home return is not fixed. It becomes zero when home return is done.
FP0 compatibility mode: The elapsed value is counted even during the home return operation. It
becomes zero when home return is done.
7. Real number calculation process

As the accuracy of real number calculation has been improved, the calculation result in the FP0
compatibility mode may differ from the result in the existing FP0 program.
8. Process when a secondary battery is out of charge (T32 type only)

If the secondary battery installed in the T32 type is out of charge, the next power-on process will be
different.
FP0: The value in the hold area of data memory will be unstable.
FP0 compatibility mode: The value in the hold area of data memory will be cleared to 0.
xi
xii
Chapter 1
Functions and Restrictions of the Unit
1.1 Unit Types
1.1.1 FP0R Control Units

Specifications
Program Power COM
Type No. of I/O Connecti Product No.
capacity supply Input Output port
points on type
voltage
Terminal
10 points ― AFP0RC10RS
16k 24V 24V DC Relay output: block
(Input: 6 points/
steps DC ±common 2A Molex
Output: 4 points) ― AFP0RC10RM
connector
C10
Terminal RS232C AFP0RC10CRS
10 points
16k 24V 24V DC Relay output: block RS485 AFP0RC10MRS
(Input: 6 points/
Output: 4 points) RS232C AFP0RC10CRM
connector
Terminal
14 points ― AFP0RC14RS
16k 24V 24V DC Relay output: block
(Input: 8 points/
Output: 6 points) ― AFP0RC14RM
connector
C14
Terminal RS232C AFP0RC14CRS
14 points
16k 24V 24V DC Relay output: block RS485 AFP0RC14MRS
(Input: 8 points/
Output: 6 points) RS232C AFP0RC14CRM
connector
Transistor
output: (NPN) ― AFP0RC16T
16 points (
16k 24V 24V DC 0.2A MIL
(Input: 8 points/
steps DC ±common Transistor connector
Output: 8 points)
output: (PNP) ― AFP0RC16P
0.2A
Transistor
output: (NPN) RS232C AFP0RC16CT
0.2A MIL
C16
Transistor connector
output: (PNP) RS232C AFP0RC16CP
16 points
16k 24V 24V DC 0.2A
(Input: 8 points/
steps DC ±common Transistor
Output: 8 points)
output: (NPN) RS485 AFP0RC16MT
0.2A MIL
output: (PNP) RS485 AFP0RC16MP
0.2A
Transistor
32 points output: (NPN) ― AFP0RC32T
32k (Input: 16 points/ 24V 24V DC 0.2A MIL
steps Output: 16 DC ±common Transistor connector
points) output: (PNP) ― AFP0RC32P
0.2A
Transistor
output: (NPN) RS232C AFP0RC32CT
0.2A MIL
C32
output: (PNP) RS232C AFP0RC32CP
32 points
32k 24V 24V DC 0.2A
(Input: 16 points/
steps DC ±common Transistor
Output: 16 point)
output: (NPN) RS485 AFP0RC32MT
0.2A MIL
output: (PNP) RS485 AFP0RC32MP
0.2A
1-2
Transistor
output: (NPN) RS232C AFP0RT32CT
0.2A MIL
32 points output: (PNP) RS232C AFP0RT32CP
32k (Input: 16 points/ 24V 24V DC 0.2A
T32
steps Output: 16 DC ±common Transistor
points) output: (NPN) RS485 AFP0RT32MT
0.2A MIL
output: (PNP) RS485 AFP0RT32MP
0.2A
Transistor
output: (NPN) RS232C AFP0RF32CT
0.2A MIL
32 points output: (PNP) RS232C AFP0RF32CP
32k (Input: 16 points/ 24V 24V DC 0.2A
F32
steps Output: 16 DC ±common Transistor
points) output: (NPN) RS485 AFP0RF32MT
0.2A MIL
output: (PNP) RS485 AFP0RF32MP
0.2A
1-3
FP0 Expansion Units
Specifications
Product Power
Connection Product No.
name No. of I/O points supply Input Output
type
voltage
8 points 24V DC MIL
- - AFP0RE8X
(Input: 8 points) ±common connector
Terminal
8 points AFP0RE8RS
24V 24V DC Relay output: block
(Input: 4 points,
DC ±common 2A Molex
Output: 4 points) AFP0RE8RM
connector
FP0R-E8
8 points 24V Relay output: Terminal
Expansion - AFP0RE8YRS
(Output: 8 points) DC 2A block
Unit
Transistor
8 points MIL
- - output: (NPN) AFP0RE8YT
(Output: 8 points) connector
0.3A
Transistor
8 points MIL
- - output: (PNP) AFP0RE8YP
0.3A
16 points 24V DC MIL
- - AFP0RE16X
(Input: 16 points) ±common connector
Terminal
16 points AFP0RE16RS
24V 24V DC Relay output: block
(Input: 8 points,
DC ±common 2A Molex
Output: 8 points) AFP0RE16RM
connector
16 points Transistor
24V DC MIL
(Input: 8 points, - output: (NPN) AFP0RE16T
FP0R-E16 ±common connector
Output: 8 points) 0.3A
Expansion
unit 24V DC MIL
(Input: 8 points, - output: (PNP) AFP0RE16P
±common connector
Transistor
16 points MIL
- - output: (NPN) AFP0RE16YT
0.3A
Transistor
16 points MIL
- - output: (PNP) AFP0RE16YP
0.3A
24V DC MIL
(Input: 16 points, - output: (NPN) AFP0RE32T
FP0R-E32 ±common connector
Expansion
unit 24V DC MIL
(Input: 16 points, - output: (PNP) AFP0RE32P
±common connector
1-4
1.1.2 Intelligent Units
Product Exclusive
Product name Specifications Part No.
No. manual
<Input specifications>
No. of channels: 2 channels
Input range: Voltage: 0 to 5 V,
-10~+10V (Resolution: 1/4000)
FP0 Analog I/O unit Current: 0 to 20 mA (Resolution: 1/4000) FP0-A21 AFP0480 ARCT1F390
<Output specifications>
No. of channels: 1 channel
Output range: Voltage: -10 to +10 V (Resolution: 1/4000)
Current: 0 to 20 mA (Resolution: 1/4000)
<Input specifications>
FP0 A/D Converter
Input range: Voltage: 0 to 5 V, -10 to +10V, -100 to 100 mV FP0-A80 AFP0401 ARCT1F321
unit
(Resolution: 1/4000)
Current: 0 to 20 mA (Resolution: 1/4000)
FP0 Thermocouple K, J, T, R thermocouples, resolution: 0.1℃ FP0-TC4 AFP0420
ARCT1F366
unit K, J, T, R thermocouples, resolution: 0.1℃ FP0-TC8 AFP0421
FP0 RTD
(Resistance- Pt100, Pt1000,Ni1000
FP0-RTD6 AFP0430 ARCT1F445
temperature detector) Resolution: 0.1℃/0.01℃ (Switch type)
unit
<Output specifications>
FP0-A04V AFP04121
FP0 D/A Converter
Output range: (Voltage output type): -10 to +10 V ARCT1F382
unit
(Resolution: 1/4000) FP0-A04I AFP04123
(Current output type): 4 to 20 mA (Resolution: 1/4000)
1.1.3 Link Units

Power
Product Exclusive
Product name Specifications supply Part No.
No. manual
voltage
This unit is for making the FP0 function as a slave
unit of the CC-Link.
FP0 CC-Link Only one unit can be connected to the furthest
24V DC FP0-CCLS AFP07943 ARCT1F380
Slave unit right edge of the FP0 expansion bus.
Note) Accuracy will change if an FP0
thermocouple unit is used at the same time.
This is a link unit designed to make the FP0
FP0 I/O Link Unit function as a slave unit to MEWNET-F (remote I/O 24V DC FP0-IOL AFP0732 This manual
system).
This is an RS485 adapter designed to allow use of
C-NET Adapter
the computer link function for connecting to a host
S2 type - - AFP15402
computer via C-NET. It comes with a 30 cm FP0
(for FP0 side)
tool port cable. A power supply is not required.
ARCT1F96
This is an RS485 adapter designed to allow use of 100 to
- AFP8536
C-NET Adapter the computer link function for connecting to a 240V AC
(for computer side) network-connected PLC via C-NET from a host
24V DC - AFP8532
computer.
Connected with FP series PLCs, it conducts Ethernet
FP Web-Server2
communication, sends e-mail, and displays the PLC data on FP-WEB2 AFP0611 ARCT1F446
unit
HTML pages.
1-5
1.1.4 Power Supply Unit
Product name Specifications Part No. Product No.
Input voltage: 100 to 240 V AC Free input
FP0 Power supply unit FP0-PSA4 AFP0634
Output capacity: 0.7A, 24 V DC
1.1.5 Options and Repair Parts

Product name Specifications Product No.
Data clear type AFP8670
FP Memory loader
Data hold type AFP8671
Terminal screwdriver Relay output type. Necessary when wiring terminal blocks (Phoenix). AFP0806
Molex connector pressure Necessary when wiring relay output type and Molex connectors.
AFP0805
contact tool (MOLEX: 57189-5000)
Multi-wire connector
Necessary when wiring transistor output type connectors. AXY52000FP
pressure contact tool
FP0 Slim type mounting Mounting plate for mounting control unit or expansion unit on a panel
AFP0803(10-pack)
plate vertically.
FP0 Flat type mounting plate Mounting plate for mounting Control unit on a panel horizontally. AFP0804 (10-pack)
Relay output Molex type I/O Loose-wiring cable (9 leads) AWG20, with Molex socket Length: 1 m AFP0551(2 cable set)
2
cable attached at one end, 0.5mm , 1 set: 2 cables (blue white) Length: 3 m AFP0553(2 cable set)
Transistor output type I/O Loose-wiring cable (10 leads) AWG22, with connector Length: 1 m AFP0521 (2 cable set)
2,
cable attached at one end,0.3mm 1 set: 2 cables (blue white) Length: 3 m AFP0523(2 cable set)
Terminal socket Attaches to relay output and terminal block type. Maintenance parts AFP0802(2 cable set)
Molex socket Attaches to relay output and Molex connector type. Maintenance parts AFP0801(2 cable set)
Wire-press socket Attaches to transistor output type. Maintenance parts AFP0807(2 cable set)
FP0 Power supply cable Attaches to FP0 various units. Maintenance parts Length: 1m AFP0581(1-pack)
FP0R/FPΣ Power supply
Attaches to FP0R control unit. Maintenance parts. Length: 1m AFPG805 (1-pack)
cable
1-6
1.2 Restrictions on Unit Combination
Up to three expansion units can be added on the right of the FP0R, these expansion units being either
expansion units or intelligent units.
A combination of relay output and transistor output types is also possible.
Controllable I/O points

Type of No. of I/O points when When the expansion unit When the expansion unit
control unit using control unit is the same output type is a transistor output type
C10 10 points Max. 58 points Max. 106 points
C32
T32 32 points Max. 128 points Max. 128 points
F32
Note:
- Install the FP0 thermocouple unit on the right side of all other expansion units.
- If it is installed on the left side, the total precision will deteriorate.
- Install the FP0 CC-Link slave unit on the right side of all other expansion units. There is no expansion
connector on the right side.
- Install the FP0 RTD unit on the right side of all other expansion units.
1-7
1.3 Programming Tools
1.3.1 Required Tools for Programming

1.Programming tool software
- The tool software can also be used with the FP
series.
- "FPWIN GR Ver.2" or "FPWIN Pro Ver.6" Windows
software is used with FP0R.
FP Programmer cannot be used.
2.PC connection cable

- A commercial USB cable (A: mini B type) is used for
the connection.
- A cable for connecting a PC (Mini-DIN 5-pin, D-sub 9-
pin) can be also used for the connection.
1.3.2 Software Environment and Suitable Cable

Standard ladder diagram tool software FPWIN GR Ver.2
OS
Type of software Hard disk capacity Product No.
(Operating system)
Full type AFPS10520

Windows98
FPWIN GR Ver.2 WindowsME
English-language Small type Windows2000 40MB or more AFPS11520
menu WindowsXP
Windows Vista
Upgrade version AFPS10520R
Note1) Ver.1.1 must be installed to install the upgrade version.

Note2) Ver.2.0 can be upgraded to Ver.2.1 or later free of charge at our web site
http://panasonic-denko.co.jp/ac/e/dl/software-list/patch/plc.jsp
Use the latest version.
Note3) The small type can be used only for each series of FP-e, FPΣ, FP0 and FP-X.
Conforms to IEC61131-3 programming tool software FPWIN Pro Ver.6

Type of software OS (Operating system) Hard disk capacity Product No.
Windows2000
FPWIN Pro Ver.6 English-
WindowsXP 100MB or more AFPS50560
language menu
Windows Vista
Note1) The small type and upgrade version is not available for Ver.6.
Note2) Ver.6.0 can be upgraded to Ver.6.1 or later free of charge at our web site
(http://www.panasonic-electric-works.com/peweu/en/html/22164.php).
Use the latest version.
1-8
Type of computer and suitable cable
For the connection between a personal computer (RS232C) and the control unit (RS232C)
D-sub connector cable

PLC side
PLC side connector Specifications Product No.
connector
Female-Mini DIN round 5-pin L type (3 m) AFC8503
D-sub 9-pin
Female-Mini DIN round 5-pin Straight type (3 m) AFC8503S
Note) A USB/RS232C conversion cable is necessary to connect with a personal computer without a
serial port using a PC connection cable.
For the connection between a personal computer (USB) and the control unit (USB)
USB cable
Use a commercial cable.
Cable type Length
USB 2.0 cable (A: miniB) Max. 5 m
Note) Windows2000 or later OS is required for the communication with a USB.
1-9
1-10
Chapter 2
Specifications and Functions of
Control Unit
2.1 Part Names and Functions
2.1.1 Part Names and Functions
Operation monitor LEDs

These LEDs display the current operation status of PLC such as RUN/STOP and ERROR/ALARM.
LED LED and operation status
Lights: In the RUN mode - The program is being executed.
RUN (Green) Flashes: The forced input/output is being executed in the RUN mode. (The RUN and
PROG. LEDs flash alternately.)
Lights: In the PROG. mode - The operation has stopped.
The forced input/output is being executed in the PROG. mode.
PROG. (Green)
Flashes: The forced input/output is being executed in the RUN mode. (The RUN and
PROG. LEDs flash alternately.)
Flashes An error is detected during the self-diagnostic function. (ERROR)
ERROR/ALARM
Lights A hardware error occurs, or operation slows because of the program, and
(Red)
the watchdog timer is activated. (ALARM)
2-2
RUN/PROG. mode switch
This switch is used to change the operation mode of PLC.
Switch Operation mode
RUN (Position: Up) RUN mode :The program is executed and the operation begins.
PROG. (Position: Down) PROG. mode :The operation stops. In this mode, programming can be
done using a tool software.
- Switching between RUN and STOP can be also performed by the remote operation from a
programming tool.
- When performing remote switching from the programming tool, the setting of the mode switch and the
actual mode of operation may differ. Verify the mode with the status indicator LED.
- Restart the power supply to operate in the mode set with the RUN/PROG. mode switch.
USB connector (Mini-USB B type (5-pin))

This connector is used to connect a programming tool.
A commercial USB cable (USB2.0 cable (A: miniB)) can be used.
Tool port (RS232C)
A commercial mini-DIN 5-pin connector is used for the tool port on the control unit.
Pin No. Signal name Abbreviation Signal direction
1 Signal Ground SG -
2 Send Data SD Unit → External device
3 Receive Data RD Unit ← External device
4 (Not used) - -
5 +5 V +5 V Unit → External device
- The followings are the default settings when the unit is shipped from the factory. The system register
should be used to change these.
Baud rate 9600bps
Char. Bit 8 bits
Parity check Odd parity
Stop bit 1 bit
Note) The unit number of the tool port should be set by the system register.
Input connector
Input status LEDs
Output connector
Output indicator LEDs
Power supply connector (24 V DC)
Supply 24 V DC. It is connected using the power supply cable (AFPG805) supplied with the unit.
COM port (RS232C or RS485)

Communication interface for connection with an external device such as a programmable display.
expansion hook
This hook is used to secure expansion units. The hook on the right side is also used for installation on
the flat-type mounting plate (AFP0804).
Right-side connector for FP0 expansion
This is used to connect the FP0-cum-FPΣ expansion unit installed on the right side of control unit to the
internal circuit. (The connector is located under the seal.)
DIN hook
This hook enables the unit to attach to a rail at a touch. It is also used to install the unit on the slim type
mounting plate (AFP0803).
2-3
2.2 Input and Output Specifications
2.2.1 Input Specifications

Input specifications (for all types)
Item Description
Insulation method Optical coupler
Rated input voltage 24 V DC
operating voltage range 21.6 V DC to 26.4 V DC
Rated input current Approx. 2.6 mA
For C10: 6 points/common
For C14, C16: 8 points/common
Output points per common For C32, T32, F32: 16 points/common
(Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be
connected to common terminal.)
Min. on voltage/Min. on current 19.2 V DC/2 mA
Max. off voltage/Max. off current 2.4 V DC/1.2 mA
Input impedance 9.1 kΩ
20 µs or less
OFF→ON Note) The input time constant can be set using system registers.
Response time
(0.1 ms to 64 ms)
ON→OFF Same as above
Operating mode indicator LED display
Note) This specification is applied when the rated input a voltage is 24 V DC and the temperature is 25℃.
Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points

Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as
determined by the ambient temperature.
Circuit diagram
R1=9.1 kΩ R2=1 kΩ
2-4
2.2.2 Output Specifications
Transistor output specifications
Description
Item
NPN PNP
Output type Open collector
Rated load voltage 5 V DC to 24 V DC 24 V DC
Operating load voltage range 4.75 V DC to 26.4 V DC 21.6 V DC to 26.4 V DC
Max. load current 0.2A
For C16: 8 points/common
Output points per common
For C32, T32, F32: 16 points/common
Off state leakage current 1 µA or less
On state voltage drop 0.2 V DC or less
OFF→ON 20 µs or less (Load current: 5 mA or more)
0.1 ms or less (Load current: 0.5 mA or more)
Response time
ON→OFF 40 µs or less (Load current: 5 mA or more)
0.2 ms or less (Load current: 0.5 mA or more)
External power Voltage 21.6V DC to 26.4V DC
supply Current C16: 30 mA or less C16:35 mA or less
(+ and - terminals) C32, T32, F32: 60 mA or less C32, T32, F32: 70 mA or less
Surge absorber Zener diode
Limitations on number of simultaneous output on points

Keep the number of output points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as
Circuit diagram
[NPN] [PNP]
2-5
Relay output specifications (C10/C14)
Item Description
Output type 1a output
Rated control capacity 2 A 250 V AC, 2 A 30 V DC (4.5 A or less/common) Note)
C10:2 points/common+1 point/common+1 point/common
Output points per common
C14:4 points/common+1 point/common+1 point/common
Response OFF → ON Approx. 10 ms
time ON → OFF Approx. 8 ms
Mechanical Min. 20,000,000 operations (Switching rate: 180 times/min.)
Lifetime Electrical Min. 100,000 operations (Switching rate: 20 times/min. at rated control
capacity)
Surge absorber None
Note) Resistance load
Circuit diagram
2-6
2.3 Terminal layout diagrams
Model No. Terminal layout diagrams
C10RS
C10CRS
C10RM
C10CRM
(The above illustration is the terminal block type.)
C14RS
C14CRS
C14RM
C14CRM
(The above illustration is the terminal block type.)
2-7
C16T
C16CT
Note: Two COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally.
C16P
C16CP
2-8
Model
Terminal layout diagrams
No.
C32T
C32CT
T32CT
F32CT
Note: Four COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally.
Two (+) terminals of the output circuit are connected internally.
Two (-) terminals of the output circuit are connected internally.
C32P
C32CP
T32CP
F32CP
Note: Four COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally.
2-9
2.4 Functions of T32 Control Unit
2.4.1 Memory Backup Function

The FP0R-T32 control unit has a secondary battery (Charging type).
The backup function for the operation memory and clock/calendar function can be used.
Backup of operation memory

(1) Timer/Counter (T/C)
(2) Internal relays (R)
(3) Data Registers (DT)
(4) Step ladders
The range specified with a programming tool is the hold area to be backed up.
If the range is not specified, it will be the area of the default.
Note) If the battery is out of charge and the hold area becomes indefinite, the value in the hold area will
be cleared to 0 when the power supply is turned on again.
Key Point:
Programs and system registers will be held in the internal ROM regardless of the built-in back up battery.
2-10
2.4.2 Built-in Backup Battery
Time the built-in backup battery can be used (Backup time)
The built-in backup battery is not charged when the unit is shipped.
Charge the battery sufficiently before use. (Full charge (Ambient temperature: 25°C): 72 hours)
It will be charged automatically if the DC power is supplied to the control unit.
Relation between charging time and backup time

The number of days in the backup time varies according to the rate of charging time.
If it is charged on a full charge (72 hours) at the ambient temperature of 25°C, the backup time
will be approx. 50 days.
The backup time will vary according to the ambient temperature when the battery is charged.
Ambient temperature when charged Number of days in backup time
70 °C Approx. 14 days
-20 °C Approx. 25 days
Predicted life of built-in backup battery

The life of the built-in backup battery varies according to the ambient temperature while the control unit is
on (energized).
Note) The temperature when the control unit is off (not powered) has little influence on the battery life.
Ambient temperature Lifetime of built-in backup battery

55 °C Approx. 430 days <Approx. 1 year>
45 °C Approx. 1200 days <Approx. 3 years>
34 °C or lower Approx. 10 years
Note: The built-in backup battery cannot be replaced.
2-11
2.4.3 Clock/Calendar
The clock/calendar function is available for the FP0R-T32.
Note) As the value is unstable in the initial state, write the value using a programming tool.
Area of clock/calendar
With the clock/calendar function, data indicating the hour, minute, second, day, year and other
information stored in the special data registers DT90053 to DT90057 can be read using the transmission
instruction and used in sequence programs.
Special data
Higher bytes Lower bytes Reading Writing
register No.
Hour data Minute data
DT90053 Available Not available
H00 to H23 H00 to H59
Minute data Second data
DT90054 Available Available
H00 to H59 H00 to H59
Day data Hour data
H01 to H31 H00 to H23
Year data Month data
H00 to H99 H01 to H12
Day-of-the-week data
DT90057 - Available Available
H00 to H06
Setting of Clock/Calendar Function

Setting using a programming tool
Using FPWIN GR
1.Select [Online Edit Mode] under the [Online] on the menu bar, or press the [CTRL] and [F2] keys at the
same time, to switch to the [Online] screen.
2.Select "Set PLC Data and Time" under "Tool" on the menu bar.
Set PLC Date and Time dialog box

The above steps display the "Set PLC Date and Time dialog
box" shown at the left. Input the date and time, and click on the
"OK" button.
Using FPWIN Pro

1. Select [Online Mode] under the [Online] on the menu bar, or press the [Shift] and [Esc] keys at the
same time, to switch to the [Online Mode] screen.
2. Select "Special Relay/Special Data Register" under "Monitor" on the menu bar.
3. The screen will appear to set various parameters.
2-12
Setting and changing using program
(1) The values written to the special data registers DT90054 to DT90057, which are allocated as the
clock/calendar setting area, are sent.
(2) A value of H8000 is written to DT90058.
Note) The value can be sent using the differential instruction "DF", or by changing H8000 to H0000.
Example showing the date and time being written

Set the time to 12:00:00 on the 5th day when the X0 turns on.
Note: As the value is unstable in the initial state, write the value using a programming tool.
As a day of the week is not automatically set on programming tools, fix what day is set to
00, and set the value for 00.
Example showing the clock/calendar being used

Sample program for fixed schedule and automatic start
In the example shown here, the clock/calendar function is used to output (Y0) signal for one second, at
8:30 a.m. every day.
Here, the "Hour/minute" data stored in the special data register DT90053 is used to output the signal at
the appointed time.
- The hour data is stored in the upper 8 bits of DT90053 and the minute data in the lower 8 bits, in the
BCD format.
- This hour and minute data is compared with the appointed time (BCD), and the R900B (=flag) special
internal relay is used to detect whether or not it matches the appointed time.
2-13
2-14
Chapter 3
Expansion
3.1 Expansion Method
The FP0/FP0R expansion units (expansion I/O unit, high-performance unit) are connected to the right
side of the control Unit.
Unit expansion is done using the right-side connector for FP0/FP0R expansion and the expansion hooks
on the side of the unit.
(1) Peel the seal on the right side of the unit to expose the internal right-side connector for the
FP0/FP0R expansion.
(2) Using a screwdriver or similar tool, pull out the top and bottom expansion hooks.
(3) Align the pins and holes in the four corners of the control unit and expansion unit, and insert
the pins into the holes so that there is no gap between the units.
(4) Press down the expansion hooks raised in Step (2) to secure the unit.
3-2
3.2 Part Names and Functions
Expansion Units
Part Names and Functions

Power supply connector
Supply 24 V DC. It is connected using the cable (AFP0581) supplied with the unit.
Input connector
Input indicator LED
Output connector
Output indicator LEDs
Expansion hook
This hook is used to secure expansion units.
Expansion connector
This connector is used to connect an expansion unit and internal circuit.
DIN hook
This hook enables the unit to attach to a rail at a touch. It is also used to install the unit on the slim type mounting
plate (AFP0803).
3-3
3.3 Input and Output Specifications
(1)Input specifications
Item Specifications
Rated input voltage 24 V DC
Rated input current Approx. 4.7 mA (at 24 V DC)
Input impedance Approx. 5.1 kΩ
Operating voltage range 21.6 V DC to 26.4 V DC
Input point per common E8X/E16P/E16T 8 points/common
(Either the positive or negative E32T/E16X 16 points/common
of the input power supply can
be connected to common E8R 4 points/common
terminal.)
Min. on voltage/Min. on current 19.2 V DC/3 mA
Max. off voltage/Max. off current 2.4 V DC/1 mA
OFF → ON 2 ms or less
Response time
ON → OFF 2 ms or less
Note) The above table shows the specifications of FP0R Expansion Unit. For FP0 Expansion Unit, the
rated input voltage is approx. 4.3 mA, and the input impedance is approx. 5.6 kΩ.

Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined
by the ambient temperature.
Internal circuit diagram
R1=5.1 kΩ, R2=910Ω
3-4
(2) Output specifications
Relay type output specifications
E8RS/E8RM/E8YRS/E16RS/E16RM
Item Description
Output type 1a relay output
Rated control capacity: 2 A 250 V AC, 2 A 30 V DC (Max. 4.5 A or less/common) Note)
Output points per E8R 4 points/common
common E16R, E8YR 8 points/common
OFF → ON Approx. 10 ms
Response time
ON → OFF Approx. 8 ms
Mechanical Min. 20,000,000 operations
Lifetime
Electrical Min. 100,000 operations
Surge absorber None
Note) Resistance load
Transistor type output specifications

(NPN output type: E8YT/E16YT/E16T/E32T)
(PNP output type: E8YP/E16YP/E16P/E32P)
Description
Item
NPN PNP
Output type Open collector
Rated load voltage 5 V DC to 24 V DC 24 V DC
Operating load voltage range 4.75 V DC to 26.4 V DC 21.6 V DC to 26.4 V DC
Max. load current 0.3A/point (Max. 1 A per common)
Output points per E16T, E8Y 8 points/common
common E32, E16Y 16 points/common
Off state leakage current 100 µA or less
On state voltage drop 1.5V or less
External power Voltage 21.6 V DC to 26.4 V DC
supply (for driving
Current 3 mA/1 point
internal circuit)
OFF→ON 1 ms or less
Response time
ON→OFF 1 ms or less
Surge absorber Zener diode
Note) The above table shows the specifications of FP0R expansion unit. For FP0 Expansion Unit, the
maximum load current is 0.1 A.
3-5
Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as

[NPN] [PNP]
3-6
3.4 Terminal layout diagram
E8RS
E8RM
E16RS
E16RM
E8YRS
3-7
Model
No.
E8X
E16T
E8YT
E16X
E32T
E16YT
3-8
Model
No.
E16P
E8YP
E32P
E16YP
3-9
3-10
Chapter 4
I/O Allocation
4.1 I/O Allocation
Note) The usable I/O numbers are different depending on the units.
Regarding I/O number

Specifying X and Y numbers
On the FP0R, the same numbers are used for input and output.
Expression of numbers for input/output relays

Since input relay "X" and output relay "Y" are handled in units of 16 points, they are expressed as a
combination of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below.
4-2
4.2 I/O Allocation for FP0R Control Unit
4.2.1 I/O Numbers of FP0R Control Unit

The I/O allocation of FP0R control unit is fixed.
Type of control unit Number of allocation I/O number
Input (6 point) X0 to X5
C10
Output (4 points) Y0 to Y3
Input (8 points) X0 to X7
C14
Input (8 points) X0 to X7
C16
Input (16 points) X0 to XF
C32/T32/F32
Output (16 points) Y0 to YF
4-3
4.3 I/O Numbers of FP0/FP0R Expansion Unit
･I/O numbers do not need to be set as I/O allocation is automatically performed when an expansion unit
is added.
･The I/O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location.
Number of Expansion Expansion Expansion
Type of unit
allocation unit 1 unit 2 unit 3
E8X Input (8 points) X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67
Input (4 points) X20 to X23 X40 to X43 X60 to X63
E8R
Output (4 points) Y20 to Y23 Y40 to Y43 Y60 to Y63
E8YT/P
Output (8 points) Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67
E8YR
FP0/FP0R
E16X Input (16 points) X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F
Expansion unit
E16R Input (8 points) X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67
E16T/P Output (8 points) Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67
E16YT/P Output (16 points) Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F
Input (16 points) X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F
E32T/P
Output (16 points) Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F
Input (16 points) WX2 WX4 WX6
CH0 (X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)
FP0 Analog I/O Input (16 points) WX3 WX5 WX7
FP0-A21
unit CH1 (X30 to X3F) (X50 to X5F) (X70 to X7F)
WY2 WY4 WY6
Output (16 points)
(Y20 to Y2F) (Y40 to Y4F) (Y60 to Y6F)
FP0 A/D Input (16 points) WX2 WX4 WX6
FP0-A80
conversion unit CH0, 2, 4, 6 (X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)
FP0-TC4
FP0 Thermocouple Input (16 points) WX3 WX5 WX7
FP0-TC8
unit CH1, 3, 5, 7 (X30 to X3F) (X50 to X5F) (X70 to X7F)
CH0, 2, 4 (X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)
FP0 RTD unit FP0-RTD
WY2 WY4 WY6
Output (16 points)
WX2 WX4 WX6
Input (16 points)
(X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)
FP0 D/A FP0-A04V Output (16 points) WY2 WY4 WY6
conversion unit FP0-A04I CH0, 2 (Y20 to Y2F) (Y40 to Y4F) (Y60 to Y6F)
Output (16 points) WY3 WY5 WY7
CH1, 3 (Y30 to Y3F) (Y50 to Y5F) (Y70 to Y7F)
Input (32 points) X20 to X3F X40 to X5F X60 to X7F
FP0 I/O link unit FP0-IOL
Output (32 points) Y20 to Y3F Y40 to Y5F Y60 to Y7F
- The data for the each channels of FP0 A/D conversion unit (FP0-A80), FP0 thermocouple unit (FP0-
TC4/FP0-TC8) and FP0 D/A conversion unit (FP0-A04V/FP0-A04I) is converted and loaded with a user
program that includes a switching flag to convert the data.
- Regarding FP0 CC-Link slave unit, please refer to the exclusive manual.
4-4
Chapter 5
Installation and Wiring
5.1 Installation
5.1.1 Installation Environment and Space

Operating environment
(Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when installing)
- Ambient temperature: 0 to +55 ℃
- Ambient humidity: 10 to 95 % RH (at 25 ℃, non-condensing)
- For use in pollution Degree 2 environment.
- Do not use the unit in the following environments.

- Direct sunlight
- Sudden temperature changes causing condensation.
- Inflammable or corrosive gas.
- Excessive airborne dust, metal particles or saline matter.
- Benzine, paint thinner, alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia
or caustic soda.
- Direct vibration, shock or direct drop of water.
- Influence from power transmission lines, high voltage equipment, power cables, power equipment,
radio transmitters, or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges.(100 mm or
more)
Static electricity
- Do not touch connector pins directly to prevent static electricity from causing damage.
- Always rid yourself of any static electricity before handling this product.
Measures regarding heat discharge

Always install the unit oriented with the tool port facing outward on the bottom in order to prevent the
generation of heat.
- Do not install the unit as shown below.
- Do not install the unit above devices which generate heat such heaters, transformers or large scale
resistors.
5-2
Installation space
- Leave at least 50 mm of space between the wiring ducts of the unit and other devices to allow heat
radiation and unit replacement.
- Maintain at least 100 mm of space between devices to avoid adverse affects from noise and heat when
installing a device or panel door to the front of the PLC unit.
- Leave at least 100 mm of space from the front surface of the control unit in order to allow room for
programming tool connections and wiring.
5.1.2 Installation and Removal

Attachment to DIN rail and removal from DIN rail
The unit can be simply attached to DIN rail.
Procedure of installation
(1) Fit the upper hook of the unit onto the DIN rail.
(2) Without moving the upper hook, press on the lower hook to fit
the unit into position.
Procedure of removal
(1) Insert a slotted screwdriver into the DIN rail attachment lever.
(2) Pull the attachment lever downwards.
(3) Lift up the unit and remove it from the rail.
5-3
5.1.3 Installation Using the Optional Mounting Plate
When using the slim type FP0 mounting plate (AFP0803)
Use M4 size pan-head screws for attachment of the mounting plate and install according to the
dimensions shown below.
The rest of the procedure is the same as that for attaching the unit to the DIN rails.
Note:
When using an expansion unit, tighten the screws after joining all of the mounting plate to be connected.
Tighten the screws at each of the four corners.
[Example] When using the maximum numbers of the expansion units (with AFP0803)
5-4
When using the flat type mounting plate (AFP0804)
Use M4 size pan-head screws for attachment of the mounting plate and install according to the
dimensions shown below.
Raise the expansion hooks of the unit. Align the expansion hooks with the mounting plate and press the
hooks.
An unit with an attached mounting plate can also be installed sideways on a DIN rail.
Note:
The flat type mounting plate (AFP0804) should be used only with the control unit as a stand-alone unit.
It should not be used when the unit is being used in combination with an FP0/FP0R expansion unit.
5-5
5.2 Wiring of Power Supply
5.2.1 Wiring of Power Supply
Power supply wiring for the unit

Use the power supply cable (Part number: AFPG805) that comes with the unit to connect the power
supply.
Brown: 24 V DC
Blue: 0 V
Green: Function earth
Power supply wire
To minimize adverse effects from noise, twist the brown and blue wires of the power supply cable.
Power supply type
- To protect the system against erroneous voltage from the power supply line, use an insulated power
supply with an internal protective circuit.
- The regulator on the unit is a non-insulated type.
- If using a power supply device without an internal protective circuit, always make sure power is
supplied to the unit through a protective element such as a fuse.
Power supply voltage
Rated voltage 24V DC
Operating voltage range 21.6V DC to 26.4V DC
Wiring system
- Isolate the wiring systems to the control unit, input/output devices, and mechanical power apparatus.
Measures regarding power supply sequence

- The power supply sequence should be set up so that power to the control unit is turned off before the
input/output power supplies.
- If the input/output power supplies are turned off before the power to the control unit, the unit will detect
the input fluctuations and may begin an unscheduled operation.
- Be sure to supply power to the control unit and an expansion unit from the same power supply, and turn
the power on and off simultaneously for both.
5-6
5.2.2 Grounding
In situations of excess noise
Under normal conditions, the inherent noise resistance is sufficient. However, in situations of excess
noise, ground the instrument to increase noise suppression.
Exclusive grounding
- The grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 100Ω.
- The point of grounding should be as close to the PLC as possible. The ground wire should be as short
as possible.
- If two devices share a single ground point, it may produce an adverse effect. Always use an exclusive
ground for each device.
Note:
Depending on the surroundings in which the equipment is used, grounding may cause problems.
Since the power supply line of the FP0/FP0R expansion unit is connected to the function earth through a
varistor, if there is an irregular potential between the power supply line and earth, the varistor may be
shorted.
As for the FP0R control unit, since its power supply line is connected to the function earth through a
high-voltage capacitor, it is no problem.
Do not ground the function earth terminal when grounding a plus (+) terminal of the power.
Do not ground the FP0R function earth terminal when grounding a plus (+) terminal of the power.
In some computers, the SG terminal of RS232C port and connector shielding are connected.
In addition, an FP0R tool port shielding and function earth terminal are connected.
Therefore, the GND terminal of FP0R and the function earth terminal are connected if the computer is
connected.
Especially when the FP0R is connected to a computer with a plus (+) terminal grounded, the GND
terminal is in the state that the voltage of -24 V is applied. As a result, short circuit occurs which may
lead to the breakage of FP0R and its neighboring parts if the GND terminal is connected to the earth
terminal in that state.
5-7
5.3 Wiring of Input and Output
5.3.1 Input Wiring

Connection of photoelectric sensor and proximity sensor
Relay output type NPN open collector output type
Voltage output type Two-wire output type
Precaution when using LED-equipped reed switch

When a LED is connected in series to an input
contact such as LED-equipped reed switch,
make sure that the voltage applied to the PLC
input terminal is greater than the ON voltage. In
particular, take care when connecting a number
of switches in series.
Precaution when using two-wire type sensor

If the input of PLC does not turn off because of
leakage current from the two-wire type sensor
"photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor", the
use of a bleeder resistor is recommended, as
shown on the left.
The formula is based on an input impedance of
9.1 kΩ. The input impedance varies depending
on the input terminal number.
5-8
Precaution when using LED-equipped limit switch
If the input of PLC does not turn off because of
leakage current from the LED-equipped limit
switch, the use of a bleeder resistor is
recommended, as shown on the left.
5-9
5.3.2 Output Wiring
Protective circuit for inductive loads
- With an inductive load, a protective circuit should be installed in parallel with the load.
- When switching DC inductive loads with relay output, be sure to connect a diode across the ends of the
load.
When using an AC inductive load (Relay output type)
When using an DC inductive load
Precautions when using capacitive loads

When connecting loads with large in-rush currents, to minimize their effect, connect a protection circuit
as shown below.
Use an external fuse as overload protection

A fuse is not built in the output circuit. It is recommended to install external fuses on every circuit, in
order to prevent the output circuit to be burned out when the output is shorted. However, in some cases
such as shortcircuit, the element of the unit may not be protected.
5.3.3 Precautions Regarding Input and Output Wirings

Separate the input, output, and power lines
- Be sure to select the thickness (dia.) of the input and output wires while taking into consideration the
required current capacity.
- Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are separated, and these wirings are separated
from the power wiring, as much as possible. Do not route them through the same duct or wrap them up
together.
- Separate the input/output wires from the power and high voltage wires by at least 100 mm.
5-10
5.4 Wiring of MIL Connector Type
Supplied connector and suitable wires
The connector listed below is supplied with the unit. Use the suitable wires given below. Also, use the
required pressure connection tools for connecting the wires.
Suitable wires (Twisted wire)

Size Nominal cross-sectional area Insulation thickness Rated current
AWG#22 0.3mm2
Dia. 1.5 to dia. 1.1 3A
AWG#24 0.2mm2
Connector for loose-wire cable (Attached to the control unit and expansion I/O unit)
Unit type and required quantity
Manufacturer Type and product No.
E8 C16/E16 C32/T32/F32/E32
Housing(10P) 1 pc 2 pcs x 1 set 2 pcs x 2 sets
Panasonic Electric
Semi-cover(10P) 2 pcs 4 pcs x 1 set 4 pcs x 2 sets
Works SUNX Co.,
Contact (for AW22 and 24) 4 pcs x 1 set 4 pcs x 2 sets
Ltd. 2 pcs x 1 set
5 pins
Note) The parts of the number of the connectors are supplied with the product. If you need more
connectors, purchase AFP0807 (2 sets/pack).
Pressure connection tool
Manufacturer Product No.
Panasonic Electric Works SUNX Co.,
AXY52000FP
Ltd.
Key Point:
When using a MIL connector for flat cables, purchase the product number AFP0808 (4 pcs, 10-pin
strain-relief with key). In this case, the suitable wire is AWG#28 and the rated current is 1A.
5-11
Wiring method
The wire end can be directly crimped without removing the wire's insulation, saving labor.
(1) Bend the welder (contact) back from the carrier, and set it in the pressure connection tool.
(2) Insert the wire without removing its insulation until it stops, and lightly grip the tool.
(3) After press-fitting the wire, insert it into the housing.
(4) When all wires has been inserted, fit the semi-cover into place.
If there is a wiring mistake or the cable is incorrectly pressure-connected, the contact puller pin provided
with the fitting can be used to remove the contact.
5-12
5.5 Wiring of Terminal Block Type
Attached terminal block/Suitable wires
A screw-down connection type is used for the terminal block. The suitable wires are given below.
Terminal block socket

The terminal socket manufactured by Phoenix Contact is used.
Model No. of Phoenix Contact
No. of pins
Model No. Product No.
9 pins MC1,5/9-ST-3,5 1840434

Size Nominal cross-sectional area
AWG#24 to 16 0.2mm2 to 1.25mm2
Pole terminals with compatible insulation sleeve

If a pole terminal is being used, the following models manufactured by Phoenix Contact Co. should be
used.
Manufacturer Cross-sectional area Size Phoenix Contact model No.
0.25mm2 AWG#24 AI 0,25―6 YE
0.50mm2 AWG#20 AI 0,5―6 WH
0.75mm2 AWG#18 AI 0,75―6 GY
Phoenix Contact Co.
1.00mm 2
AWG#18 AI 1―6 RD
2 AI―TWIN 2 ×
0.5mm ×2 AWG#20 (for 2 pcs)
0.5―8 WH
Pressure welding tool for pole terminals

Model No. of Phoenix Contact
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact Co. CRIMPFOX UD 6 1204436
For tightening the terminal block

When tightening the terminals of the terminal block, use a screwdriver (Phoenix Contact Co., Product No.
1205037) with a blade size of 0.4 x 2.5 (Part No. SZS 0,4x2,5).
The tightening torque should be 0.22 to 0.25 N m (2.3 to 2.5 kgf-cm) or less.
5-13
Wiring method
(1) Remove a potion of the wire's insulation.
(2)Insert the wire into the terminal block until it contacts the back of the block socket, and then
tighten the screw clockwise to fix the wire in place. (The tightening torque: 0.22 to 0.25 N m (2.3
to 2.5 kgf-cm))
Notes for wiring

- When removing the wire's insulation, be careful not to scratch the core wire.
- Do not twist the wires to connect them.
- Do not solder the wires to connect them. The solder may break due to vibration.
- After wiring, make sure stress is not applied to the wire.
- In the terminal block socket construction, if the wire is fastened upon counter-clockwise rotation of the
screw, the connection is faulty. Disconnect the wire, check the terminal hole, and then re-connect the
wire.
5-14
5.6 Wiring of Molex Connector Type
Supplied connector and suitable wires
The connector listed below is supplied with the unit. Use the suitable wires given below. Also, use the
required pressure connection tools for connecting the wires.
Supplied connector
Manufacturer Molex Japan model No.
Housing 51067-0900 2 pcs
Japan Molex Co., Ltd.
Contact 50217-8100 20 pcs

Size Cross-sectional area Insulation thickness
AWG#24~18 0.2mm2~0.75mm2 Dia. 1.4 to dia. 3.0
Pressure connection tool

Manufacturer Molex Japan model No.
Japan Molex Co., Ltd. 57189-5000
Wiring method
(2) Place the contact in the crimping tool, place the wire in the contact and lightly squeeze the tool
(3) Insert the crimped wire into the housing until it contacts the back side.
(4) When removing the wire, use a flat-head screwdriver, or other similar tool, to pull up the hold-down
pin of the housing and then pull out the wire.
5-15
5.7 Wiring of COM Port
5.7.1 Suitable Wires and Wiring Method

Terminal block/Suitable wires
A screw-down connection type is used for the COM port. Use the suitable wires given below.
Terminal block
The communication connector manufactured by Phoenix Contact is used.
Phoenix Contact model No.
No. of pins
3 pins MKDS1/3-3.5 1751400

Size Cross-sectional area
AWG#28 to 16 0.08mm2 to 1.25mm2
Use the above wires shielded. it is recommended to ground the shielded part. Also, if using a pole
terminal, refer to "5.5 Wiring of Terminal Block Type".
5-16
Wiring method
(2) Insert the wire into the COM port until it contacts the back side.
(3) Tighten the screw.
For tightening the terminal block

When tightening the COM port, use a screwdriver (Phoenix Contact Co., Product No. 1205037) with a
blade size of 0.4 x 2.5 (Part No. SZS 0,4x2,5). The tightening torque should be 0.22 to 0.25 N•m (2.3 to
2.5 kgf-cm) or less.
Notes for wiring

1. When removing the wire's insulation, be careful not to scratch the core wire.
2. Do not twist the wires to connect them.
3. Do not solder the wires to connect them. The solder may break due to vibration.
4. After wiring, make sure stress is not applied to the wire.
5. In the terminal block socket construction, if the wire is fastened upon counter-clockwise rotation of the
screw, the connection is faulty. Disconnect the wire, check the terminal hole, and then re-connect the
wire.
5-17
5.7.2 Connection of COM Port (RS485 Type)
- Wiring should extend from one unit to the next, between "+" terminals, and "-" terminals as below.
Never run two wires from a single unit to two other units.
- In the unit that serves as the terminal station, connect the "E" terminal and "-" terminal.
5.7.3 Selection of Transmission Cables (RS485 Type)

Please use the following cables as transmission cables.
Appropriate electrical cables (twisted cables)
Conductor Insulator
Sample
Cross-sectional Resist- Cable
Type Thick- appropriate
view Size ance Material diam.
ness cable
(at 20°C)
Belden 9207
2
Shielded 0.5 mm Max. Hitachi Cable,
Polye- Max. Approx.
twisted (AWG20) 33.4 Ltd. KPEV-
thylene 0.5 mm 7.8 mm 2
pair or greater Ω/km S0.5 mm x
1P
2
0.5 mm Max. Polychlo-
Max. Approx. VCTF-0.5
VCTF (AWG20) 37.8 rinated 2
0.6 mm 6.2 mm mm x 2C(JIS)
or greater Ω/km biphenyl
Note:
- Use shielded twisted pair cables.
- Use only one type of transmission cable. Do not mix more than 1 type.
- Twisted pair cables are recommended in noisy environments.
- When using shielded cable with crossover wiring for the RS485 transmission line, grounded one end.
- If two wires are connected to the plus terminal and minus terminal of RS485, use the wires of the same
2
cross-sectional area which is 0.5 mm .
5.7.4 Baud Rate Setting (RS485 Type)

Confirm the baud rate setting before installation when using the COM port. The factory default setting is
115200 bps.
5-18
5.8 Safety Measures
5.8.1 Safety Measures

Precautions regarding system design
On the system using PLC, malfunction may occur for the following reasons:
- Power on timing differences between the PLC and input/output or mechanical power apparatus.
- Response time lag when a momentary power drop occurs.
- Abnormality in the PLC unit, external power supply, or other devices.
In order to prevent a malfunction resulting in system shutdown, choose the adequate safety measures
listed in the following:
Interlock circuit
When a motor clockwise/counter-clockwise operation is controlled, provide an interlock circuit externally.
Emergency stop circuit

Provide an emergency stop circuit to the PLC externally to turn off the power supply of the output device.
Start up sequence
The PLC should be started after booting the I/O device and mechanical power apparatus. To keep this
sequence, the following measures are recommended.
- Turn on the PLC with the mode selector set to the PROG. mode, and then switch to the RUN mode.
- Program the PLC so as to disregard the inputs and outputs until the outside devices are energized.
Note) In case of stopping the operation of the PLC also, have the input/output devices turned off after the
PLC has stopped operating.
Grounding
When installing the controller next to devices that generate high voltages from switching, such as
inverters, do not ground them together. Use an exclusive ground for each device.
5.8.2 Momentary Power Failures

Operation of momentary power failures
If the duration of the power failure is less than 5 ms, the FP0R continues to operate. If the power is off for
5 ms or longer, operation changes depending on the combination of units, the power supply voltage, and
other factors.
(In some cases, operation may be the same as that for a power supply reset.)
5.8.3 Protection of Power Supply and Output Sections

Power supply
An insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit should be used. The power supply for the
control unit operation is a non-insulated circuit, so if an incorrect voltage is directly applied, the internal
circuit may be damaged or destroyed.
If using a power supply without a protective circuit, power should be supplied through a protective
element such as fuse.
Protection of output
If current exceeding the rated control capacity is being supplied in the form of a motor lock current or a
coil shorting in an electromagnetic device, a protective element such as a fuse should be attached
externally.
5-19
5-20
Chapter 6
Preparation of USB Port
6.1 USB Connection
6.1.1 Precautions when connecting PLC with USB port

Note the following restriction for using a personal computer and PLC with USB connection.
PLC type Applicable OS FPWIN GR version
FP-X Windows® 98 2.5 or later
Windows® Me
Windows® 2000
Windows® XP
Windows Vista®
FP0R Windows® 2000 2.8 or later
Windows® XP
Windows Vista®
FP-X, FP0R Windows® 7 2.9 or later
Do not connect a computer to PLC with USB before installing FPWIN GR.
When connecting a personal computer to PLC with USB, the dialog boxes as below may be displayed.
If the FPWIN GR has not been installed, click [Cancel] to close these dialog boxes.
Windows® XP Windows® 98SE
For Windows® 7, although the following window appears, it will automatically disappear after a short
time. (The driver is not installed.)
6-2
Restrictions on USB Communication
• The FP0R connected to the USB is recognized by the PC as that is connected through the COM port.
When multiple FP0R units are connected to one PC with the USB, they cannot communicate with the
PC simultaneously.
• The PC can communicate with the FP0R that was connected first only, and it cannot communicate with
the other FP0R.
• A USB HUB cannot be used for the connection.
6.1.2 Installation of USB Driver

USB drivers must be installed to connect the unit with the USB.
The installation procedures differ depending on the OS in the PC to be used.
Note:
For the PC with more than one connector, it may be requested to reinstall these two drivers if the
positions of the USB connectors are changed. In that case, reinstall the drivers.
Procedure of installing the driver (e.g.: Windows® XP)
1. Once the FP0R is connected, the following screen is displayed. Select “No, not this time”, and click
“Next>”.
6-3
2. Select “Install from a list of specific location”, and click “Next>”.
3. Select “Search for the best driver in these locations”, and check “Include this location in the search”.
Then, click the “Browse” button to specify the folder that the USB driver of FP0R has been stored, and
click “Next>”.
4. Although the following dialog box appears during the installation, click “Continue anyway”.
6-4
5. Click “Finish” on the following screen to be displayed.
6-5
Procedure of installing the driver (e.g.: Windows® 7)
1. Once the FP0R is connected, the following screen is displayed.

(It will automatically disappear after a short time.)
2. Click the start menu and move the mouse pointer to "Computer", and right-click on it to select
"Properties".
3. As the following screen is displayed, click "Device Manager".
6-6
4. Double-click on "FP0R".
5. Click "Update Driver...".
6-7
6. Click "Browse my computer for driver software".
7. Click the "Browse..." button to specify the folder that the USB driver of FP0R has been stored, and
click "Next".
If the location was not changed when installing FPWIN GR, the USB driver of FP0R has been stored in
"C:\Program Files\Panasonic-EW SUNX Control\FP0R USB".
6-8
8. Although the following warning dialog box appears, click "Install this driver software anyway".
9. The installation of the driver software begins. Once the installation completes successfully, the
following screen will be displayed.
In this case, the USB port has been assigned to "COM4". However, it may differ depending on the
environment of the PC you use.
6-9
6.1.3 Confirming COM Ports
The USB connected to the FP0R is recognized as a COM port by a PC. The COM port number assigned
to the USB differs according to the PC environment.
How to confirm COM port
1. Connect the PLC and a PC with a USB cable.
2. Display "Device Manager".
For Windows Vista or Windows 7

Select "Windows Start Menu" > "Computer" > "System Properties" > "Device Manager".
For Windows XP
Select "My computer" > "View System information" > "Hardware" tab > "Device Manager".
3. Double-click "Ports (COM & LPT)". As the table of allocation of COM ports is shown, confirm
the COM port number.
"Panasonic Electric Works PLC Virtual UART(COMn)" is the allocated COM port.
COM4 is allocated in the following display.
6-10
6.1.4 Communication with Programming Tool
The following communication setting should be specified to perform the communication with a
programming tool (FPWIN GR/FPWIN Pro) using the USB.
1. Display the "Communication Setting" window from the programming tool.

<Using FPWIN GR>
Select "Communication Setting" under "Option" from the menu bar.
<Using FPWIN Pro>
Select "Communication Setting" under "Online" from the menu bar.
2. Specify the communication setting as the table below. Once the setting has been completed,
the communication with the USB becomes available.
Network type C-NET(RS232C)

Port No. COM port number allocated for the USB
Baud rate The baud rate cannot be specified. Even if any rate is selected, the setting will be
invalid.
(USB2.0 FullSpeed)
Data length 8 bits
Stop bit 1 bit
Parity Odd
6-11
6-12
Chapter 7
Communication
7.1 Functions and Types
7.1.1 Communication Modes and Communication Ports

On the FP0R, four different communication modes are available.
According to the communication mode to be used, the usable communication ports vary.
Communication mode Usable communication port
Computer link Tool port
USB port
COM port
General-purpose serial Tool port
communication COM port
PC(PLC) link COM port
MODBUS RTU COM port
7.1.2 Computer Link

- Computer link is used for communication with a computer connected to the PLC. Instructions
(command messages) are transmitted to the PLC, and the PLC responds (sends response messages)
based on the instructions received.
- A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL-COM is used to exchange data between the
computer and the PLC.
- The PLC answers automatically to the commands received from the computer, so no program is
necessary on the PLC side in order to carry out communication.
7.1.3 General-purpose Serial Communication

- With general-purpose serial communication, data can be sent back and forth between an external
device connected such as an image processing device and a bar code reader.
- Reading and writing of data is done using a ladder program in the FP0R, while reading and writing of
data from an external is handled through the data registers.
7-2
7.1.4 PC(PLC) Link
Using a commercial R232C/RS485 converter enables to configure a PC(PLC) link (MEWNET-W0) with
the FP0R.
- Exclusive internal relays "link relays (L)" and data registers "link registers (LD)" are shared between the
connected PLCs.
7.1.5 MODBUS RTU

Function overview
- The MODBUS RTU protocol enables the communication between the FP0R and other devices
(including our FP-e, Programmable display GT series and KT temperature control unit).
- Communication is performed when the master unit sends instructions (command messages) to slave
units and the slave unit returns responses (response messages) according to the instructions.
Master function
Slave function
7-3
7.2 Communicaton Port Type
7.2.1 Tool Port

A commercial mini-DIN 5-pin connector is used for the tool port on the control unit.
Pin No. Signal name Abbreviation Signal direction
1 Signal Ground SG -
2 Send Data SD Unit → External device
３ Receive Data RD Unit ← External device
４ (Not used) - -
５ +5 V +5 V Unit → External device
7.2.2 USB Port

A commercial USB2.0 cable (A: miniB) can be used.

Standard USB2.0
connector shape USB miniB type
Note) The USB driver should be installed. It is assigned to a
virtual COM port on the PC Select "RS232C(C-NET)" in a
programming tool.
7.2.3 COM Port

It is a screw down connection type terminal block (3-pin).
7-4
7.3 Communication Specifications
Tool Port
Description
Interface RS232C
Transmission distance 15 m
Baud rate 2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 bit/s
Communication method Half-duplex communication
Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system
Data length: 7 bits/8bits
Parity: None/Even/Odd
Communication format Start code: STX/No STX
End code: CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits
Data transmission order Transmits from bit 0 character by character.
Computer link (slave)
Communication mode Modem initialization
General-purpose communication (only in RUN mode)
USB port
Description
Standard (Baud rate) USB2.0 Fullspeed
Communication mode Computer link (slave)
COM port (RS232C port)

Description
Interface RS232C
Baud rate 2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 bit/s
Data transmission order Transmits from bit 0 character by character.
Computer link (master/slave)
Modem initialization
Communication mode General-purpose communication
MODBUS RTU (master/slave)
PC(PLC) link
Factory default settings

Baud rate Data length Parity Stop bit
Tool port 9600 bit/s 8 bits Odd 1 bit
COM port (RS232C port) 9600 bit/s 8 bits Odd 1 bit
7-5
COM port (RS485)
Item Description
Interface RS485
Communication mode 1:N communication
Note1) 2)
Transmission distance Max. 1200 m
Note2) 3))
Baud rate 19200, 115200 bps
Communication method Two-wire, half-duplex transmission
Transmission line Shielded twisted-pair cable or VCTF
Computer link ASCII
Transmissio General-purpose
ASCII, Binary
n code serial communication
MODBUS RTU Binary
Communicati Data length 7bit / 8bit
on format (to Parity None/Even/Odd
be set by Stop bit 1bit / 2bit
system Start code STX/No STX
Note4)
register) End code CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
Note2) 5) Max. 99 units
No. of connected units
(Max. 32 units when our C-ENT adapter is connected.)
Computer link (master/slave)
Communication function General-purpose serial communication
Modbus RTU (Master/Slave)
PC(PLC) link
Note1) When connecting a commercially available device that has an RS485 interface, please confirm
operation using the actual device. In some cases, the number of units, transmission distance, and baud
rate vary depending on the connected device.
Note2) The values for the transmission distance, baud rate and number of units should be within the
values noted in the graph below.
Note3) The settings of the baud rate switches on the side of the unit and the system register No. 415
should be the same. Only 19200 bps can be specified when the C-NET adapter is connected with the
RS485 interface.
Note4) The start code and end code can be used only in the general-purpose serial communication
mode.
Note5) Unit numbers should be registered by the system register.
Factory default settings

Port type Baud rate Data length Parity Stop bit
COM port (RS485) 115200 bit/s 8 bits Odd 1 bit
Note:
If the potential difference between the power supplies of RS485 devices exceeds 4 V, the unit may not
communicate as it is the non-isolated type. The large potential difference leads to the damage to the
devices.
7-6
7.4 Computer Link
7.4.1 Overview
- Computer link is used for communication with a computer connected to the PLC. Instructions
(command messages) are transmitted to the PLC, and the PLC responds (sends response messages)
based on the instructions received.
- A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL-COM is used to exchange data between the
computer and the PLC.
- The PLC answers automatically to the commands received from the computer, so no program is
necessary on the PLC side in order to carry out communication.
- There are a MEWTOCOL master function and a MEWTOCOL slave function for the computer link.
The side that issues commands is called master, and the side that receives the commands, executes
the process and sends back responses is called slave.
MEWTOCOL master function

- This function is to carry out the communication on the master side (side that issues commands) of the
computer link. It is executed with the PLC's instruction F145(SEND) or F146(RECV). It is not necessary
to write the response process as a ladder, so the program is easier than the general-purpose
communication function.
The 1:1 or 1:N communication is available between our devices equipped with the computer link function
and the MEWTOCOL-COM. [Our devices (e.g.)]: PLC, temperature control unit, eco-power meter,
machine vision
MEWTOCOL slave function

- This function is to receive commands from the computer link, execute the process and send back the
results. Any special ladder program is not necessary to use this function. (Set the communication
conditions in the system registers.) It enables the 1:1 or 1:N communication with a master computer or
PLC.
- The program for the computer side must be written in BASIC or C language according to the
MEWTOCOL-COM. MEWTOCOL-COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC
operation.
Note:
It is necessary to set the system register of the communication port to the computer link for using this
function. Both the master and slave functions are available for the FP0R, however, only the slave
function is available for the tool and USB ports.
7-7
7.4.2 MEWTOCOL Slave Function
Outline of operation
Command and response

- Instructions issued by the computer to the PLC are called commands.
- Messages sent back to the computer from the PLC are called responses. When the PLC receives a
command, it processes the command regardless of the sequence program, and sends a response
back to the computer. On the computer side, the execution result of the command can be confirmed by
the transmitted response.
MEWTOCOL-COM sketch
- Communication is carried out in a conversational format, based on the MEWTOCOL-COM
communication procedures.
- Data is sent in ASCII format.
- The computer has the first right of transmission.
- The right of transmission shifts back and forth between the computer and the PLC each time a
message is sent.
7-8
Format of command and response
Command message
All command-related items should be noted in the text segment. The unit number must be specified
before sending the command.
1. Header (Start code)

Commands must always have a "%" (ASCII code: H25) or a "<" (ASCII code: H3C) at the beginning of a
message.
2. Unit number
The unit number of the PLC to which you want to send the command must be specified. In 1:1
communication, the unit number "01" (ASCII code: H3031) should be specified. The unit number of the
PLC is specified by the system register.
3. Text
The content differs depending on the command. The content should be noted in all upper-case
characters, following the fixed formula for the particular command.
4. Check code
BCC (block check code) for error detection using horizontal parity. The BCC should be created so that it
targets all of the text data from the header to the last text character.
The BCC starts from the header and checks each character in sequence, using the exclusive OR
operation, and replaces the final result with character text. It is normally part of the calculation program
and is created automatically.
The parity check can be skipped by entering "* *" (ASCII code: H2A2A) instead of the BCC.
5. Terminator (End code)
Messages must always end with a "CR" (ASCII code: H0D).
Note: When writing

- The method for writing text segments in the message varies depending on the type of command.
- If there is a large number of characters to be written, they may be divided and sent as several
commands, if there is a large number of characters in the value that was loaded, they may be divided
and several responses sent.
Key Point:
- With the FP0R, an expansion header "<" is supported to send single frame of up to 2048 characters as
well as general "%".
Type of header No. of characters that can be sent in 1 frame
% Max. 118 characters
< Max. 2048 characters
7-9
Response message
The PLC that received the command in the example above sends the processing results to the computer.
1. Header (Start code)

A "%" (ASCII code: H25) or a "<" (ASCII code: H3C) must be at the beginning of a message.
The response must start with the same header that was at the beginning of the command.
2. Unit number
The unit number of the PLC that processed the command is stored here.
3. Text
The content of this varies depending on the type of command. If the processing is not completed
successfully, an error code will be stored here, so that the content of the error can be checked.
4. Check code
BCC (block check code) for error detection using horizontal parity. The BCC starts from the header and
checks each character in sequence, using the exclusive OR operation, and replaces the final result with
character text.
5. Terminator (End code)
There is always a "CR" (ASCII code: H0D) at the end of the message.
Note: When reading

- If no response is returned, the communication format may not be correct, or the command may not
have arrived at the PLC, or the PLC may not be functioning.
Check to make sure all of the communication specifications (e.g. baud rate, data length, and parity)
match between the computer and the PLC.
- If the response contains an "!" instead of a "$", the command was not processed successfully. The
response will contain a communication error code. Check the meaning of the error code.
- Unit number and command name are always identical in a command and its corresponding response
(see below). This makes the correspondence between a command and a response clear.
7-10
Commands to be used
Command name Code Description
RC Reads the on and off status of contacts.
(RCS) ･Specifies only one point.
Read contact area
(RCP) ･Specifies multiple contacts.
(RCC) ･Specifies a range in word units.
WC Turns contacts on or off.
(WCS) ･Specifies only one point.
Write contact area
(WCP) ･Specifies multiple contacts.
(WCC) ･Specifies a range in word units.
Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area.
Write data area WD Writes data to a data area.
Read timer/counter set
RS Reads the timer/counter setting value.
value area
Write timer/counter set
WS Writes the timer/counter setting value.
value area
Read timer/counter
RK Reads the timer/counter elapsed value.
elapsed value area
Write timer/counter
WK Writes the timer/counter elapsed value.
elapsed value area
Register or Reset
MC Registers the contact to be monitored.
contacts monitored
Register or Reset data
MD Registers the data to be monitored.
monitored
Monitoring start MG Monitors a registered contact or data using MD and MC.
Preset contact area (fill Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16-point on and off
SC
command) pattern.
Preset data area (fill Writes the same contents to the data area of a specified
SD
command) range.
Read system register RR Reads the contents of a system register.
Write system register WR Specifies the contents of a system register.
Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and
Read the status of PLC RT
error codes if an error occurs.
Switches the operation mode of the programmable controller.

Remote control RM
(RUN mode <=> PROG. mode)
Abort AB Aborts communication.
7-11
7.4.3 Setting Communication Parameters
Tool port/COM port
The settings for baud rate and communication format are entered using a programming tool.
Note: When the MEWTOCOL master is used, also select "Computer Link". (COM port only)
Setting with FPWIN GR

Select "Options" in the menu bar, and then select "PLC Configuration". Click "Tool Port" or "COM Port"
from the left list.
Dialog box of PLC system register setting (Tool port selection screen)
No. 410 Unit number

The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99.
No. 412 Communication mode

Select the operation mode of communication port operation mode. Click "Computer Link".
No. 413 Communication Format setting

The default setting of communication format is as below.
Set the communication format to match the external device connected to the communication port.
(The terminator and header cannot be changed.)
Char. Bit: 8 bits
Parity: Odd
Stop Bit: 1 bit
Terminator: Setting disable
Header: Setting disable
No. 415 Baud rate setting

The default setting for the baud rate is "9600 bps". Set the value to match the external device connected
to the communication port. For using the RS485 type, make the same setting as that of the baud rate
switches (19200 or 115200 bps).
USB port
The setting for the USB port is fixed. The setting for the communication parameter is not available.
7-12
7.4.4 1:1 Communication (MEWTOCOL Slave Function)
Overview
For a 1:1 computer link between the FP0R and a computer, and RS232C cable is needed.
Communication is performed via commands from the computer and responses from the PLC.
System register settings

No. Name Set value
No.410 Unit No. 1
No.412 Communication mode Computer link
No.413 Communication format Char. bit: …… 7 bits/8 bits
Parity: ….. None/Odd/Even
Stop bit: ………… 1 bit/2 bit
Terminator: …….. CR
Header: ………… No STX
No.415 Baud rate 2400 to 115200 bps
Note) The communication format and baud rate should be set to match the connected computer.
Programming of computer link
- For a computer link, a program should be created that allows command messages to be sent and
response messages to be received on the computer side. No communication program is required on
the PLC side. (Specify the communication format only by the system register.)
- The program for the computer side must be written in BASIC or C language according to the
MEWTOCOL-COM. MEWTOCOL-COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC
operation.
Example of connection to the computer <1:1 communication>
Tool port
7-13
7.4.5 1:N Communication (MEWTOCOL Slave Function)
A computer and PLCs are connected through a commercially available RS232C-RS485 converter, and
the respective computer and PLCs are wired using an RS485 cable with crossover wiring.
The computer and the PLC communicate via commands and responses: The computer sends a
command specifying the unit number, and the PLC with that unit number sends a response back to the
computer.
Note) LINEEYE CO., LTD SI-35 is recommended to be used as a converter. For the RS232C-type
COM port, a RS232C-RS485 conversion adapter is also required on the PLC side.
Setting of unit numbers

By default, the unit number for each communication port is set to 1 in the system register settings.
There is no need to change this for 1:1 communication, but if 1:N communication is used to connect
multiple PLCs to the transmission line (e.g. in a C-NET), the unit number must be specified so that the
destination of the command can be identified.
The unit number is specified by using the system register.
Setting system registers

No. Name Set Value
No. 410 Unit number 1 to 99 (Set the desired unit number)
(With a C-NET adapter, a maximum of 32 units
(stations) can be specified.)
No. 412 Communication mode Computer link
No. 413 Communication format Char. bit: …… 7 bits/8 bits
Stop bit: ………… 1 bit/2 bit
Header: ………… STX not exist
Note2)
No. 415 Baud rate 2400 to 115200 bps
Note1) The communication format and baud rate should be set to match the connected computer.
Note2) The baud rates of 300, 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction.
For using the RS485 type, make the same setting as that of the baud rate switches (19200 or 115200
bps).
7-14
7.4.6 MEWTOCOL Master
Use the F145 (SEND) "Data send" or F146 (RECV) "Data receive" instruction to use the MEWTOCOL
master function.
Communication port
The MEWTOCOL master is not available for the tool port. It is available for the COM port only.
Sample program
7-15
Flowchart
With the above program, the procedures 1 to 3 are executed repeatedly.

1. Updates the write data if the write data (DT50 and DT51) and the read data (DT60 and DT61) are
matched.
2. Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data DT0 and DT1 in the unit number 1 from the
COM port.
3. Reads the DT0 and DT1 in the unit number 1 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from the
COM port.
7-16
7.4.7 Setting in Compatiblity Mode with FP0 (FP0 Compatibility Mode)
Setting Communication Parameters
Confirm that the model of the programming tool is FP0.
Note) Only the salve function is available in the FP0 compatibility mode.
Usable communication ports on FP0R (FP0 compatibility mode)
Tool port
USB port (No communication parameter)
Tool port settings
Dialog box of PLC system register setting
No. 410 Unit number

No. 411 Communication format
Modem connection: Connect/Not Connect
Char. bit: 7 bits/8 bits
- Change the value to match the connected external device.
The baud rate of 9600 or 19200 bps can be selected. Specify the value to match the connected external
device.
COM port (RS232C port) settings
No. 412 Mode selection

Select the computer link.
No. 413 Communication Format
Char. Bit: 7 bits/8 bits
Parity: None/Odd/Even
Terminator: CR
Header: STX not exist
- Change the value to match the connected external device.
No. 414 Baud rate
Select one of the values from "300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 and 19200 bps".
No. 415 Unit number
No. 416 Modem enabled
Check the box to connect a modem.
7-17
7.5 General-purpose Serial Communication
7.5.1 Overview
- In general-purpose serial communication, data is sent and received over the communication port to and
from an external device such as an image processing device or a bar code reader.
- Data is read from and written to an external device connected to the communication port by means of
an FP0R program and the FP0R data registers.
Outline of operation
To send data to and receive it from an external device using the general-purpose serial communication
function, the data transmission and data reception functions described below are used. The F159
(MTRN) instruction and the "reception done" flag are used in these operations, to transfer data between
the PLC and an external device.
Sending data Receiving data
Data to be transmitted from the PLC is stored Data received from the communication port is stored
in the data register used as the send buffer in the receive buffer specified in the system register,
(DT). When F159(MTRN) is executed, the data and the "reception done" flag goes on. Data can be
is output from the communication port. received whenever the "reception done" flag is off.
- The terminator specified in the system register - When data is being received, the "reception done"
is automatically added to the data that has flag is controlled by the F159(MTRN) instruction.
been sent. - No terminator is included in the stored data.
- The maximum volume of data that can be - The maximum volume of data that can be received
sent is 2048 bytes. is 4094 bytes.
Key Point: In the compatibility mode with the FP0 (FP0 compatibility mode),
the F159(MTRN) instruction is changed to the F144(TRNS) instruction.
Communication Port
Tool port
COM port
7-18
7.5.2 Programming Example of General-purpose Serial Communication
The F159(MTRN) instruction is used to send and receive data via the specified communication port.
F159 (MTRN) instruction

Data is sent and received via the specified COM port .
Devices that can be specified for S: Only data registers (DT) can be specified as the send buffer.
Devices that can be specified for n: WX, WY, WR, WL, SV, EV, DT, LD, I (I0 to ID), K, H
Devices that can be specified for D: Only the K constants (K0 and K1 only)
Sending data
The amount of data specified by n is sent to the external device from among the data stored in the data
table, starting with the area specified by S, through the communication port specified by D. Data can be
sent with the header and terminator automatically attached. A maximum of 2048 bytes can be sent.
When the above program is run, the eight bytes of data contained in DT101 to DT104 and stored in the
send buffer starting from DT100 are sent from the communication port.
Receiving data
Data can be received when the “reception done” flag is off. The received data is stored in the receive
buffer specified by the system register. When the reception of the data is completed (the terminator is
received), the “reception done” flag turns on, and subsequently, receiving data is prohibited. To receive
the next data, execute the F159 (MTRN) instruction and turn the “reception done” flag off to clear the
number of received bytes to 0. To receive data continuously without sending data, clear the number of
transmitted bytes to 0 (set “n” to “K0”), and then execute the F159 (MTRN) instruction.
Binary communication
Selecting “STX not exist” for the header and “None” for the terminator in the general-purpose serial
communication enables the binary communication.
Sending data: Sends the data of bytes to be specified.
Receiving data: Check the No. of bytes received before the process. At that time, the reception done flag
does not work.
7-19
Data to be sent/received with FP0R
Remember the following when accessing data in the FP0R send and receive buffers:
- If a header has been chosen in the communication format settings, the code STX (H02) will
automatically be added at the beginning of the data begin sent.
- The data without the code STX at the reception is stored in the receive buffer, and the “reception done”
flag turns on when the terminator (end code) is received. When the terminator has been set to “None”,
the “reception done” flag does not work.
However, if the code STX is added in the middle of the data, the number of received byte is cleared to
0, and the data is stored from the beginning of the receive buffer again.
- A terminator is automatically added to the end of the data being sent.
- There is no terminator on the data stored in the receive buffer.
Sending data:
Data written to the send buffer will be sent just as it is.
Example:
The data “12345” is transmitted as an ASCII code to an external device.
1. Data sent using the F95 (ASC) instruction should be converted to ASCII code data.
2. If DT100 is being used as the start address of send buffer, data will be stored in sequential order in
the data registers starting from the next register (DT101), in two-byte units consisting of the upper and
the lower byte.
Receiving data:
The data of the receive area being read is ASCII code data.
Example:
The data “12345CR” is transmitted from a device with RS232C port.
If DT200 is being used as the receive buffer, received data will be stored in the registers starting from
DT201, in sequential order of first the lower byte and then the upper byte.
7-20
7.5.3 Sending Data
Communication with external devices is handled through the data registers.
Data to be output is stored in the data register used as the send buffer (DT), and when the F159 (MTRN)
instruction is executed, the data is output from the communication port.
Data table for transmission (send buffer)
Sample program for sending data

The following program transmits the characters “ABCDEFGH (Hex)” to an external device using the
communication port.
The program described above is executed in the following sequence.

1) “ABCDEFGH” is converted to an ASCII code and stored in a data register.
2) The data is sent from the communication port using the F159 (MTRN) instruction.
Explanatory diagram
7-21
Explanation of data table
The data table for transmission starts at the data register specified in S.
- Use an F0 (MV) or F95 (ASC) instruction to write the data to be transmitted to the transmission data
storage area specified in S.
Transmission process
When the execution condition of the F159 (MTRN) instruction turns on and the “transmission done” flag
R9039 is on, operation is as follows:
1. The number of transmission data [N] is preset in the start address of send buffer [S]. The “reception
done” flag R9038 is turned off, and the reception data number is cleared to 0.
2. The set data is transmitted in order from the lower-order byte in S+1 of the table.
- During transmission, the “transmission done” flag R9039 turns off.
- If system register 413 is set to header (start code) with STX, the header is automatically added to the
beginning of the data.
- The terminator (end code) specified in system register 413 is automatically added to the end of the data.
3. When all of the specified quantity of data has been transmitted, the S value is cleared to 0 and the
“transmission done” flag R9039 turns on.
When you do not wish to add the terminator (end code) during transmissions:
- Specify the number of bytes to be transmitted using a negative number.
- If you also do not wish to add a terminator to received data, set system register 413 to “Terminator -
None”.
Programming example:
The following program transmits 8 bytes of data without adding the terminator.
Key Point:
- Do not include the terminator (end code) in the transmission data. The terminator is added
automatically.
- When “STX exist” is specified for the header (start code) in system register 413, do not add the header
to the transmission data. The header is added automatically.
7-22
7.5.4 Receiving Data
Data input from the communication port is
stored in the receive buffer specified by the
system register, and the “reception done” flag
goes on. If the “reception done” flag is off, data
can be received at any time.
Data table for reception (receive buffer)

This is the state when the above program is executed.
DT200 to DT204 are used as the receive buffer.
System register settings are as follows:
- System register 416: K200
- System register 417: K5
Sample program for receiving data

10-byte data received in the receive buffer through the communication port 1 are copied to DT0.
The program described above is executed in the following sequence.

1) The data sent from external devices is stored in the receive buffer.
2) The “reception done” contact R9038 is turned on.
3) The received data is sent from the receive buffer to the area starting with data register DT0.
4) The F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed with no data to clear the number of received bytes and to
turn off the reception done” contact R9038. The system is now ready to receive the next data.
(The data in the receive buffer is not cleared.)
Note:
Be aware that the “reception done” flag R9038 changes even while a scan is in progress (e.g., if the
“reception done” flag is used multiple times as an input condition, there is a possibility of different
statuses existing within the same scan.) To prevent multiple read access to the special internal relay you
should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program.
Explanatory diagram
7-23
Explanation of data table
Data sent from an external device connected to the communication port is stored in the data registers
that have been set as the receive buffer.
- Specify the data registers in system register 416 to
419.
- The number of bytes of data received is stored in the
starting address of the receive buffer. The initial value
is 0.
- Received data is stored in the received data storage
area in order from the lower -order byte.
Reception process
When the “reception done” flag R9038 is off, operation takes place as follows when data is sent from an
external device. (The R9038 flag is off during the first scan after RUN).
1. Incoming data is stored in order from the lower-order byte of the 2nd-word area of the receive buffer.
Header and terminator (start and end codes) are not stored.
2. When the terminator (end code) is received, the “reception done” flag R9038 turns on. Reception of
any further data is prohibited. When the terminator has been set to “None”, the “reception done” flag
does not turn on. Check the number of received bytes to judge whether the reception has completed
or not.
3. When an F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed, the “reception done” flag R9038 turns off (except the
case when the terminator has been set to “None”), the number of received bytes is cleared, and
subsequent data is stored in order from the lower-order byte.
For repeated reception of data, perform the following steps:

1. Receive data
2. Reception done (R9038: on, reception prohibited)
3. Process received data
4. Execute F159 (MTRN) (R9038: off, reception possible)
5. Receive subsequent data
Prepare for reception

- The “reception done” flag R9038 turns on when data
reception from the external device is completed.
Reception of any further data is prohibited.
- To receive subsequent data, you must execute the F159
(MTRN) instruction to turn off the “reception done” flag
R9038.
7-24
7.5.5 Flag Operation in Serial Communication
Header: No-STX, Terminator: CR
Receiving data:
The “reception done” flag, the “transmission done” flag, and the F159 (MTRN) instruction are
related as follows:
- For general-purpose serial communication, half-duplex transmission must be used.

- Reception is disabled when the “reception done” flag R9038 is on.
- When F159 (MTRN) is executed, the number of bytes received is cleared, and the address (write
pointer) in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address.
- Also, when F159 (MTRN) is executed, the error flag R9037, the “reception done” flag R9038 and the
“transmission done” flag R9039 goes off.
- Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 (MTRN) is being executed. The “transmission done” flag
R9039 must be observed.
- Reception stops if the error flag R9037 goes on. To resume reception, execute the F159 (MTRN)
instruction, which turns off the error flag.
Note:
Be aware that the “reception done” flag R9038 changes even while a scan is in progress (e.g., if the
“reception done” flag is used multiple times as an input condition, there is a possibility of different
statuses existing within the same scan.) To prevent multiple read access to the special internal relay you
should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program.
7-25
Header: STX, Terminator: ETX
Receiving data:
related as follows:
- The data is stored in the receive buffer in sequential order. When the header is received, the number of
bytes received is cleared, and the address (write pointer) in the receive buffer is reset to the initial
address.
- Reception is disabled while the “reception done” flag R9038 is on.
- Also, When F159 (MTRN) is executed, the number of bytes received is cleared, and the address (write
pointer) in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address.
- If there are two headers, data following the second header overwrites the data in the receive buffer.
- The “reception done” flag R9038 is turned off by the F159 (MTRN) instruction. Therefore, if F159
(MTRN) is executed at the same time the terminator is received, the “reception done” flag will not be
detected.
7-26
Sending data:
related as follows:
- Header (STX) and terminator (ETX) are automatically added to the data being transmitted. The data is
transmitted to an external device.
- When the F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed, the “transmission done” flag R9039 goes off.
- Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 (MTRN) is being executed. The “transmission done” flag
R9039 must be observed.
7-27
7.5.6 Changing Communication Mode Using F159(MTRN) Instruction
An F159 (MTRN) instruction can be executed to change between general-purpose serial communication
mode and computer link mode. To do so, specify H8000 for n (the number of transmission bytes) and
execute the instruction.
Changing from “general-purpose” to “computer link”
Changing from “computer link” to “general-purpose”
R9032: The COM port mode flag turns on when general-purpose serial communication mode is selected.
Note:
When the power is turned on, the operating mode selected in system register 412 takes effect.
It is not possible to change to the MODBUS RTU mode.
7-28
Tool port/COM port
The settings for baud rate and communication format of the tool port are entered using a programming
tool.
Select "Options" in the menu bar, and then select "PLC Configuration". Click "Tool Port" or "COM Port"
from the left list.
Dialog box of PLC system register setting (Tool port selection screen)
No. 410 Unit number

Select the operation mode of communication port operation mode. Click "General communication".
Char. Bit: 8 bits
Parity: Odd
Stop Bit: 1 bit
Terminator: CR
Header: STX not exist
No. 416 Starting address for data received (For the tool port: No. 420)
No. 417 Buffer capacity setting for data received (For the tool port: No. 421)
For the general-purpose serial communication, setting "Receive buffer" is required.
To change this area, specify the starting address using system register No. 416 or 420 and the volume
(number of words) using No. 417or 421. The receive buffer layout is shown below. When setting for the
tool port and the COM port both, do not specify the same buffer number.
7-29
7.5.8 Connection with 1:1 Communication (General-purpose Serial
Communication)

No. Name Set Value
No. 412 Selection of communication mode General-purpose serial communication
Stop bit: ………… 1 bit/2 bits
Terminator: …….. CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
No. 415 Baud rate Note1) 2400 to 115200 bps
No. 416 Starting address for receive buffer C10, 14, 16: DT0 to DT12314
Note2)
No. 420 C32, T32, F32: DT0 to DT32764
(Default setting: Tool port: DT4096,
COM port: DT0
No. 417 Receive buffer capacity Note1) 0 to 2048 words (Default setting: 2048 words)
No. 421
Note1) The baud rates of 300, 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction. However, the
setting value of the system register cannot be changed. For using the RS485 type, make the
same setting as that of the baud rate switches (19200 or 115200 bps).
Note2) No. 416 and 417 is the COM port. No. 420 and 421 is the tool port.
7-30
7.5.9 1:N Communication (General-purpose Serial Communication)
The FP0R and the external units are connected using an RS485 cable. Using the protocol that matches
the external units, the F159 (MTRN) instruction is used to send and receive data.

No. Name Set Value
No. 412 Selection of communication mode General-purpose serial communication
Stop bit: ………… 1 bit/2 bits
Terminator: …….. CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
No. 415 Baud rate Note２) 2400 to 115200 bps
No. 416 Starting address for receive buffer C10, 14, 16: DT0 to DT12314
Note3)
No. 420 C32, T32, F32: DT0 to DT32764
(Default setting: Tool port: DT4096,
COM port: DT0
No. 417 Receive buffer capacity Note3) 0 to 2048 words
No. 421
Note1) The communication format and baud rate should be set to match the connected devices.
Note2) The baud rates of 300, 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction. However, the
setting value of the system register cannot be changed. For using the RS485 type, make the
same setting as that of the baud rate switches (19200 or 115200 bps).
Note3) No. 416 and 417 is the COM port. No. 420 and 421 is the tool port.
7-31
7.5.10 Settings in Compatibility Mode with FP0 (FP0 Compatibility Mode)
Programming Example of General-purpose Serial Communication in FP0 compatibility mode
The high-level instruction F144(TRNS) is used to send and receive data via the COM port (RS232C port).
(The F159(MTRN) instruction is used in the normal FP0R mode.)
Key Point: In the FP0 compatibility mode, the F144(TRNS) instruction is used instead of
F159(MTRN) instruction.
F144(TRNS) instruction
Data is sent and received between the FP0R and an external device via the COM port (RS232C port).
Devices that can be specified for S: Only data registers (DT) can be specified as the send buffer.
Devices that can be specified for n: WX, WY, WR, WL, SV, EV, DT, LD, I (I0 to ID), K, H
Sending data
The amount of data specified by n is sent to the external device from among the data stored in the data
table, starting with the area specified by S, through the COM port specified by D. Data can be sent with
the header and terminator automatically attached. A maximum of 2048 bytes can be sent. When the
above program is run, the eight bytes of data contained in DT101 to DT104 and stored in the send buffer
starting from DT100 are sent from the COM port.
Receiving data
Data can be received when the “reception done” flag is off. The received data is stored in the receive
buffer specified by the system register. When the reception of the data is completed (the terminator is
received), the “reception done” flag (R9038) turns on, and subsequently, receiving data is prohibited. To
receive the next data, execute the F144(TRNS) instruction and turn the “reception done” flag (R9038) off
to clear the number of received bytes to 0. To receive data continuously without sending data, clear the
number of transmitted bytes to 0 (set “n” to “K0”), and then execute the F144 (TRNS) instruction.
7-32
Setting Communication Parameters
Confirm that the model of the programming tool is FP0.
Usable communication port
COM port (RS232C port) settings

Select "General communication".
Char. Bit: 7 bits/8 bits
Parity: None/Odd/Even
Terminator: End code: CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
Header: STX not exist/STX
- Specify the value to match the connected external device.

Select one of the values from "300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 and 19200 bps".
No. 415 Unit number
No. 417 Starting address for data received
No. 417 Buffer capacity setting for data received
For the general-purpose serial communication, setting "Receive buffer" is required.
To change this area, specify the starting address using system register No.417 and the volume (number
of words) using No.418. The receive buffer layout is shown below.
Starting address for data received C10,C14,C16: DT0 to DT1659

C32 : DT0 to DT6143
T32 : DT0 to DT16383
(Default: Tool port: DT4096 COM(RS232C) port: DT0)
Buffer capacity setting for data received C10, C14, C16: 0 to 1660 words (Default: 1660 words)
C32: 0 to 6144 words (Default: 6144 words)
T32: 0 to 16384 words (Default: 16384 words)
7-33
7.6 PC(PLC) link Function
7.6.1 Overview
A system can be configured for the PC(PLC) link (MEWNET-W0) with the FP0R.
- Exclusive internal relays "link relays (L)" and data registers "link registers (LD)" are shared between the
connected PLCs.
- Turning on a link relay contact in one PLC turns on the same link relay in all other PLCs on the same
network.
- Likewise, if the contents of a link register in one PLC are changed, the values of the same link register
are changed in all PLCs on the same network.
- The status of the link relays and link registers in any one PLC is fed back to all of the other PLCs
connected to the network, so control of data that needs to be consistent throughout the network, such
as target production values and type codes, can easily be implemented to coordinate the data, and the
data of all units are updated at the same time.
PLCs connectable to the PC link via MEWNET-W0

- FP2 Multi Communication Unit (Using Communication cassette RS485 type)
- FP-X (Using Communication cassette RS485 type)
- FPΣ (Using Communication cassette RS485 type)
- FP0R (RS485 type)
7-34
Operation of PLC link
Turning on a link relay contact in one PLC turns on the same link relay in all other PLCs on the same
network.
Likewise, if the contents of a link register in one PLC are changed, the values of the same link register
are changed in all PLCs on the same network.
Link relay
Link relay L0 for unit no.1 is turned on. The status change is fed back to the programs of the other units,
and Y0 of the other units is set to TRUE.
Link register
A constant of 100 is written to link register LD0 of unit no.1.
The contents of LD0 in the other units are also changed to a constant of 100.
Communication port
It is available for the COM port only.
7-35
7.6.2 Setting of Unit Numbers
By default, the unit number for the communication port is set to 1 in the system registers.
In a PC(PLC) link that connects multiple PLCs on the same transmission line, the unit number must be
set in order to identify the different PLCs.
The unit number is specified either by using the SYS1 instruction or the system register.
Note1) The priority order for unit number settings is as follows:

1. SYS1 instruction
2. System registers
Note2) Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively, starting from 1, with no breaks
between them. If there is a missing unit number, the transmission time will be longer.
Note3) If fewer than 16 units are linked, the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest
unit number in system register no. 47.
Unit numbers are the numbers to identify the different PLCs on the same network. The same number
must not be used for more than one PLC on the same network.
Note:
When using the PC(PLC) link with the RS232C, the number of units is 2.
7-36
7.6.3 Setting Communication Parameters: PC(PLC) Link
Settings for baud rate and communication format
The settings for baud rate and communication format of the COM port are entered using a programming
tool.

Select "Options" in the menu bar, and then select "PLC Configuration". Click the "COM Port" tab.
No. 410 Unit number

No. 412 Communication Mode

Click on , and select “PC Link”.
Key Point:
When using a PC(PLC) link, the communication format and baud rate are fixed:
No. Name Set Value

No. 413 Communication format Char. bit: …… 8 bits
Parity: ….. Odd
Stop bit: ………… 1 bit
No. 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 115200 bps
7-37
7.6.4 Link Area Allocation
The link relays and link registers to be used in the PC(PLC) link are allocated in the link area of the CPU
unit. Link area allocations are specified by setting the system registers of the CPU unit.
System registers
Default
No. Name Set value
value
40 Range of link relays used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 64 words
41 Range of link data registers used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 128 words
42 Starting number for link relay transmission 0 0 to 63
For 43 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
PC 44 Starting number for link data register transmission 0 0 to 127
(PLC) 45 Link data register transmission size 0 0 to 127 words
link 0 46 PC(PLC) link switch flag Normal Normal: 1st half
Reverse: 2nd half
47 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET-W0 16 1 to 16 Note)
PC(PLC) link
46 PC(PLC) link switch flag Normal Normal: 1st half
Reverse: 2nd half
50 Range of link relays used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 64 words
For 51 Range of link data registers used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 128 words
PC 52 Starting number for link relay transmission 64 64 to 127
(PLC) 53 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
link 1 54 Starting number for link data register transmission 128 128 to 255
55 Link data register transmission size 0 0 to 127 words
57 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET-W0 16 1 to 16 Note)
PC(PLC) link
Note) The same maximum unit number should be specified for all the PLCs connected in the PC(PLC)
link.
Link area configuration
- Link areas consist of link relays and link registers, and are divided into areas for PC(PLC) link 0 and
PC(PLC) link 1 and used with those units.
- The link relay which can be used in an area for either PC(PLC) link 0 or PC(PLC) link 1 is maximum
1024 points (64 words), and the link register is maximum 128 words.
Note:
The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link W0 of the FP2 Multi Communication Unit
(MCU). At that time, the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same
values as the FP2 (from WL64, from LD128).
7-38
Example of allocation
The areas for PC(PLC) link are divided into send areas and receive areas. The link relays and link
registers are sent from the send area to the receive area of a different PLC. Link relays and link registers
with the same numbers as those on the transmission side must exist in the receive area on the receiving
side.
For PC(PLC) link 0

Link relay allocation
System registers
Setting for various units
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
40 Range of link relays used 64 64 64 64
42 Starting No. of word for link relay transmission 0 20 40 0
43 Link relay transmission size 20 20 24 0
Note) No.40 (range of link relays used) must be set to the same range for all the units.
Link register allocation
System registers
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
41 Range of link registers used 128 128 128 128
44 Starting No. for link register transmission 0 40 80 0
45 Link register transmission size 40 40 48 0
Note) No.41 (range of link registers used) must be set to the same range for all the units.
When link areas are allocated as shown above, the No.1 send area can be sent to the No.2, No.3 and
No.4 receive areas. Also, the No.1 receive area can receive data from the No.2 and No.3 send areas.
No.4 is allocated as a receive area only, and can receive data from No.1, No.2 and No.3, but cannot
transmit it to other stations.
7-39
For PC(PLC) link 1
System registers
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
50 Range of link relays used 64 64 64 64
52 Starting No. of word for link relay transmission 64 84 104 64
53 Link relay transmission size 20 20 24 0
Note) No.50 (range of link relays used) must be set to the same range for all the units.
System registers
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
51 Range of link registers used 128 128 128 128
54 Starting No. for link register transmission 128 128 208 128
55 Link register transmission size 40 40 48 0
Note) No.51 (range of link registers used) must be set to the same range for all the units.
When link areas are allocated as shown above, the No.1 send area can be sent to the No.2, No.3 and
No.4 receive areas. Also, the No.1 receive area can receive data from the No.2 and No.3 send areas.
No.4 is allocated as a receive area only, and can receive data from No.1, No.2 and No.3, but cannot
transmit it to other stations.
Note:
The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link W0 of the FP2 Multi Communication Unit
(MCU). At that time, the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same
values as the FP2 (from WL64, from LD128).
7-40
Partial use of link areas
In the link areas available for PC(PLC) link, link relays with a total of 1024 points (64 words) and link
registers with a total of 128 words can be used. This does not mean, however, that it is necessary to
reserve the entire area. Parts of the area which have not been reserved can be used as internal relays
and internal registers.

No. Name No.
No.40 Range of link relays used 50
No.42 Starting No. of word for link relay transmission 20
No.43 Link relay transmission size 20
With the above settings, the 14 words (224 points) consisting of

WL50 to WL63 can be used as internal relays.

No. Name No.
No.41 Range of link registers used 100
No.44 Starting No. for link register transmission 40
No.45 Link register transmission size 40
With the above settings, the 28 words consisting of LD100 to

LD127 can be used as internal registers.
7-41
Note: Precautions When Allocating Link Areas
If a mistake is made when allocating a link area, be aware that an error will result, and communication
will be disabled.
Avoid overlapping send areas

When sending data from a send area to the receive area of another PLC, there must be a link relay and
link register with the same number in the receive area on the receiving side. In the example shown below,
there is an area between No.2 and No.3 which is overlapped, and this will cause an error, so that
communication cannot be carried out.
Example of link relay allocations
System registers
Set value of various control units
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
No.40 Range of link relays used 64 64 64
No.42 Starting No. of word for link relay transmission 0 20 30
No.43 Link relay transmission size 20 20 34
Invalid allocations
The allocations shown below are not possible, neither for link relays nor for link registers:
- Send area is split
- Send and receive areas are split into multiple segments
7-42
7.6.5 Setting the Largest Unit Number for PC(PLC) Link
The largest unit number can be set using system register no.47 (using system register no.57 for
PC(PLC) link 1).
[Sample setting]
No. of units linked Setting contents
2 1st unit: Unit no. 1 is set
2nd unit: Unit no. 2 is set
A largest unit no. of 2 is set for each.
4 1st unit: Unit no. 1 is set
2nd unit: Unit no. 2 is set
3rd unit: Unit no. 3 is set
4th unit: Unit no. 4 is set
A largest unit no. of 4 is set for each.
n Nth unit: Unit no. n is set
A largest unit no. of n is set for each.
Note:
- Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively, starting from 1, with no breaks between
them. If there is a missing unit number, the transmission time will be longer.
- If fewer than 16 units are linked, the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest unit
number in system register no.47 (in system register no.57 for PC(PLC) link 1).
- For all PLCs which are linked, the same value should be set for the largest unit number.
- If there are fewer than 16 units linked and the largest unit number has not been set (default=16), or the
largest unit number has been set but the unit number settings are not consecutive, or the unit number
settings are consecutive but there is a unit for which the power supply has not been turned on, the
response time for the PC(PLC) link (the link transmission cycle) will be longer.
Reference: <7.6.7 PC(PLC) Link Response Time>
Setting PC(PLC) link switching flag

PC(PLC) link switching flag can be set using system register no. 46.
If it is set to 0 (default value), the first half of the link relays and registers are used. If it is set to 1, the
second half of the link relays and registers are used.
7-43
7.6.6 Monitoring
When using a PC(PLC) link, the operation status of the links can be monitored using the following relays.
Transmission assurance relays

For PC(PLC) link 0: R9060 to R906F (correspond to unit no. 1 to 16)
If the transmission data from a different unit is being used with the various PLCs, check to make sure the
transmission assurance relay for the target unit is on before using the data.
Exclusive internal relays "link relays (L)" and data registers "link registers (LD)" are shared between the
connected PLCs.
Operation mode relays

The operation modes (RUN/PROG.) can be checked for any given PLC.
PLC link transmission error relay R9050

This relay goes on if a problem is detected during transmission.
Key Point: Monitoring the PC(PLC) link status

Using a programming tool, the PC(PLC) link status items, such as the transmission cycle time and the
number of times that errors have occurred, can be monitored.
Using FPWIN GR: Select [Status Display] under [Online] in the menu. Click the [PC link] button after the
[Status Display] screen is shown.
Using FPWIN Pro: Select [PLC Link Status] under [Online] in the menu.
Note: Remote programming of the linked PLCs is not possible from the programming tool.
7-44
7.6.7 PC(PLC) Link Response Time
The maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle can be calculated using the following
formula.
The various items in the formula are calculated as described below.
Ts (transmission time per station)

Ts = scan time + Tpc (PC(PLC) link sending time)
Tpc = Ttx (sending time per byte) x Pcm (PLC link sending size)
Ttx = 1/(baud rate x 1000) x 11 ms …. Approx. 0.096 ms at 115.2 kbps
Pcm = 23 + (number of relay words + number of register words) x 4
Tlt (link table sending time)

Tlt = Ttx (sending time per byte) x Ltm (link table sending size)

Ltm = 13 + 2 x n (n = number of stations being added)
Tso (master station scan time)

This should be confirmed using the programming tool.
Tlk (link addition processing time) …. If no stations are being added, Tlk = 0.
Tlk = Tlc (link addition command sending time) + Twt (addition waiting time) + Tls (sending time for
command to stop transmission if link error occurs) + Tso (master station scan time)
Tlc = 10 x Ttx (sending time per byte)

Twt = Initial value 400 ms (can be changed using SYS1 system register instruction)
Tls = 7 x Ttx (sending time per byte)
Ttx = 1/(baud rate x 1000) x 11 ms …. Approx. 0.096 ms at 115. 2 kbps
Tso = Master station scan time
Calculation example 1
When all stations have been added to a 16-unit link, the largest station number is 16, relays and
registers have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLCs is 1 ms.
Ttx = 0.096 Each Pcm = 23 + (4 + 8) x 4 = 71 bytes Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 71 ≒ 6.82 ms
Each Ts = 1 + 6.82 = 7.82 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 16) = 4.32 ms
Given the above conditions, the maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle will be:
T max. = 7.82 x 16 + 4.32 + 1 = 130.44 ms
registers have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms
Ttx = 0.096 Each Pcm = 23 + (4 + 8) x 4 = 71 bytes Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 71 ≒ 6.82 ms
Each Ts = 5 + 6.82 = 11.82 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 16) = 4.32 ms
Given the above conditions, the maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle will
be:
T max. = 11.82 x 16 + 4.32 + 5 = 198.44 ms
7-45
When all but one station have been added to a 16-unit link, the largest station number is 16,
relays and registers have been allocated evenly, and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms.
Ttx = 0.096 Each Ts = 5 + 6.82 = 11.82 ms
Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 15) ≒ 4.13 ms
Tlk = 0.96 + 400 + 0.67 + 5 ≒407 ms
Note: The default value for the addition waiting time is 400 ms.
T max. = 11.82 x 15 + 4.13 + 5 + 407 = 593.43 ms
When all stations have been added to an 8-unit link, the largest station number is 8, relays and
register have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms.
Ttx = 0.096 Each Pcm = 23 + (8 + 16) x 4 = 119 bytes
Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 119 ≒ 11.43 ms
Each Ts = 5 + 11.43 = 16.43 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 8) ≒ 2.79 ms
T max. = 16.43 x 8 + 2.79 + 5 = 139.23 ms
registers have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms.
Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 407 ≒ 39.072 ms
T max. = 44.072 x 2 + 1.632 + 5 = 94.776 ms
When all stations have been added to a 2-unit link, the largest station number is 2, 32 relays and
2 register words have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLC is 1 ms.
Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 31 ≒ 2.976 ms
T max. = 3.976 x 2 + 1.632 + 1 = 10.584 ms
Note:
- In the description, “stations that have been added” refers to stations which are connected between
station no. 1 and the largest station number and for which the power supply has been turned on.
- Comparing examples 2 and 3, the transmission cycle time is longer if there is one station that has not
been added to the link. As a result the PC(PLC) link response time is longer.
- The SYS1 instruction can be used to minimize the transmission cycle time even if there are one or
more stations that have not been added to the link.
7-46
Reducing the transmission cycle time when there are stations that have not been added
If there are stations that have not been added to the link, the Tlk time (link addition processing time) and
with this the transmission cycle time will be longer.
With the SYS1 instruction, the link addition waiting time Twt in the above formula can be reduced. Thus,
SYS1 can be used to minimize the increase in the transmission cycle time.
<Programming example of SYS1 instruction>
(SYS1, M PCLK1T0, 100)

Function: Setting SYS1 to change the waiting time for a link to be added to the PC(PLC) link from the
default value of 400 ms to 100 ms.
Keywords: Setting for key word no. 1: PCLK1T0
Permissible range for key word no. 2: 10 to 400 (10 ms to 400 ms)
Note:
If there are any units that have not been added to the link, the setting should not be changed as
long as a longer link transmission cycle time does not cause any problem.
- The SYS1 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program, at the rise of R9014. The
same waiting time should be set for all linked PLCs.
- The waiting time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum scan time for any of the PLCs
connected to the link.
- If a short waiting time has been set, there may be PLCs that cannot be added to the link even if their
power supply is on. (The shortest time that can be set is 10 ms.)
7-47
Error detection time for transmission assurance relays
The power supply of any given PLC fails or is turned off, it takes (as a default value) 6.4 seconds for the
transmission assurance relay of the PLC to be turned off at the other stations. This time period can be
shortened using the SYS1 instruction.
<Programming example of SYS1 instruction>
(SYS1, M PCLK1T1, 100)

Function: Setting SYS1 to change the time that the PC(PLC) link transmission assurance is off from the
default value of 6400 ms to 100 ms.
Keywords: Setting for key word no. 1: PCLK1T1
Permissible range for key word no. 2: 100 to 6400 (100 ms to 6400 ms)
Note:
The setting should not be changed as long as a longer transmission assurance relay detection
time does not cause any problems.
- The SYS1 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program, at the rise of R9014. The
same time should be set for all linked PLCs.
- The time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum transmission cycle time when all of the
PLCs are connected to the link.
- If short time has been set, the transmission assurance relay may not function properly. (The shortest
time that can be set is 100 ms.)
7-48
7.7 MODBUS RTU Communication
7.7.1 Overview of Functions

- The MODBUS RTU protocol enables the communication between the FP0R and other devices
(including our FP-X, FP-e, Programmable display GT series, KT temperature control unit and MODBUS
device made by other companies).
- Enables to have conversations if the master unit sends instructions (command messages) to slave
units and the slave units respond (response messages) according to the instructions.
- Enables the communication between the devices of max. 99 units as the master function and slave
function is equipped.
About MODBUS RTU

- The MODBUS RTU communication is a function for the master unit to read and write the data in slave
units communicating between them.
- There are ASCII mode and RTU (binary) mode in the MODBUS protocol, however, the FP0R is
supported with the RTU (binary) mode only.
Master function
Writing and reading data for various slaves is available using the F145 (SEND) and F146 (RECV)
instructions.
Individual access to each slave and the global transmission is possible.
Use Type II instructions of F145 and F146 (Type directly specifying MODBUS address) to
communication with MODBUS devices made by other companies.
Slave function
If the slave units receive a command message from the master unit, they send back the response
message corresponding to the content.
Do not execute the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV) instructions when the unit is used as a slave unit.
7-49
MODBUS RTU command message frame
START ADDRESS FUNCTION DATA CRC CHECK END
3.5-character time 8 bits 8 bits n*8 bits 16 bits 3.5-character time
ADDRESS (Unit No.) 8 bits, 0 to 99 (decimal)

Note1) 0= Broadcast address
Note2) Slave unit No. is 1 to 99 (decimal)
Note3) For MODBUS, 0 to 247 (decimal)
FUNCTION 8 bits
DATA Varies depending on commands.
CRC 16 bits
END 3.5-character time (Differs depending on baud rate. Refer to reception
judgement time.)
Response in normal status

The same message as a command is returned for single write command.
A part of a command message (6 bytes from the beginning) is returned for multiple write command.
Response in abnormal status

In case a parameter disabled to be processed is found in a command (except transmission error)
Slave address (unit number)

Function code + 80H
One of either 1, 2 or 3
Error code
CRC
Error code contents

1: Function code error
2: Device number error (out of range)
3: Device quantity error (out of range)
Reception done judgment time

The process for receiving a message completes when the time that is exceeding the time mentioned
below has passed after the final data was received.
Baud rate Reception done judgment time

2400 Approx. 13.3 ms
4800 Approx. 6.7 ms
9600 Approx. 3.3 ms
115200 Approx. 0.3 ms
Note) The reception done judgment time is an approx. 32-bit time.
7-50
Supported commands
Executable
Code Name (MODBUS Remarks
instructions for Name for FP0R
(decimal) original) (Reference No.)
master
F146 (RECV) 01 Read Coil Status Read Y and R Coils 0X
F146 (RECV) 02 Read Input Status Read X Input 1X
F146 (RECV) 03 Read Holding Registers Read DT 4X
F146 (RECV) 04 Read Input Registers Read WL and LD 3X
F145 (SEND) 05 Force Single Coil Write Single Y and R 0X
F145 (SEND) 06 Preset Single Register Write DT 1 Word 4X
Cannot be issued 08 Diagnostics Loopback Test
F145 (SEND) 15 Force Multiple Coils Write Multiple Ys 0X
and Rs
F145 (SEND) 16 Preset Multiple Registers Write DT Multiple 4X
Words
Cannot be issued 22 Mask Write 4X Register Write DT Mask 4X
Cannot be issued 23 Read/Write 4X Registers Read/Write DT 4X
Table for MODBUS reference No. and FP0R device No.

Data on BUS
MODBUS reference No. PLC device No.
(hexadecimal)
000001-001760 0000-06DF Y0-Y109F
Coil
002049-006144 0800-17FF R0-R255F
Input 100001-101760 0000-06DF X0-X109F
Holding C10, C14, C16 400001-412315 0000-301B DT0-DT12314
register C32, T32, F32 400001-432765 0000-7FFC DT0-DT32764
300001-300128 0000-007F WL0-WL127
Input register
302001-302256 07D0-08CF LD0-LD255
7-51
Settings for baud rate and communication format
The settings for baud rate and communication format of the COM port are entered using a programming
tool.

Select "Options" in the menu bar, and then select "PLC Configuration". Click the "COM Port" tab.
No. 410 Unit number


Click on , and select “MODBUS RTU link”.

Char. Bit: 8 bits
Parity: Odd
Stop Bit: 1 bit
Terminator: Setting disable
Header: Setting disable

7-52
7.7.3 MODBUS Master
Use the F145 (SEND) “Data send” or F146 (RECV) “Data receive” instruction to use the MODBUS
master function.
Sample program
7-53
Flow chart
The above program executes the operation 1 to 3 repeatedly.

matched.
2. Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data DT0 and DT1 in the unit number 1 from the
COM port.
3. Reads the data DT0 and DT1 in the unit number 1 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from
the COM port.
7-54
Sample program (For Type II)
Use a program as below to directly specify a MODBUS address.
7-55
Flow chart (For Type II)
The above program executes the operation 1 to 3 repeatedly.

matched.
2. Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data No. H7788 in the unit number 07 from the
COM port.
3. Reads the data No. H7788 in the unit number 07 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from
the COM port.
7-56
Chapter 8
High-speed Counter, Pulse Output and
PWM Output Functions
8.1 Overview of Each Functions
8.1.1 Three Pulse Input/Output Functions

There are three functions available when using the high-speed counter built into the FP0R.
High-speed counter function

The high-speed counter function counts external
inputs such as those from sensors or encoders.
When the count reaches the target value, this
function turns on/off the desired output.
Pulse output function

Combined with a commercially available motor
driver, the function enables positioning control.
With the exclusive instruction, you can perform
trapezoidal control, home return, and JOG
operation.
PWM output function

By using the exclusive instruction, the PWM output
function enables a pulse output of the desired duty
ratio.
8-2
8.1.2 Performance of Built-in High-speed Counter
Number of Channel
• There are six channels for the built-in high-speed counter
• The channel number allocated for the high-speed counter will change depending on the function being
used.
Counting range
• K-2, 147, 483, 648 to K+2, 147, 483, 647 (Coded 32-bit binary)
• The built-in high-speed counter is a ring counter. Consequently, if the counted value exceeds the
maximum value, it returns to the minimum value. Similarly, if the counted value drops below the
minimum value, it goes back to the maximum value and continues counting from there.
8-3
8.2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items
8.2.1 Specifications
High-speed counter function
Input/output
Performance
contact No. being Memory area being used
specifications
used
High-speed counter
Input contact
channel No. Mini-mum Maximum
number (value in Control Elapsed Target
input pulse counting
parenthesis is flag value area value area Note2)
Note1) width speed
reset input)
DT90300 DT90302
X0
CH0 R9110 to to
(X2)
DT90301 DT90303
DT90304 DT90306
X1
CH1 R9111 to to
(X2)
DT90305 DT90307
DT90308 DT90310
X3
CH2 R9112 to to
[Single phase] (X5)
DT90309 DT90311 6CH:
Incremental, 10µs
DT90312 DT90314 50 kHz
Decremental X4
CH3 R9113 to to
(X5)
DT90313 DT90315
DT90316 DT90318
CH4 X6
Note3) R9114 to to
(None)
DT90317 DT90319
DT90320 DT90322
CH5 X7
Note3) R9115 to to
(None)
DT90321 DT90323
X0 DT90300 DT90302
CH0 X1 R9110 to to
1CH:
[2-phase] (X2) DT90301 DT90303
15kHz
2-phase input X3 DT90308 DT90310
2CH:
One input, CH2 X4 R9112 to to 25µs
15kHz
Direction (X5) DT90309 DT90311
3CH:
distinction X6 DT90316 DT90318
CH4 10kHz
Note3) X7 R9114 to to
(None) DT90317 DT90319
Note1) The reset input X2 can be set to either CH0 or CH1. The reset input X5 can be set to either CH2
or CH3. The inputs X4 to X7 are also used for the home input of the pulse output function. It is necessary
to set how to use each input by system registers.
Note2) For information on minimum input pulse width, also refer to <8.3.3 Minimum Input Pulse Width>.
Note3) CH4 and CH5 cannot be used for the C10 type.
Note4) The maximum counting speed is the values when executing with the conditions of each item
(counting method or number of channels) only. These values are not available if executing the high-
speed counter match ON/OFF instruction, other pulse I/O process simultaneously or executing the
interrupt program.
8-4
Pulse output function
Input/output contact number Memory area used
used
Deviation
CW CCW Position Pulse
High-speed counter counter clear Near Target
or or Home control output Elapsed
channel No. output home Target area for
pulse sign input starting instruct value
C32 Note3) input value area match
out- out- Note2) input -tion area
C16 T32 Note5) on-off
put put flag
F32
DT90400 DT90402 DT90404
CH0 Y0 Y1 Y6 Y8 X4 X0 R9120
DT90401 DT90403 DT90405
DT90410 DT90412 DT90414
CH1 Y2 Y3 Y7 Y9 X5 X1 R9121
Indepen- DT90411 DT90413 DT90415
dence DT90420 DT90422 DT90424
CH2 Y4 Y5 None YA X6 X2 R9122
DT90421 DT90423 DT90425
DT90430 DT90432 DT90434
CH3 Y6 Y7 None YB X7 X3 R9123
DT90052 DT90431 DT90433 DT90435
<bit4> DT90400 DT90402 DT90404
CH0 X axis Y0 Y1 Y6 Y8 X4 R9120
DT90401 DT90403 DT90405
DT90410 DT90412 DT90414
Linear CH1 Y axis Y2 Y3 Y7 Y9 X5 R9121
DT90411 DT90413 DT90415
Interpola- -
DT90420 DT90422 DT90424
tion CH2 X axis Y4 Y5 None YA X6 R9122
DT90421 DT90423 DT90425
DT90430 DT90432 DT90434
CH3 Y axis Y6 Y7 None YB X7 R9123
DT90431 DT90433 DT90435
Note1) The pulse output function is available only for the transistor output type.
Note2) When using CH2 or CH3 with the C16 type, the deviation counter clear output cannot be used.
Also, Y6 and Y7 are also used for the pulse output of CH3 and the deviation counter clear of CH0
or CH1, and they can be used only as one of the outputs.
Note3) The home inputs X4 to X7 are also used for the input of the high-speed counter. It is necessary to
set how to use each input by system registers.
Note4) The near home input is used by assigning an arbitrary contact and operating the bit 4 of the
special data register DT90052 with the instruction (F0).
Note5) The home control start input is used for the trigger to start the position control when using the
JOG positioning instruction (F171). It is used by specifying X0 to X3 with the system register or
assigning an arbitrary contact and operating the bit 6 of the special data register DT90052 with
the instruction (F0).
Note6) For the linear interpolation, CH0 and CH1 or CH2 and CH3 are used in combination.
Note7) The output frequency is the value only when the conditions of each item (such as output method
or No. of channels) are executed. This is the value when the pulse input/output process is not
simultaneously performed or interrupt program is not executed.
PWM output function

High-speed Output Pulse output
counter contact No. instruction Output frequency Duty
channel No. used flag
CH0 Y0 R9120
CH1 Y2 R9121 0.0% to 99.9%
6 Hz to 4.8 kHz
CH2 Y4 R9122 (Resolution: 1000)
CH3 Y6 R9123
Note) The PWM output function is only available with the transistor output type.
8-5
8.2.2 Functions Used and Restrictions
Simplified chart - Maximum counting speed of High-speed counter
The maximum counting speed of the high-speed counter varies according to No. of channels to be used
or the simultaneous use of the pulse output function. Use the chart below as a guide.
Max. counting speed
(Frequency kHz)
Combination with pulse output function
(Trapezoidal control, No change in speed
50kHz)
Combination of high-speed counter No pulse output Pulse output 1 CH
Single-phase 2-phase Single- Single-

2-phase 2-phase
CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH0 CH2 CH4 phase phase
A 50 50
A A 50 50
A A A 50 50
- - -
A A A A 50 50
A A A A A 50 40
A A A A A A 50 40
A 15 14
- A A - 15 - 10
A A A 10 10
A A 50 15 50 14
A A A 50 15 50 14
A A A A 50 15 50 14
A A A A A 50 15 50 14
A A A 50 15 50 10
A A A A 50 15 50 10
A A 50 15 50 12
A A A 50 13 50 12
A A A A 50 12 50 11
A A A A A 50 12 50 9
A A A 50 13 50 10
A A A A 50 12 50 10
Note) The maximum counting speed may be lower than the above-mentioned values when the
change of pulse output speed, CAM control instruction, target value match ON/OFF
instruction and other interrupt programs are executed simultaneously.
8-6
Max. counting speed
(Frequency kHz)
Combination with pulse output function
(Trapezoidal control, No change in speed 50kHz)
Pulse output 2 CH Pulse output 3 CH Pulse output 4 CH
Single- Single- Single-

2-phase 2-phase 2-phase
phase phase phase
50 50 30
50 35 25
50 30 20
- - -
40 30 20
35 29 20
30 24 15
10 10 10
- 9 - 8 - 8
9 8 8
50 10 44 10 30 10
50 10 40 10 28 10
44 10 30 10 25 10
35 10 25 10 20 10
50 9 35 8 28 8
40 9 30 8 25 8
50 10 50 10 40 8
50 10 45 8 35 7
50 9 40 8 30 7
50 8 35 8 30 7
50 10 50 8 40 8
50 9 45 8 35 7
Note) The maximum counting speed may be lower than the above-mentioned
values when the change of pulse output speed, CAM control instruction,
target value match ON/OFF instruction and other interrupt programs are
executed simultaneously.
8-7
FP0R pulse output performance
Independent control
Single-phase
Maximum output frequency kHz
CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3
Available 50
Available Available 50
Available Available Available 50
Available Available Available Available 50
Note) Even if all channels are used, they can be used within the ranges above.
Interpolation control
Linear interpolation Maximum output frequency kHz
CH0 CH2 (Composite speed)
Available 50
Available Available 50
Note) Even if all channels are used for the interpolation function, they can be used within the ranges
above.
Note) The maximum counting speed may be lower than the above-mentioned values when the change
of pulse output speed, CAM control instruction, target value match ON/OFF instruction and other
interrupt programs are executed simultaneously.
8-8
8.3 High-speed Counter Function
8.3.1 Overview of High-speed Counter Function

Instructions used and the contents of the controls
Type of control Instruction Description
number
Reset/disabling of F0 Performs controls such as resetting the high-speed counter of
counter the specified channel or disabling the count.
Read/Write of F1 Reads and writes the elapsed value of the high-speed counter.
elapsed value
Target value F166 Turns on (F166 instruction) or off (F167 instruction) the specified
match ON/OFF output when the elapsed value of the high-speed counter
control F167 reaches the target value. The output is used by presetting with
an instruction such as the SET/RET instruction.
Cam control F165 Turns on or off a maximum of 31 points of internal relays
according to the elapsed value of the high-speed counter and the
predetermined table.
Input pulse F178 Measures the pulse number and cycle of the high-speed counter.
measurement
Setting the system register

In order to use the high-speed counter function, it is necessary to set system register numbers nos. 400
and 401.
8.3.2 Input Modes and Count

Incremental input mode Decremental input mode
Two-phase input mode Incremental/decremental input mode
Direction discrimination
8-9
Count for reset input
(Incremental input mode)
The reset input is executed by the interruption at (1) on (edge)

and (2) off (edge).
(1) on (edge) … Count disable, Elapsed value clear
(2) off (edge) … Count enable
DT90052 (bit2): “able/disable” setting of the input can be set
by the reset input.
8.3.3 Minimum Input Pulse Width

For the period T (1/frequency), a minimum input pulse width of T/2 (single-phase input) or T/4 (two-
phase input) is required.
<Single phase> <Two-phase>
8-10
8.3.4 I/O Allocation
• As shown in the table in the previous section “8.2.1”, the inputs and outputs used will differ depending
on the channel number being used.
• The output turned on and off can be specified from Y0 to Y7 as desired with instructions F166 (HC1S)
and F167 (HC1R).
When using CH0 with incremental input and When using CH0 with two-phase input and
reset input reset input
* The output turned on and off when the target * The output turned on and off when the target
value is reached can be specified from Y0 to Y7 value is reached can be specified from Y0 to Y7
as desired. as desired.
Reference: <8.2.1 Table of Specifications>
8.3.5 Instructions used with High-speed Counter Function

High-speed counter control instruction (F0)
• This instruction is used for counter operations such as software reset and count disable.
• Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90052.
• Once this instruction is executed, the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again.
Operations that can be performed with this instruction

• Counter software reset (bit0)
• Counting operation enable/disable (bit1)
• Hardware reset enable/disable (bit2)
• Clear high-speed counter instructions F166 to F167 (bit3)
• Clear target value match interrupt (bit3)
Example: Performing a software reset

In case of CH0
In the above program, the reset is performed in step
(1) and 0 is entered just after that in step (2). The
count is now ready for operation. If it is only reset,
counting will not be performed.
In case of CH1
8-11
High-speed counter/pulse output control flag area of FP0R
• The area DT90052 for writing channels
and control codes is allocated as shown in
the left figure.
• Control codes written with an F0 (MV)
instruction are stored by channel in
special data registers DT90370 to
DT90375.
Note) In the reset input setting, the reset

input allocated in the high-speed counter
setting of the system registers are defined
to “enable/disable”.
High-speed counter control flag monitor area

Channel No. Control code flag monitor area
CH0 DT90370
CH1 DT90371
CH2 DT90372
CH3 DT90373
CH4 DT90374
CH5 DT90375
8-12
Elapsed value write and read instruction (F1)
• This instruction writes or reads the elapsed value of the high-speed counter.
• Specify this instruction together with the elapsed value area of high-speed counter after the special
data register DT90300.
• If the F1 (DMV) instruction is executed specifying DT90300, the elapsed value will be stored as 32-bit
data in the combined area of special data registers DT90300 and DT90301.
• Use this F1 (DMV) instruction to set the elapsed value.
Example 1: Writing the elapsed value

Set the initial value of K3000 in the high-speed
counter.
Example 2: Reading the elapsed value

Read the elapsed value of the high-speed
counter and copies it to DT100 and DT101.
Note:
The elapsed value area varies during scanning. Replace it with an arbitrary data register at the beginning
of the program as necessary in cases such as using it several times in the program.
Target value match ON instruction (F166)

Example 1:
If the elapsed value (DT90300 and DT90301)
for channel 0 matches K10000, output Y7 turns
on.
Example 2:
on.
Target value match OFF instruction (F167)

Example 1:
off.
Example 2:
off.
8-13
Input pulse measurement instruction (F178)
- This instruction is used to measure the pulse number and cycle of a specified high-speed counter
channel when using the high-speed counter function.
- The pulse number to be measured is counted in a specified counting cycle.
- The one pulse (on-off cycle) right after the execution of the instruction is measured as the pulse cycle.
Note) The last numbers of the actual measured values may vary due to the measurement error.
Setting conditions:
- Channel No.: 0
- Storage location of measured pulse number:
DT200～DT201
- No. of moving average of measured pulse number:
Once
- Measurement cycle of measured pulse number:
100ms
- Pulse cycle measurement by 1µs and 1 ms
- Storage location of measured pulse cycle (1 µs
unit): DT202 to DT203
- Storage location of measured pulse cycle (1 ms
unit): DT204 to DT205
- Measurement limit of measured pulse cycle (1ms
unit): 2s
Operation of F178 instruction (In case of the above sample program)
Example) When a single pulse of 250Hz was measured repeatedly

Pulse number measured within 100 ms: 25 (Error±1) is stored in DT200 and DT201.
6
Pulse cycle: 1/250 x 10 = 4000 (Error±1) is stored in DT202 and DT203.
3
Pulse cycle: 1/250 x 10 = 4 (Error±1) is stored in DT204 and DT205.
8-14
Sample program (F178)
8.3.6 High-speed counter control flag

Note that there are the following restrictions on using each function of the high-speed counter.
Allocation and role of high-speed counter control flag

- When a high-speed counter instructions (F165/F166/F167/F178) is executed, the high-speed counter
control flag of the corresponding channel is ON. No other high-speed counter instruction can be
executed as long as this flag is ON.
- The high-speed counter control flags are allocated to each channel.
Channel No. High-speed counter control flag
CH0 R9110
CH1 R9111
CH2 R9112
CH3 R9113
Operation of high-speed counter control flag

- The high-speed counter flag varies during scanning. Replace it with an internal relay at the beginning of
the program when using it several times in the program.
8-15
8.3.7 Sample program
Positioning operations with a single speed inverter
Wiring example
Operation chart I/O allocation

I/O No. Description
X0 Encoder input
X5 Operation start signal
Y0 Inverter operation signal
R100 Positioning operation running
R101 Positioning operation start
R102 Positioning done pulse
R9110 High-speed counter CH0 control flag
Program
When X5 is turned on, Y0 turns on and the conveyor begins moving. When the elapsed value (DT90300
and DT90301) reaches K5000, Y0 turns off and the conveyor stops.
8-16
Positioning operations with a double speed inverter
Wiring example
Operation chart I/O allocation

I/O No. Description
X0 Encoder input
X5 Operation start signal
Y0 Inverter operation signal
Y1 Inverter high-speed signal
R100 Positioning operation running
R101 Positioning operation start
R102 Arrival at deceleration point
R103 Positioning done pulse
R900C Comparison instruction <flag>
R9110 High-speed counter CH0 control flag
8-17
Program
When X5 is turned on, Y0 and Y1 turn on and the conveyor begins moving. When the elapsed value
(DT90300 and DT90301) reaches K4500, Y1 turns off and the conveyor begins decelerating. When the
elapsed value reaches K5000, Y0 turns off and the conveyor stops.
8-18
8.4 Pulse Output Function
8.4.1 Overview of Pulse Output Function

Instructions used and the contents of the controls
Type of control Instruction Description
number
Forced stop, F0 Controls to stop a specified channel.
deceleration stop
Read/Write of F1 Reads and writes the elapsed value of the built-in high-speed
elapsed value counter during the pulse output control.
JOG operation F172 Outputs pulses as long as the execution condition is on.
Home return F177 Performs the home return in a specified channel.
Trapezoidal F171 Automatically outputs pulses with the trapezoidal control by
control specifying the initial speed, target speed, acceleration time,
deceleration time and target value.
JOG positioning F171 Outputs specified pulses after the position control start input
during the JOG operation.
Data table control F174 Outputs pulses according to a specified data table.
Linear F175 Performs the linear interpolation control by specifying the
interpolation composite speed, acceleration time, deceleration time, X-axis
target value and Y-axis target value.
Setting the system register

For using the pulse output function, it is necessary to set the system register No. 402.
8-19
8.4.2 Types of Pulse Output Method and Operation Modes
Clockwise/counter-clockwise output method
Control is carried out using two
pulses: a forward rotation pulse and a
reverse rotation pulse.
Pulse/direction output method (forward: OFF/reverse: ON)

Control is carried out using one pulse
output to specify the speed and
another to specify the direction of
rotation with on/off signals. In this
mode, forward rotation is carried out
when the rotation direction signal is
OFF.
Pulse/direction output method (forward: ON/reverse: OFF)

Control is carried out using one pulse
output to specify the speed and
another to specify the direction of
rotation with on/off signals. In this
mode, forward rotation is carried out
when the rotation direction signals is
ON.
8-20
Operation mode
Incremental <Relative value control>
Outputs the pulses set with the target value.
Selected
Pulse and direction Pulse and direction
Mode HSC counting
CW/CCW forward OFF/ forward ON/
Target Method
reverse ON reverse OFF
value
Pulse output when Pulse output when
Pulse output
Positive direction output is direction output is Incremental
from CW
OFF ON
Pulse output when Pulse output when
Pulse output
Negative direction output is direction output is Decremental
from CCW
ON OFF
Example:
When the current position (value of elapsed value area) is 5000, the pulse of 1000 is output from CW by
executing the pulse output instruction with the target value +1000, and the current position will be 6000.
Absolute <Absolute value control>

Outputs a number of pulses equal to the difference between the set target value and the current value.
Selected
Pulse and direction Pulse and direction
Mode HSC counting
CW/CCW forward OFF/ forward ON/
Target method
reverse ON reverse OFF
value
Target value Pulse output when Pulse output when
Pulse output
greater than direction output is direction output is Incremental
from CW
current value OFF ON
Target value Pulse output when Pulse output when
Pulse output
less than direction output is direction output is Decremental
from CCW
current value ON OFF
Example:
When the current position (value of elapsed value area) is 5000, the pulse of 4000 is output from CCW
by executing the pulse output instruction with the target value +1000, and the current position will be
1000.
8-21
8.4.3 I/O Allocation
Double pulse input driver
(CW pulse input and CCW pulse input method)
• Two output contacts are used as a pulse output for “CW, CCW”.
• The I/O allocation of pulse output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used.
• Set the control code for F171 (SPDH) instruction to “CW/CCW”.
<When using CH0> <When using CH2>
* X0 or any other input can be specified for the * X1 or any other input can be specified for the
near home input. near home input.
Single pulse input driver

(pulse input and directional switching input method)
• One output point is used as a pulse output and the other output is used as a direction output.
• The I/O allocation of pulse output terminal, direction output terminal, and home input is determined by
the channel used.
• Near home input is substituted by allocating the desired contact and turning on and off the <bit4> of
special data register DT90052.
• Up to four driver systems can be connected.
<When using CH0> <When using CH2>
* X0 or any other input can be specified for the * X1 or any other input can be specified for the
near home input. near home input.
Reference: <8.2.1 Table of Specifications>
8-22
Wiring example
Note) When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler type, connect a resister of 2 kΩ (1/2 W) to
R1, and connect a resistor of 2 kΩ (1/2 W) − 470 Ω (2 W) to R2.
Table of I/O allocation

I/O No. Description
X4 Home sensor input
X0 Near home sensor input
X8 Positioning start signal (+)
X9 Positioning start signal (-)
XA Home return start signal
XB JOG start signal (+)
XC JOG start signal (-)
XD Overrunning signal
Y0 Pulse output CW
Y1 Pulse output CCW
8-23
8.4.4 Pulse output control instructions (F0) (F1)
Pulse output control instruction (F0)
• This instruction is used for resetting the built-in high-speed counter, stopping the pulse output, and
setting and resetting the near home input.
• Specify this F0 (MV) instruction together with special data register DT90052.
• Once this instruction is executed, the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again.
Example 1:
Enable the near home input during home return operations and begin deceleration.
In case of CH0
In these programs, the near home input is
enabled in step (1) and 0 is entered just after
that in step (2) to perform the preset operations.
Operations executable by Pulse output control instruction (F0)

DT90052 Type of
Description
Bit No. control
0 Software reset Resets the value in an elapsed value area (Example: For CH0,
DT90400 and DT90401).
1 Count Disables or enables the count of an elapsed value area
disable/enable (Example: For CH0, DT90400 and DT90401).
2 Clear of pulse Clears the control of the target value match ON/OFF instructions
output control F166/F167.
3 Stop of pulse Forcibly stops the pulse output during the execution of the pulse
output output instructions F171 to F177.
4 Near home Enables the near home input when executing the home return
input instruction F177. Allocates an arbitrary input to the near home
input.
5 Deceleration Forcibly stops the pulse output during the execution of the pulse
stop request output instructions F171 to F177.
6 Request of Can be used as an input to start positioning control when
position control executing the JOG positioning instruction (F171).
8-24
FP0R Pulse output control flag area
• The area DT90052 for writing channels

and control codes is allocated as shown in
the left figure.
• Control codes written with an F0 (MV)
instruction are stored by channel in special
data register DT90380 to DT90383.
Pulse output control flag monitor area

Channel No. Control code monitor area
CH0 DT90380
CH1 DT90381
CH2 DT90382
CH3 DT90383
8-25
8.4.5 Forced Stop, Deceleration Stop (F0) Instruction
Pulse output control instruction (F0)
- Forced stop and deceleration stop is executed by F0(MV) instruction in combination with the special
data register DT90052. Once this instruction is executed, the settings will remain until this instruction is
executed again.
[Example ] Performing the forced stop of pulse output.
For CH0 For CH1
[Example 2] Performing the deceleration stop of pulse output

For CH0 For CH1
Note:
- Performing a forced stop may cause the elapsed value at the PLC output side to differ from the elapsed
value at the motor input side. Therefore, you must execute a home return after pulse output has
stopped..
- When executing the forced stop (pulse output stop) with the pulse output control instruction (F0), the
operations being executed with various instructions are cancelled and the pulse output is immediately
stopped. When the forced stop request flag (bit3 of DT90052) is on, instructions cannot be executed.
- When executing the deceleration stop with the pulse output control instruction (F0), the operations
being executed with various instructions are cancelled and the deceleration operation starts. When the
deceleration stop request flag (bit5 of DT90052) is on, instructions cannot be executed. As for the data
table control instruction (F174), the operation is similar to that of the forced stop.
- After the execution of the forced stop or deceleration stop, pulses are not output unless the execution
condition of each pulse output instruction (F171 to F177) changes from OFF to ON.
8-26
8.4.6 Elapsed Value Read and Write (F1) Instruction
Elapsed value read and write instruction (F1)
- This instruction is used to read and write the pulse number counted by the pulse output control.
- Specify this F1 (DMV) instruction in combination with the pulse output elapsed area after the special
data register DT90400.
- When executing the F1 (DMV) instruction with DT90400, the elapsed value is stored as 32-bit data in
the combined area of the special data registers DT90400 and DT90401.
- The elapsed values can be read or written with this F1 (DMV) instruction only.
Example 1: Writing the elapsed value

Set the initial value K3000 in the pulse output
CH0.
Example 2: Reading the elapsed value

Read the elapsed value of the pulse output
CH0 to DT100 and DT101.
Elapsed value area

Channel No. Pulse output elapsed value area
CH0 DT90400 to DT90401
CH1 DT90410 to DT90411
CH2 DT90420 to DT90421
CH3 DT90430 to DT90431
Note:
The elapsed value area varies during scanning. Replace it with an arbitrary data register at the beginning
of the program as necessary in cases such as using it several times in the program.
8-27
8.4.7 JOG Operation Instruction (F172)
- This instruction is used to output pulses according to a specified parameter when the trigger (execution
condition) is on.
- When the trigger (execution condition) turns off, deceleration is performed within a specified
deceleration time. However, if the trigger turns on again, acceleration is performed up to the target
speed again.
- When the deceleration stop is requested by the F0 instruction during the pulse output, the deceleration
stop is performed.
- There are two kinds of control method, which are type 0 and type 1.
Operation modes of JOG operation

There are two operation modes for the JOG operation, which are type 0 and type 1. Those operation
specifications for the specified target value differ.
Type 0
Regardless of the settings for the target value, the JOG operation is performed when the trigger is on.
Type 1
Even if the trigger is on, the deceleration stop is performed according to the settings of the target value.
8-28
Sample program JOG operation: Type 0 (No target value)
The explanation below shows the case that pulses are output from Y0 when using forward rotation and
Y1 when using reverse rotation with the following conditions; Initial speed: 1 kHz, Target speed: 7kHz,
Acceleration time: 100 ms, Deceleration time: 1000 ms.
Timing chart
Data table
Data
Example of sample
register Setting item (Unit) Settable range
program
No.
Type 0 (No target value)
Output type: CW/CCW Set according to the control code
DT300 Control code
H1000 0000 (Forward) on the next page.
H1000 0010 (Reverse)
DT302 Initial speed (Hz) K1000 K1 to K50000
DT304 Target speed (Hz) K7000 K1 to K50000
Acceleration time
DT306 K100 K1 to K32760
(ms)
Deceleration time
DT308 K100 K1 to K32760
(ms)
Target value K－2,147,483,648 to K＋
DT310 K0
(pulses ) 2,147,483,647
Note)
1.Each setting item occupies 2-word data registers.
2.When the control type 0 (No target value) is specified for the control code, the target value (pulse
number) of data table is invalid.
3.For the JOG operation, the time from the initial speed to the maximum speed (50 kHz) is specified as
acceleration time or deceleration time. For the details, refer to "8.4.17 Difference in
Acceleration/Deceleration Characteristics Between Instructions".
8-29
Sample program
Control code
Precautions during programming

- ・For using the pulse output function, it is necessary to set the system register No. 402.
・Performing rewriting during RUN stops the pulse output.
8-30
Sample program JOG operation: Type 1 (With target value)
- The explanation below shows the case that pulses are output from Y0 when using forward rotation and
Y1 when using reverse rotation with the following conditions; Initial speed: 1 kHz, Target speed: 5kHz,
Acceleration time: 120 ms, Deceleration time: 120 ms.
- When the elapsed value (absolute value) reaches K324000 (positive direction) and K-45600 (negative
direction), the deceleration stop is performed.
Timing chart
Data table
Data
register Setting item (Unit) Example of sample program Settable range
No.
Type 1 (With target value)
Absolute Set according to the control code
DT300 Control code
CW/CCW on the next page.
H1001 0010
DT306 Acceleration time (ms) K120 K1 to K32760
DT308 Deceleration time (ms) K120 K1 to K32760
324000 (Positive direction) K－2,147,483,648 to K＋
DT310 Target value (pulses)
K－45600 (Negative direction) 2,147,483,647
Note)
2.When the control type 0 (No target value) is specified for the control code, the target value (pulse
number) of data table is invalid.
3.For the JOG operation, the time from the initial speed to the maximum speed (50 kHz) is specified as
acceleration time or deceleration time. For the details, refer to "8.4.17 Difference in
8-31
Sample program
Control code

- For using the pulse output function, it is necessary to set the system register No. 402.
- Performing rewriting during RUN stops the pulse output.
8-32
8.4.8 Home Return Instruction (F177)
- When the trigger (execution condition) turns on, the home return is performed according to a specified
data table.
- On the completion of the home return, the elapsed value area is reset to "0".。
Operation modes of Home return operation
There are two kinds of operation modes, which are type 0 and type 1.
Type 0
The home input is effective regardless of whether or not there is a near home input, whether
deceleration is taking place, or whether deceleration has been completed. Also, the home return can be
performed without the near home input.
Type 1
In this mode, the home input is effective only after deceleration (started by near home input) has been
completed. If the leading edge of home input (off to on) is detected during the operation at a creep speed
after the deceleration operation, the pulse output stops.
8-33
Sample program: Home return
The explanation below shows the case that home return is performed with the following conditions; Initial
speed: 1 kHz, Target speed: 5 kHz, Creep speed: 500 Hz, Acceleration time: 300 ms, Deceleration time:
500 ms.
Timing chart
Data table
Data
No.
Home return type 1
Operating direction: Reverse Set according to the control code
DT200 Control code
H1001 0010
DT210 Creep speed (Hz) K500 K1 to K50000
K0:Not output deviation counter
Deviation counter clear clear signal
DT212 K0 (Not output)
signal output time K1 to K200 x 0.5ms(0.5ms～
100ms)
Note)
1. Each setting item occupies 2-word data registers.
2. The time from the initial speed to the target speed is specified as acceleration time. The time from the
target speed to the creep speed is specified as deceleration time. For the details, refer to "8.4.17
Difference in Acceleration/Deceleration Characteristics Between Instructions".
8-34
Sample program
Control code

stop is performed.
- Even when the home input is on, the pulse output starts by the execution of this instruction.
- When the near home input turns on during acceleration, the deceleration operation starts.
8-35
8.4.9 Trapezoidal Control Instruction (F171)
- This instruction automatically performs trapezoidal control according to the specified data table while
the trigger (execution condition) is on.
Control method of Trapezoidal control instruction (F171): Type 0 and Type 1
There are two kinds of operation modes, which are type 0 and type 1.
Type 0
- For type 0, the time from the initial speed to the target speed is specified as acceleration time or
deceleration time.
- The time specified in a program is set as the acceleration time to be processed in the PLC as is. The
same is true for the deceleration time.
- After the execution of the instruction, the speed up to the target speed can be changed.
Type 1
- For type 1, the time from the initial speed to the maximum speed (50 kHz) is specified as acceleration
time or deceleration time.
- When the target speed is below 50 kHz, the acceleration time processed in the PLC is relatively shorter
than the time specified in a program. The same is true for the deceleration time.
- Use the type 1 to change the speed to a speed faster than the target speed after the execution of the
instruction.
- After the execution, the speed up to the maximum speed, 50 kHz can be changed.
Note:
For the details of the difference in acceleration/deceleration characteristics, refer to "8.4.17 Difference in
8-36
Sample program: Trapezoidal control Type 0 (F171)
The explanation below shows the case that pulses are output from Y0 with the following conditions;
Initial speed: 1 kHz, Target speed: 10 kHz, Acceleration time: 100 ms, Deceleration time: 1000 ms,
Movement amount: 30000 pulses.
Timing chart
Data table
Data
No.
Type 0
Incremental Set according to the control code
DT100 Control code
H1000 0000
K－2,147,483,648 to K＋
DT110 Target value (pulses) K30000
2,147,483,647
Note)
1. Each setting item occupies 2-word data registers.
2. For type 0, the time from the initial speed to the target speed is specified as acceleration time or
deceleration time.
For the details, refer to "8.4.17 Difference in Acceleration/Deceleration Characteristics Between
Instructions".
8-37
Sample program
Control code

stop is performed.
- When the instruction is started during the interrupt program, specify the execution in the interrupt
program with the control code. When describing the same channel in both the normal program and the
interrupt program, be sure to program not to execute them simultaneously.
8-38
8.4.10 Speed Change After Starting Trapezoidal Control Type 0 (F171)
- The explanation below shows the program to change the speed to a speed below the target speed
during the trapezoidal control.
Use the type 0 to change the speed to a speed slower than the target speed.
Time chart
Sample program

- To change the speed, specify the execution condition of F171 instruction to be always executed.
- Using the type 0 enables to perform the acceleration/deceleration control up to the target value.
- Speed cannot be changed when the instruction is executed in the interrupt program.
8-39
8.4.11 Speed Change After Starting Trapezoidal Control Type 1 (F171)
- The explanation below shows the program to change the speed to a speed over the target speed
during the trapezoidal control.
- Use the type 1 to change the speed to a speed faster than the target speed.
Time chart
Sample program

- Using the type 1 enables to perform the acceleration/deceleration control up to the maximum speed (50
kHz).
- Speed cannot be changed when the instruction is executed in the interrupt program.
8-40
8.4.12 Precautions When Changing Speed (Common to F171 and F172)
- To change the speed, specify the execution condition of instruction to be always executed.
- Using the type 0 of trapezoidal control instruction (F171) enables to perform the
acceleration/deceleration control up to the target value. Using the type 1 of trapezoidal control
instruction (F171) enables to perform the acceleration/deceleration control up to the maximum speed
(50 kHz).
- The speed cannot be changed during the deceleration requested by the deceleration stop and during
the deceleration to stop at the target position.
- Acceleration cannot be performed from that position when the elapsed value goes beyond the
acceleration forbidden area starting position. The acceleration forbidden area starting position can be
monitored by the special data registers shown in the table below.
- The speed cannot be changed to a value below the deceleration minimum speed. If a value below the
deceleration minimum speed is specified, the speed will be corrected. The deceleration minimum
speed can be monitored by the special data registers shown in the table below.
Pulse output control area

Acceleration forbidden area
Channel No. Deceleration minimum speed area
starting position area
CH0 DT90407 DT90408 to DT90409
CH1 DT90417 DT90418 to DT90419
CH2 DT90427 DT90428 to DT90429
CH3 DT90437 DT90438 to DT90439
8-41
8.4.13 JOG Positioning Control Instruction (F171)
- When the trigger (execution condition) turns on, the JOG operation is started. When the position control
start input becomes effective, a specified pulse is output and the deceleration stop is performed.
- The position control start input becomes effective when the leading edge of the external inputs X0 to X3
or the bit 6 of the special data register DT90052 is detected. To use the external inputs X0 to X3,
specify them by the system register No. 402 for each channel.
Control method of JOG positioning control instruction (F171): Type 0 and Type 1
Type 0
- Once the trigger (execution condition) turns on, the JOG operation is started, and acceleration is
performed up to the target speed.
- When the position control start input becomes effective, pulses are output up to a specified target value.
- The speed can be changed by rewriting the target speed during the operation after executing the
instruction.
Type 1
- Once the trigger (execution condition) turns on, the JOG operation is started, and acceleration is
performed up to the target speed 1.
- When the position control start input becomes effective, the speed is changed to the target speed 2 at a
specified changeover time and pulses are output up to a specified target value.
- The speed cannot be changed after executing the instruction.
When Target speed 1 > Target speed 2 When Target speed 1 < Target speed 2
8-42
Note:
- When the position control start input does not turn on, the pulse output will not stop. Create a program
to stop the operation when an error occurs, with a combination of the forced stop by the F0 instruction
(bit 3 of DT90052) and the deceleration stop by the F0 instruction (bit 5 of DT90052). As for the
position control start input, only the leading edge is detected.
- When the pulse number from turning on the position control start input until stopping is small relative to
a specified deceleration time, the operation stops before decelerating to the initial speed. When it is
large relative to a specified deceleration time, deceleration starts after holding the target speed.
stop is performed.
- When the position control start input turns on in the acceleration area, the deceleration stop is
performed.
8-43
Sample program: JOG positioning operation: Type 0
- When the trigger (execution condition) is on, the JOG operation is started. When the position control
start input turns on, a specified pulse is output and the deceleration stop is performed.
Time chart
Data table
Data
Setting item (Unit) Example of sample program Settable range
register No.
JOG positioning Type 0
Set according to the control
DT300 Control code CW/CCW
code on the next page.
H1010 0000
K－2,147,483,648 to K＋
2,147,483,647
Note)
2.For the type 0 of JOG positioning control instruction (F171), the time from the initial speed to the
maximum speed (50 kHz) is specified as acceleration time or deceleration time. For the details, refer to
"8.4.17 Difference in Acceleration/Deceleration Characteristics Between Instructions".
3.When the target value is set to zero, the operation stops once the position control start input turns on.
8-44
Sample program
Control code
- Only when the target value is set to "0", the pulse output direction can be reversed by changing the
output type assignment from "0,1,2" to "4,5,6".
8-45
Sample program: JOG positioning operation: Type 1
- When the trigger (execution condition) is on, the JOG operation is started. When the position control
start input turns on, the position control is performed up to a specified target value after changing the
target speed at the changeover time specified in advance.
Time chart
Data table
Data
No.
H1011 0000
Set according to the control code
DT300 Control code JOG positioning Type 1
on the next page.
CW/CCW
DT304 Target speed 1 (Hz) K5000 K1 to K50000
DT308 Target speed 2 (Hz) K20000 K1 to K50000
DT310 Changeover time (ms) K100 K1 to K32760
K－2,147,483,648 to K＋
2,147,483,647
Note)
2.For the type 1 of JOG positioning control instruction, the time from the initial speed to the target speed
1 is specified as acceleration time, the time from the target speed 1 to the target speed 2 is as
changeover time, and the time from the target speed 2 to the initial speed is as deceleration time. For
the details, refer to "8.4.17 Difference in Acceleration/Deceleration Characteristics Between
Instructions".
8-46
Sample program
Control code

8-47
8.4.14 JOG Positioning Control Type 0 - Change Speed (F171)
- Use the type 1 to change the speed to a speed faster than the target speed.
Time chart
Sample program

- Using the type 1 enables to perform the acceleration/deceleration control up to the maximum speed (50
kHz).
8-48
8.4.15 Data Table Control Instruction (F174)
- Pulses are output from the specified channel according to the specified data table.
- Positioning is performed sequentially according to the values of data tables, and stops at the data table
that the value of pulse output stop (K0) is written.
Time chart
Data table
Data
Example of sample
program
No.
H1000 0010
DT400 Control code Absolute
on the next page.
CW/CCW
DT402 Frequency 1 (Hz) K1000 Set frequencies in the following
DT404 Target value 1 (pulses) K1000 range.
DT406 Frequency 2 (Hz) K2500 K1 to K50000
DT408 Target value 2 (pulses) K4000
DT410 Frequency 3 (Hz) K5000 Set target values in the following
DT412 Target value 3 (pulses) K9000 range.
DT414 Frequency 4 (Hz) K1000 K－2,147,483,648 to K＋
DT416 Target value 4 (pulses) K11000 2,147,483,647
DT418 End of table K0 K0 fixed
Note)
Each setting item occupies 2-word data registers.
8-49
Sample program
Control code

- When the deceleration stop is requested by the F0 instruction during the pulse output, an operation
similar to the forced stop is performed and the pulse output stops immediately.
8-50
8.4.16 Linear Interpolation Control Instruction (F175)
- The linear interpolation controls positioning with two axes according to the specified data table.
- Specify the number (K0 or K2) corresponding to the channel (CH0 or CH2) assigned to the X axis to
execute the F175 instruction.
Time chart
Data table
Data
Example of sample
program
No.
H1000 0000
DT500 Control code Increment
on the next page.
CW/CCW
Composite speed (Initial
DT502 K500 K6 to K50000
speed) (Hz)
Composite speed (Target
DT504 K5000 K6 to K50000
speed) (Hz)
DT510 X-axis target value (pulses) K5000 K－8,388,608 to K＋8,388,607
DT512 Y-axis target value (pulses) K2000 K－8,388,608 to K＋8,388,607
X-axis component speed The result is stored as 2 words in real type.
DT514
(Initial speed) (Hz)
X-axis component speed
DT516
(Target speed) (Hz)
Y-axis component speed
DT518
(Initial speed) (Hz)
Y-axis component speed
DT520 。
(Target speed) (Hz)
Note) Each setting item occupies 2-word data registers.
8-51
Sample program
Control code

- Specify the composite speed to make the component speed of each axis be 6 Hz or more.
- Set the composite speed (Initial speed) to be 30 Hz or less.
- For the linear interpolation instruction (F175), specify the same value for the acceleration time and
deceleration time.
- To perform the operation only to the negative direction in the incremental mode, set the target value to
zero.
- To perform the operation only to the negative direction in the absolute mode, set the target value to the
same as the current value.
stop is performed.
8-52
8.4.17 Difference in Acceleration/Deceleration Characteristics Between
Instructions
- The method to calculate the acceleration/deceleration time and the speed table for
acceleration/deceleration differs according to the type of pulse output instructions.
- Select an appropriate type of instruction according to applications.
Acceleration/deceleration characteristics of each instruction

Common to JOG operation Type 0 and Type 1 (F172)
- Specify the time from the initial speed to the maximum speed (50 kHz) as acceleration time and the
time from the maximum speed (50 kHz) to the initial speed as deceleration time in the program. The
actual acceleration/deceleration time is relatively shorter than the specified acceleration/deceleration
time.
- Each section between the initial speed and the maximum speed (50 kHz), and between the maximum
speed (50 kHz) and the initial speed is divided into the speed table of 30 steps to calculate the speed.
Therefore, the acceleration/deceleration is not as smooth compared to other control patterns especially
when the target speed is low.
Common to Home return operation Type 0 and Type 1 (F177)

- Specify the time from the initial speed to the target speed as acceleration time and the time from the
target speed to the creep speed as deceleration time in the program.
- Each section between the initial speed and the target speed, and between the target speed and the
creep speed is divided into the speed table of 30 steps to calculate the speed. Therefore, the
acceleration/deceleration is smoother compared to other control patterns.
8-53
Trapezoidal control Type 0 (F171)
- Specify the time from the initial speed to the target speed as acceleration time and the time from the
target speed to the initial speed as deceleration time in the program.
- Each section between the initial speed and the target speed, and between the target speed and the
initial speed is divided into the speed table of 30 steps to calculate the speed. Therefore, the
acceleration/deceleration is smoother compared to the trapezoidal control type 1.
- After the execution of the instruction, the speed can be changed within the range of the target speed.
To change the target speed to the one faster than the target speed right after the execution, select the
type 1..
Trapezoidal control Type 1 (F171)

time.
Therefore, the acceleration/deceleration is not as smooth compared to other control patterns especially
when the target speed is low. To use in a low-speed area with a device such as a stepping motor,
select the trapezoidal control Type 0.
- After the execution of the instruction, the speed can be changed within the range of the maximum
speed (50 kHz).
8-54
JOG positioning control Type 0 (F171)
time.
Therefore, the acceleration/deceleration is not as smooth compared to the JOG positioning control
Type 1 especially when the target speed is low. To use in a low-speed area with a device such as a
stepping motor, select the type 1.
- After the execution of the instruction, the speed can be changed within the range of the maximum
speed (50 kHz).
JOG positioning control Type 1 (F171)

- Specify the time from the initial speed to the target speed 1 as acceleration time, the time from the
target speed 1 to the target speed 2 as the changeover time and the time from the target speed 2 to the
initial speed as deceleration time in the program.
- Each section between the initial speed and the target speed 1, between the target speed 1 and the
target speed 2, and between the target speed 2 and the initial speed is divided into the speed table of
30 steps to calculate the speed. Therefore, the acceleration/deceleration is smoother compared to the
JOG positioning control Type 0.
- The speed cannot be changed after the execution of the instruction.
8-55
8.4.18 Pulse Output Instruction Flag
- Note that there are the following restrictions on using each function of the pulse output
Allocation and role of pulse output instruction flag
- When a pulse output instruction (F171/F172/F174/F175/F177) or PWM output instruction (F173) is
executed and pulses are being output, the pulse output instruction flag of the corresponding channel is
ON. No other pulse output instruction can be executed as long as this flag is ON.
- The pulse output instruction flags are allocated to each channel.
Channel Pulse output instruction flag

CH0 R9120
CH1 R9121
CH2 R9122
CH3 R9123
Operation of pulse output instruction flag

- The pulse output instruction flags vary even during scanning. Replace them with internal relays at the
beginning of the program when using them several times in the program.
8.4.19 Common Precautions for Pulse Output Instructions

- Note that there are the following restrictions on using each function of the pulse output
Precautions when using instructions in PULSE+SIGN mode (Common to F171, F172, F175, F177)
- When each instruction is executed, pulses are output approx. 300µs after the direction signal has been
output; the motor drive characteristics are simultaneously taken into consideration.
Stop by pulse output control instruction (F0) (Common to F171, F172, F174, F175, F177)
- When executing the deceleration stop with the pulse output control instruction (F0), the operations
being executed with various instructions are cancelled and the deceleration operation starts. When the
deceleration stop request flag (bit 5 of DT90052) is on, instructions cannot be executed. As for the data
table control instruction (F174), the operation is similar to that of the forced stop.
- When executing the forced stop (pulse output stop) with the pulse output control instruction (F0), the
operations being executed with various instructions are cancelled and the pulse output is immediately
stopped. When the forced stop request flag (bit 3 of DT90052) is one, instructions cannot be executed.
Specification of initial speed and speed error (Common to F171, F172, F174, F175, F177)
- Note that there are the following characteristics according to the initial speed specified with each
instruction.
(1) When the initial speed is 1 Hz or higher, and lower than 46 Hz, the control can be performed up to 10
kHz.
(2) When the initial speed is 46 Hz or higher, and lower than 184 Hz, the control can be performed up to
the maximum frequency.
(3) When the initial speed is 184 Hz or higher, the control can be performed up to the maximum
frequency. The speed error will be smallest.
Control code and quick start (Common to F171, F172, F175)
- When "Calculation only" is specified in the digit to set the output of the control code of each instruction,
the pulse output is not performed.
- Instructions can be quickly started when executing them for the same channel and with the same
parameter after executing calculation only. v
Duty cycle of pulse output (Common to F171, F172, F174, F175, F177)
- Pulses are output with a 25% duty cycle.
8-56
8.5 PWM Output Function
8.5.1 Overview
PWM output function
With the F173 (PWMH) instruction, the pulse width modulation output of the specified duty ratio is
obtained.
System register setting
In order to use the PWM output function, it is necessary to set system register numbers no.402.
8.5.2 PWM Output Instruction F173

While X6 is on, a pulse with a period of 1 ms and duty
ratio of 50% is output from Y0 of specified channel
CH0.
When the program runs, the data table will be as
shown below.
Data table
DT100 Control code *1 : K13
DT101 Duty *2 : 50%
*1: Specify the control code by setting the K constant.

K Frequency (Hz) Period (ms)
K3 6 166.67
K4 7.5 133.33
K5 12.5 80.00
K6 25 40.00
K7 50 20.00
K8 100 10.00
K9 200 5.00
K10 400 2.50
K11 600 1.67
K12 800 1.25
K13 1.0 k 1.00
K14 1.2 k 0.83
K15 1.6 k 0.63
K16 2.0 k 0.50
K17 3.0 k 0.33
K18 4.8 k 0.21
*2: Specify the duty by setting the K constant.

Duty: K0 to K999(1000 resolutions)
Note:
• If a value outside the specified range is written to the duty area while the instruction is being executed,
a frequency corrected to the maximum value is output. If written when instruction execution is started,
an operation error is occurred.
8-57
8-58
Chapter 9
Security Functions
9.1 Password Protect Function
9.1.1 Password Protect Function

This function is used to prohibit reading and writing programs and system registers by setting a
password on the FP0R.
There are two ways to set a password as below.
1. Sets using the programming tool.
2. Sets using an instruction (SYS1 instruction).
Characters usable for password

Digit number of
Usable characters
password
4-digit password 4 characters of the following 16 characters, 0 to 9 and A to F, can be used.
8-digit password A maximum of 8 one-byte characters (case-sensitive) and symbols can be used.
Note: Precautions on the password setting

Do not forget your password. If you forget your password, you cannot read programs. (Even if you ask
us for your password, we cannot crack it.)
9-2
9.1.2 Setting using Programming Tool
Setting using FPWIN GR
1. Select [Online Edit Mode] under the [Online] on the menu bar, or press the [CTRL] and [F2] keys at
the same time, to switch to the [Online] screen.
2. Select or “Set PLC Password” under “Tool” on the menu bar. The following display will be shown.
Security information dialog box

Indicates the current status of the password
setting.
Specify the type of the password to be used.
Specify an operation mode.
Access: Accesses programs by inputting a
password.
Protect: Sets a password.
Unprotect: Releases the password setting.
Input a password.
Those are the settings when using the FP
memory loader (Ver. 2.0 or later).
Confirmation the contents of the password setting

Confirm the settings indicated in the dialog box.
Current status
Indicates the current status of the password setting. There are following five statuses.
Item Settings
Password is not set Password is not set.
4 digits Protect Four-digit password, and access is prohibited.
4 digits Available to access Four-digit password, and access is allowed.
(The status that inputting the password completes and that can
access programs.)
8 digits Protect Eight-digit password, and access is prohibited.
8 digits Available to access Eight-digit password, and access is allowed.
(The status that inputting the password completes and that can
access programs.)
Available retry counts

This is the number of times that you can input the password in succession (up to 3 times). Every
time incorrect password is input, the number will decrease.
If you fail to input the correct password for 3 times in succession, you cannot access the
program.
Turn the power supply of the FP0R off and then on again to try to input the password again.
Note:
If the power supply of the PLC is turned on/off with the setting that the access is allowed, the setting will
be that the PLC is protected again.
9-3
How to prohibit access with password
1. Select "Tool" > "Set PLC Password" in the menu bar.
The "Set PLC Password" dialog box is displayed.
2. Set the items in the table below, and click on the “Settings” button.
Item Settings
Digit number Select “4 digits” or “8 digits”.
Operation Mode Select “Protect”.
4 digits or 8 digits Input a password to be set.
3. Input the password for confirmation again, and click the [OK] button.
Once the PLC is in write-read inhibit state (password-protected), the following message is displayed.
4. Click the "OK" button.
9-4
How to permit access with password
Set the items in the table below, and click on the “Settings” button.
Item Settings
Operation Mode Select “Access”.
4 digits or 8 digits Input the set password.
Once access is permitted, the following message is displayed.
Note:
If the power supply of the PLC is turned on/off when the access is permitted, the PLC will be password
protected again.
9-5
How to cancel the password protection
Following two methods are available to cancel the password setting.
Description Program
Unprotect Cancels the registered password to be specified. All programs are retained.
All programs are deleted.
Erases all programs and security information to
Force cancel (The upload protection
cancel the setting forcibly.
setting is also deleted.)
How to cancel the password protection (Programs are retained.)

Item Settings
Operation Mode Select “Unprotect”.
4 digits or 8 digits Input the set password.
Once the cancellation of protection is completed, the following message is displayed.
Note:
Unless the access is permitted, the cancellation of password cannot be executed.
9-6
How to force cancel (Programs and security information are all deleted.)
2. Click the "Force Cancel" button.

A confirmation message is displayed.
3. Confirm the message and click the "OK" button.

If the current status is “Password is not set”, this procedure has completed. All programs and security
information were deleted.
9-7
9.2 Upload Protection
9.2.1 Upload Protection

Overview of program upload protection function
- This function is to prohibit reading programs and system registers by setting to disable program
uploading.
- If the upload protection is set, note that the ladder programs and system registers will be disabled to be
uploaded after that. Transferring programs to the FP memory loader will be also unperformable.
- The setting can be cancelled using the programming tool, however, all ladder programs, system
registers and password information will be deleted when the setting is cancelled.
- Editing the files that are controlled with a PC can be carried out online using the programming tool.
However, the programs will be broken if the programs are not absolutely matched. When using this
function, store ladder programs as files without fail.
Interaction with the password protect function
- The password setting can be specified simultaneously for the PLC in which this function is set.
- This function can be also set in a password-protected PLC.
Note:
When performing "Release the upload-protection by compulsion"
- All programs and security information will be deleted when the upload protection setting is cancelled.
We cannot restore the deleted programs even if you ask us. We cannot read the data of the PLC in
which the program upload protection has been set. Keeping your programs is your responsibility.
9.2.2 Setting Method

Use the programming tool to set the upload protection on the control unit.
Upload protection setting with FPWIN GR

1. Select "Online" > "Online Edit Mode" in the menu bar, and press the CTRL and F2 keys. The screen is
switched to "Online Monitor".
2. Select "Tool" > "Upload settings" in the menu bar.
The "Upload settings" dialog box is displayed.
3. Select "Set the PLC cannot be uploaded.", and press the "Execute" button.
Force Cancel with FPWIN GR

Select "Release the upload-protection by compulsion" in the "Upload settings" dialog box, and press the
"Execute" button.
9-8
9.3 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader
9.3.1 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader

The following two functions of the FP memory loader (AFP8670/AFP8671) (*) can be set through the
FP0R.
Limited distribution function
(Programs can be downloaded only to the units which the same password has been set.)
When downloading a program from the memory loader, the program can be downloaded only when the
program stored in the memory loader matches the password set for the PLC with this function enabled.
Upload protection setting function

If this function is valid, the PLC will be in the upload protection state by downloading a program to the
PLC from the FP memory loader.
9-9
9.3.2 Setting Method
1. Select "Online" > "Online Edit Mode" in the menu bar, and press the CTRL and F2 keys.
The screen is switched to "Online Monitor".
Item Settings
Digit number Select "8 digits".
Operation Mode Select “Protect”.
8 digits password Enter a 8-digit password.
Check the box of the function to use.
- Limited distribution function
Setting of FP memory loader option → "Allow the download in case of same password"
- Enable the upload protection setting.
→ "Set that PLC cannot be uploaded"
Note:
This function is available only when a 8-digit password has been set.
9-10
9.3.3 Table of Corresponding Operations of FP Memory Loader Security
Function
Note that the operation differs according to the combination of the program stored in the FP memory
loader and the status of the PLC to which is written.
Version check list

Status of destination PLC Password 4-digit password 8-digit password
Program in FP memory loader Not set Protected Protected
- Password is unset.
or ○ ○ ○
- 4-bit or 8-bit password is set.
- 8-digit password is set
and
× × ●
- "Allow the download in case of same
password" is set
○ ○ ○
and Note1) Note1) Note1)
- "Set that PLC cannot be uploaded" is set.
and
- "Allow the download in case of same × ×
Note2) Note1) ●
password" is set
and
- "Set that PLC cannot be uploaded" is set.
○: Download possible ●: Download possible only for models with the same password
×: Download impossible
Note1) The upload protection setting is not available in FP memory loader Ver1.*.
Note2) Although programs cannot be downloaded with FP memory loader Ver.2 or later, only the upload
protection setting is activated.
Status of PLC that program has been downloaded

Status of FP memory loader Password setting for FP0R after download
No password setting The password will be cleared.
4-digit password setting The password will be overwritten with a new 4-digit password.
8-digit password setting
The password will be overwritten with a new 8-digit password.
Limited distribution setting: Off
8-digit password setting The password will not change.
Limited distribution setting: On (The program itself will not be downloaded.)
9-11
9.4 Table of Security Settings/Cancel
For the settings on the FP0R control unit
Status of security
Security not Upload 4-digit 8-digit
set protection password password
Upload protection A A A
Sets/
4-digit password A A N/A
Cancels
8-digit password A A N/A
A: Available N/A: Not available
9-12
Chapter 10
Other Functions
10.1 P13 (PICWT) Instruction
Data registers of 32765 words can be stored and used in the built-in ROM (F-ROM data area)
control unit using the P13 (PICWT) instruction.
Note the followings for the use:
1. Restrictions on the number of writing

Writing can be performed within 10000 times. If writing continues for more than that, the correct
operation cannot be guaranteed.
2.The power supply turns off when the P13 (PICWT) instruction is being executed.
If the power supply turns off during this instruction is being executed, the hold type area may not be kept.
(Also, when the power is shut off during rewriting in the RUN mode, the same event may occur.)
10-2
10.2 Sampling Trance Function
10.2.1 Overview
The sampling trace function is available for the FP0R. Using this function enables to take samplings and
record (accumulate) the state of arbitrary data of 16 bits + 3 data registered in the PLC at an arbitrary
timing, and to examine the changes in the bit and data in details after stopping sampling at an arbitrary
timing.
The sampling trace function is used by [Time chart monitor] under the online menu of the FPWIN GR.
The instructions, functions, special relays and special registers related to the sampling trace
function are as below.
Number Name Operation
F155 (SMPL) sampling instruction
F156 (STRG) Sampling stop trigger instruction
R902C Sample point flag OFF = Sampling by instruction
ON = Sampling at regular time intervals
R902D Sampling trace end flag When sampling trace starts = 0 stops = 1
R902E Sampling trigger flag Turns on when sampling stop trigger is on.
R902F Sampling enable flag Turns on when sampling operation starts.
DT90028 Interval of sampling trace K0 = For sampling by instruction
K1 to K3000 (10 ms to 30 seconds) For
sampling at regular time intervals
10.2.2 Details of Sampling Trace Function

No. of data collectable at one sampling: 16 bits + 3 data
Sampling capacity (No. of samples accumulable): 300 samples (C10, C14, C16)
1000 samples (C32, T32, F32)
Types of sampling timing (When an instruction is executed, or at regular time intervals)
1: Sampling at regular time intervals From 10 ms
2: Sampling by F155 (SMPL) instruction
Sampling for every scan can be executed by the instruction.

Also, more than one sampling can be executed in one scan.
Timing for the execution of the F155 (SMPL) instruction can be set by the ladder sequence.
It is not possible to activate the sampling at regular time intervals and the sampling by the F155 (SMPL)
instruction simultaneously.
How to stop sampling

Methods of the stop trigger (request): Following two methods are available.
1: Deactivate request by the tool software

2: Deactivate request by the F156 (STRG) instruction
If the stop trigger activates, the PLC will continue to take samplings for the specified number of delay,
and then stop the sampling operation.
Once the sampling operation stops, the data will be automatically retrieved by the tool software and will
be indicated in a time chart.
The number of samples before and after the trigger point can be adjusted by the number of delay. When
using the 32-point type with the initial settings (number of samples: 1000, number of delay: 100), the
number of samples before and after the trigger point is 900 and 1000 respectively.
10-3
Operation image of sampling trace
10.2.3 How to Use Sampling Trace
1. Sampling at regular time intervals

1) Register the bit/word device to be monitored by the time chart monitor function of FPWIN GR.
2) Specify the sampling configurations.
Set the mode of the sampling configurations to "TRACE".
Set the sampling rate (time).
10-4
3) Start monitoring. Start with the button.
2. Sampling by instruction
1) Register the bit/word device to be monitored by the time chart monitor function of FPWIN GR.
2) Specify the sampling configurations.
Set the mode of the sampling configurations to " TRACE ".
Set the sampling rate (time) to 0.
3. Read data by trigger

1) Stop sampling by stopping monitoring the trace that has been started in the above procedure 1 or 2
on the time chart display of FPWIN GR. The data will be indicated in the time chart.
Stop monitoring. (Stop with the button, stop by the "Trigger Break" in the menu, or stop by the F156
instruction.)
Reference: <FPWIN GR Help>
10-5
10.3 Time Constant Processing
The input time constants for 16 points of the CPU input X0 to XF can be set by the system registers 430
to 433.
If this setting is specified, an operation like the equivalent circuit below will be performed.
By the setting, the noises or chattering of input will be removed.
CXn = Input signal of Xn contact

Xn = Image memory of input Xn
Note:
- The input signal of X contact is retrieved at the timing of the normal I/O update.
- If the partial update instruction is executed for the input in the time constant processing, the time
constant processing will be invalid, and the input status at the time will be read out and set.
- The time constant processing can be performed for the input other than X0 to XF (add-on cassettes or
expansion units) by the F182 (FILTR) instruction.
- The timer instruction is not used for the timer processing in this equivalent circuit.
- The time constant processing is invalid when the high-speed counter, pulse catch or interrupt has been
specified.
Input time constant setting function and applicable models

System register Control unit input Applicable model
No. I/O No. C10/C14/C16 C32/T32/F32
430 X0 to X3 A A
431 X4 to X7 A A
432 X8 to XB N/A A
433 XC to XF N/A A
A: Available N/A: Not available
10-6
Chapter 11
Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting
11.1 Self-Diagnostic function
11.1.1 LED Display for Status Condition

How to read status indicator LEDs on control unit
LED status
Operation
ERROR/ Description
RUN PROG. status
ALARM
Light (on) Off Off Normal operation Operation
Normal
Off Light (on) Off PROG. mode Stop
condition
Flashes Flashes Off Forcing input/output in Run mode Operation
Self-diagnostic error (Operation is
Light (on) Off Flashes Operation
running.)
Abnormal
Off Light (on) Flashes Self-diagnostic error (Operation stops.) Stop
condition
Light (on) Light (on) Light System watchdog timer has been
Stop
or off or off (on) activated
• The control unit has a self-diagnostic function which

identifies errors and stops operation if necessary.
• When an error occurs, the status of the status indicator
LEDs on the control unit vary, as shown in the table above.
11.1.2 Operation Mode When an Error Occurs

Normally, when an error occurs, the operation stops.
When the duplicated output error or operation error occurs, the user may select whether operation is to
be continued or stopped by setting the system registers. You can set the error which operation is to be
continued or stopped using the programming tool software as shown below.
“PLC System Register” setting menu on programming tool software

To specify the steps to be taken by the FPWIN GR if a PLC error occurs, select “PLC System Register
setting” under “Option” on the menu bar, and click on the “Action on Error” tab. The screen shown below
is displayed.
Example1: When allowing duplicated output

Turn off the check box for No. 20. When operation is resumed, it will not be handled as an error.
Example2: When continuing operation even a calculation error has occurred
Turn off the check box for No. 26. When operation is resumed, it will be continued, but will be handled as
an error.
11-2
11.2 Troubleshooting
11.2.1 If ERROR/ALARM LED is Flashing

Condition: The self-diagnostic error occurs
Procedure 1
Check the error contents (error code) using the programming tool.
Using FPWIN GR
With the FPWIN GR, if a PLC error occurs during programming or debugging and the RUN mode is
changed to the PROG. mode, the following status display dialog box is displayed automatically. Check
the contents of the self-diagnosed error.
Status display dialog box

If the error is an operation error, the
error address can be confirmed in
this dialog box.
Key Point:
To display the status display dialog box, select “Status Display” under “Online” on the menu bar.
Using FPWIN Pro

With the FPWIN Pro, the contents of the self-diagnostic error can be checked in the following PLC status
dialog box. Select "PLC status" under "Monitor" in the menu to display this dialog box.
PLC status dialog box
11-3
Procedure 2
<For error code is 1 to 9>
- Condition
There is a syntax error in the program.
- Operation 1
Change to PROG. mode and clear the error.
- Operation 2
Execute a total-check function using FPWIN GR to determine the location of the syntax error.
Or execute a check or compile using FPWIN Pro to determine the location of the syntax error.
<For error code is 20 or higher>

- Condition
A self-diagnostic error other than a syntax error has occurred.
- Operation
Use the programming tool in PROG. mode to clear the error.
Using FPWIN GR/FPWIN Pro

Click on the “Clear Error” button in the “Status display dialog box”. Error code 43 and higher can be
cleared.
• In the PROG. mode, the power supply can be turned off and then on again to clear the error, but all of
the contents of the operation memory except hold type data are cleared.
• An error can also be cleared by executing a self-diagnostic error set instruction F148 (ERR).
Key Point:
When an operation error (error code 45) occurs, the address at which the error occurred is stored in
special data registers DT90017 and DT90018. If this happens, click on the “Operation Err” button in the
“Status display dialog box” and confirm the address at which the error occurred before cancelling the
error.
11-4
11.2.2 If ERROR LED is ON
Condition: The system watchdog timer has been activated and the operation of PLC has been
activated.
Procedure 1
Set the mode selector of PLC from RUN to PROG. mode and turn the power off and then on.
• If the ERROR/ALARM LED is turned on again, there is probably an abnormality in the FP0R control
unit. Please contact your dealer.
• If the ERROR/ALARm LED is flashed, go to chapter 11.2.1.
Procedure 2
Set the mode selector from PROG. to RUN mode.
• If the ERROR/ALARM LED is turned on, the program execution time is too long. Check the program.
Check
(1)Check if instructions such as “JMP” or “LOOP” are programmed in such a way that a scan never finish.
(2)Check if interrupt instructions are executed in succession.
11.2.3 ALL LEDs are OFF

Procedure 1
Check wiring of power supply.
Procedure 2
Check if the power supplied to the FP-X control unit is in the range of the rating.
• Be sure to check the fluctuation of the voltage.
Procedure 3
Disconnect the power supply wiring to the other devices if the power supplied to the FP-X control unit is
shared with them.
• If the LED on the control unit turn on at this moment, increase the capacity of the power supply or
prepare another power supply for other devices.
• Please contact your dealer for further questions.
11-5
11.2.4 Diagnosing Output Malfunction
Proceed from the check of the output side to the check of the input side.
Check of output condition 1: Output indicator LEDs are on

Procedure 1
Check the wiring of the loads.
Procedure 2
Check if the power is properly supplied to the loads.
• If the power is properly supplied to the load, there is probably an abnormality in the load. Check the
load again.
• If the power is not supplied to the load, there is probably an abnormality in the output section. Please
contact your dealer.
Check of output condition 2: Output indicator LEDS are off

Procedure 1
Monitor the output condition using a programming tool.
• If the output monitored is turned on, there is probably a duplicated output error.
Procedure 2
Forcing on the output using forcing input/output function.
• If the output indicator LED is turned on, go to input condition check.
• If the output indicator LED remains off, there is probably an abnormality in the output unit. Please
contact your dealer.
Check of input condition 1: Input indicator LEDs are off

Procedure 1
Check the wiring of the input devices.
Procedure 2
Check that the power is properly supplied to the input terminals.
• If the power is properly supplied to the input terminal, there is probably an abnormality in the input unit.
Please contact your dealer.
• If the power is not supplied to the input terminal, there is probably an abnormality in the input device or
input power supply. Check the input device and input power supply.
Check of input condition 2: Input indicator LEDs are on

Procedure
Monitor the input condition using a programming tool.
• If the input monitored is off, there is probably an abnormality with the input unit. Please contact your
dealer.
• If the input monitored is on, check the leakage current at the input devices (e.g., two-wire type sensor)
and check the program again.
Check
(1)Check for the duplicated use of output. Check whether the output has been rewritten using the high-
level instruction.
(2)Check the program flow when a control instruction such as MCR or JMP is used.
11-6
11.2.5 A Protect Error Message Appears
When a password function is used
Procedure
Enter a password in the “Set PLC Password” menu (FPWIN GR), “Security settings” menu (FPWIN Pro)
and change it to the state to enable “Access”.
Using FPWIN GR
(1)Select “Set PLC Password” under “Tool” on the menu bar.
(2)The PLC password setting dialog box shown below is displayed. Turn on the radio button next to
“Access”, enter a password, and click on the “Settings” button.
Set PLC password dialog box
Using FPWIN Pro

(1) Select "Security Settings" under "Online" on the menu bar.
(2)The security setting dialog box shown below is displayed. Input the password in the field of "PLC
access", and click the "Login" button.
Security Settings dialog box
11-7
11.2.6 PROG Mode does not Change to RUN
Condition: A syntax error or a self-diagnosed error that caused operation to stop has occurred.
Procedure 1
Check if the ERROR/ALARM LED is flashing.
Example:
If the ERROR/ALARM LED is flashing, check <11.2.1 If ERROR/ALARM LED is Flashing >.
Procedure 2
Execute a total check (FPWIN GR) or check/compile (FPWIN Pro) to determine the location of the
syntax error.
Using FPWIN GR
Select “Debug” on the menu bar, and select “Totally check program”. Click on the “Execute” button in the
total check dialog box.
Using FPWIN Pro

Select "Compile All" under "Project", or "Check" under "Object" on the menu bar.
As the dialog box is displayed, check the contents.
11-8
11.3 Operation Errors
11.3.1 Outline of Operation Errors

- An operation error is a condition in which operation is impossible when a high-level instruction is
executed.
- When an operation error occurs, the ERROR/ALARM LED on the control unit will blink and the
operation error flags (R9007 and R9008) will turn on.
- The operation error code "E45" is set at special data register DT90000.
- The error address is stored in special data registers DT90017 and DT90018.
Types of operation error

1. Address error
The memory address (number) specified by index modification is outside the area which can be used.
2. BCD data error
Operation is attempted on non-BCD data when an instruction handling BCD is executed, or BCD
conversion is attempted on data which is not within the possible conversion range.
3. Parameter error
In an instruction requiring the specification of control data, the specified data is outside the possible
range.
4. Over area error
The data manipulated by a block instruction exceeds the memory range.
11.3.2 Operation Mode When an Operation Error Occurs

- Normally, the operation stops when an operation error occurs.
- When you set system register 26 to "continuation", the control unit operates even if an operation error
occurs.
Using FPWIN GR
1. Set the mode of the CPU to RPOG.
2. Select the "Option" in "PLC Configuration" option from the menu bar.
3. On the "PLC Configuration" menu, select "Action on error". This displays system registers 20 to 26.
4. Remove the check of system register 26.
5. Press the "OK" to write the setting to the PLC.
Using FPWIN Pro
1. Change the mode to offline.
2. Select "Action on error" from the system register table of the project navigator.
3. Change the setting of No. 26.
11-9
11.3.3 Dealing with Operation Errors
<Procedure>
1. Check the location of the error.
Check the address where the error occurred, which is stored in DT90017 and DT90018, and make sure
the high-level instruction for that address is correct and appropriate.
2. Clear the error.
Use a programming tool to clear the error.
- When using FPWIN GR, select "Online" -> "Status Display" in the menu bar.
Execute "Clear Error".
- When using FPWIN Pro, select "Monitor" -> "PLC Status". Press the "Error Clear" button.
- An error can be cleared by turning the power off and on in PROG. mode, however, the contents of the
operation memory except the hold type data will be cleared.
- An error can also be cleared by executing a self-diagnostic error set instruction (F148).
- If the mode selector is set to "RUN", RUN will resume as soon as the error is cleared. So if the cause of
the error is not removed, the error may seem not to be cleared.
11.3.4 Points to Check in Program

1. Check if an extraordinarily large value or negative value was stored in the index register.
<Example> When a data register is modified using an index register
In this case, index register modifies the address of data register DT0. However, it may exceed the
addressable range of the data register depending on the data in I0. If the value exceeds the range, an
operation error will occur. The same is true when the contents of I0 are a negative value.
2. Is there any data which cannot be converted using BCD ↔ BIN data conversion?
<Example> When BCD-to-BIN conversion is attempted
In this case, if DT0 contains a hexadecimal number with one of the digits A through F such as 12A4,
conversion will be impossible and an operation error will result.
<Example> When BIN-to-BCD conversion is attempted
In this case, if DT1 contains a negative value or a value greater than K9999, an operation error will occur.
3. Check if the devisor of a division instruction is “0”.

<Example>
In this case, if the content of DT100 is "0", an operation error will occur.
11-10
Chapter 12
Precautions During Programming
12.1 Use of Duplicated Output
12.1.1 Duplicated Output

What is duplicated output?
- Duplicated output refers to repeatedly specifying the same output in a sequence program.
- If the same output is specified for the "OT" and "KP" instructions, it is considered to be duplicated
output.
(Even if the same output is used for multiple instructions, such as the SET, RST instruction or high-
level instruction (such as data transfer), it is not regarded as duplicated output.)
- If you enter RUN mode while the duplicated output condition exists, it will be normally flagged as an
error. (The ERROR/ALARM LED will flash and the self-diagnostic error flag R9000 will go on.)
How to check for duplicated use

You can check for duplicated outputs in the program using the programming tool, by the following
method.
Using FPWIN GR
Select the "Debug" → "Totally Check Program" in the menu bar, and click "Execute". If there are any
duplicated outputs, an error message and the address will be displayed.
Using FPWIN Pro

If there are any duplicated outputs, an error message and the address will be displayed when compiling
programs.
Enabling duplicated output

- If you need to use output repeatedly due to the content of the program, duplicated output can be
enabled.
- In this case, change the setting of system register 20 to "enable".
- When this is done, an error will not occur when the program is executed.
12-2
12.1.2 When Output is Repeated with an OT, KP, SET or RST Instruction
Condition of internal and output relays during operation
- When instructions are repeatedly used which output to internal and output relays such as transfer
instructions and OT, KP, SET and RST instructions, the contents are rewritten at each step during
operation.
<Example> Processing when SET, RST and OT instructions are used (X0 to X2 are all on).
The output is determined by the final operation results

- If the same output is used by several instructions such as the OT, KP, SET, RST or data transfer
functions, the output obtained at the I/O update is determined by the final results of the operation.
<Example> Output to the same output relay Y0 with OT, KP, SET and RST instructions.
When X0 to X2 are all on, Y0 is output as off at I/O update.
- If you need to output a result while processing is still in progress, use a partial I/O update instruction
(F143).
12-3
12.2 Handling Index Registers
12.2.1 Index Registers

- Like other registers, index registers have 14 points, I0 to ID, for reading and writing 16-bit data.
- Use an index register to indirectly specify a memory area number. (This is called index modification.)
<Example> Transferring the contents of data register DT100 to the number specified by the
contents of an index register.
In this example, the number of the destination data register varies depending on the contents of I0 with
DT0 acting as a base. For example, when I0 contains K10, the destination will be DT10, and when I0 is
K20, the destination will be DT20.
- In this way, index registers allow the specification of multiple memory areas with a single instruction,
and thus index registers are very convenient when handling large amounts of data.
12.2.2 Memory Areas Which can be Modified with Index Registers

- Index registers can be used to modify other types of memory areas in addition to data registers DT.
<Example> I0WX0, I0WY1, I0WR0, I0SV0, I0EV2, I0DT100
- Constants can be also modified.
<Example> I0K10, I0H1001
- An index register cannot modify another index register.
<Example> I0I0, I0I1
- When using index modification with an instruction which handles 32-bit data, specify with I0. In this
case, I0 and I1 are handled together as 32-bit data.
12-4
12.2.3 Example of Using an Index Register
Repeatedly reading in external data
<Example> Writing the contents of input WX3 to a sequence of data registers beginning from DT0.
When R0 turns on, 0 is written to index register I0.

When the R1 turns on, the contents of input WX3 is transferred to the data register specified by
I0DT0.
Add 1 to I0.
In this case, the contents of I0 will change successively, and the destination data register will be as
follows.
Input times of R1 Contents of I0 Destination data register
1st 0 DT0
2nd 1 DT1
3rd 2 DT2
: : :
Inputting and outputting data based on a number specified by an input

<Example 1> Setting a timer number specified by a digital switch
Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register I0.
Convert the BCD timer set value in WX0 to binary and store in the timer set value area SV specified
by contents of I0.
<Example 2> Taking external output of the elapsed value in a timer number specified by a digital
switch
Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register I0.
Convert the elapsed value data EV in the timer specified by I0 to BCD, and output it to output relay
WY0.
12-5
12.3 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method
12.3.1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method

Instructions using the leading edge detection operation
1. DF (leading edge differential) instruction
2. Count input for CT (counter) instruction
3. Count input for F118 (UCD up-down counter) instruction
4. Shift input for SR (shift register) instruction
5. Shift input for F119 (LRSR left-right shift register) instruction
6. NSTP (next step) instruction
7. Differential execution type high-level instruction (P13)
Leading edge detection method

- An instruction with a leading edge detection method operates only in the scan where its trigger
(execution condition) is detected switching from off to on.
1. Standard operation
2. Leading edge detection operation
How to perform leading edge detection

The condition of the previous execution and the condition of the current execution are compared, and the
instruction is executed only if the previous condition was off and the current condition is on. In any other
case, the instruction is not executed.
Precautions when using an instruction which performs leading edge detection

- When RUN begins, for example when the system is powered on, the off -> on change of the execution
condition (trigger) is not detected. Execution of the instruction will take place as explained on the next
page.
- When used with one of the instructions indicated in instructions 1 to 6 below which change the order of
execution of instructions, the operation of the instruction may change depending on input timing. Take
care regarding this point.
Be careful when using leading edge detection type instructions with control instructions, such
as;
1. MC and MCE instructions
2. JP and LBL instructions
3. LOOP and LBL instructions
4. CNDE instruction
5. Step ladder instructions
6. Subroutine instructions
12-6
12.3.2 Operation and Precautions When RUN starts
Operation of first scan after RUN begins
- The leading edge detection instruction is not executed when the mode has been switched to the RUN
mode, or when the power supply is booted in the RUN mode, if the trigger (execution condition) is
already on.
- If you need to execute an instruction when the trigger (execution condition) is on prior to switching to
RUN mode, make a program as below using R9014 (initial pulse off relay). (R9014 is a special internal
relay which is off during the first scan and turns on at the second scan.)
<Example 1> DF (leading edge differential) instruction
<Example 2> CT (counter) instruction
12-7
12.3.3 Precautions When Using a Control Instruction
- If a leading edge detection instruction is in a control instruction, it will be executed only under the
following condition: The leading edge detection instruction was off when the execution condition of the
previous control instruction was reset, and the leading edge detection instruction is on when the
execution condition of the current control instruction becomes on.
- When a leading edge detection instruction is used with an instruction which changes the order of
instruction execution such as MC, MCE, JP or LBL, the operation of the instruction may change as
follows depending on input timing. Take care regarding this point.
<Example 1> Using the DF instruction between MC and MCE instructions
<Example 2> Using the CT instruction between JP and LBL instructions
12-8
12.4 Precautions for Programming
Programs which are not executed correctly
Do no write the following programs as they will not be executed correctly.
<Example 1>
- When X1 was on prior to X0, Y0 will not be on even if X0 becomes on.
<Example 2>
- TMX5 will activate if X1 becomes on regardless of whether X0 is on or off.
<Example 3>
- When X2 was on prior to X0, Y1 will not be on even if X0 becomes on.
When a combination of contacts are set as the trigger (execution condition) of a differential instruction
(DF) or timer instruction, do not use an AND stack (ANS) instruction, read stack (RDS) instruction, or
pop stack (POPS) instruction.
Examples in which the above programs are rewritten correctly

<Program in which the example 1 is rewritten>
12-9
12.5 Rewrite Function During RUN
12.5.1 Operation of Rewrite During RUN

How operation of rewrite during RUN is performed
Rewriting programs can be executed even in RUN mode. When a rewrite is attempted during RUN, the
tool service time is temporarily extended, program rewriting is performed, and operation is resumed
without the need to change the mode. For this reason, the time of the scan during the RUN rewrite
extends from several ms to several hundreds of ms.
Operation during rewrite

1. External output (Y) is held.
2. External input (X) is ignored.
3. The timer (T) stops the clock.
4. Rise and fall changes in the inputs of differential instructions (DF), counter instructions (CT), and
left/right sift registers are ignored.
5. Interrupt functions are stopped.
6. Internal clock relays (special internal relays) are also stopped.
7. Pulse output is stopped during the rewrite.
Set values for timer/counter instructions

All set values specified with decimal constants (K) in timer and counter instructions are preset in the
corresponding set value areas (SV). Values in the elapsed value area (EV) do not change/
Operation of rewrite during RUN complete flag

The rewrite during RUN complete flag (R9034) is a special internal relay that goes on for only the first
scan following the completion of rewriting in the RUN mode. It can be used instead of the initial pulse
relay following a change in the program.
12-10
12.5.2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is Not Possible
When the timeout error message is indicated:
Even if the timeout error message is indicated, it is highly possible that the program in PLC has been
already rewritten. Carry out the following operations.
1. When ladder symbol mode

As a ladder editing is left, set it to the offline edit mode. Complete the program conversion in the tool
software, and then change to the online edit mode to check.
2. When boolean mode
A ladder editing is cleared.
Set it to the offline edit mode and carry out the editing operation again. After the operation, change to the
online edit mode to check.
When the timeout error occurs using the through mode in GT series programmable display
Extend the timeout time of the programmable display using the GTWIN.
(The default setting is 5 seconds.)
Select "Transfer" from "File" in the menu bar.

The "Transfer data" screen will open.
Select "Condition" to open "Communication
Setting" screen.
Change the value for "Timeout".
Click "OK" button to complete the change of
setting.
12-11
Cases where rewriting is not possible during RUN
1. When the result of rewriting is a syntax error.
<Example>
When executing the rewriting which does not form the following pair of instructions.
1. Step ladder instructions (SSTP/STPE)
2. Subroutine instructions (SUB/RET)
3. Interrupt instructions (INT/IRET)
4. JP/LBL
5. LOOP/LBL
6. MC/MCE
Also, rewriting is not possible during RUN in case of other syntax error.
2. During the forced input/output operation
Interrupt restrictions
When using interrupt, high-speed counter, pulse output or PWM output functions, do not perform a
rewrite during RUN.
If a rewrite during RUN is executed, the operation as below will be performed. Exercise caution.
1. Interrupt programs will be disabled.

Enable by executing an ICTL instruction once again.
<Example> Using R9034 (rewrite during RUN completed flag)
2. The high-speed counter will continue to count.

Target value match on/off instructions (F166/F167) will continue.
Coincidence interrupt programs will be disabled when the F166/F167 instruction is running.
3. The pulse output/PWM output stops when the rewriting is performed. The operation after the
completion of the rewriting during RUN varies depending on each instruction.
Mode Instruction Name Operation after the completion
No. of rewriting during RUN
FP0 F168(SPD1) Pulse output (Trapezoidal control) The operation before rewriting
compatibility continues.
mode F168(SPD1) Pulse output (Home return) The operation before rewriting
continues.
F169(PLS) Pulse output (JOG operation) Stop
F170(PWM) PWM output Stop
FP0R mode F171(SPDH) Pulse output (Trapezoidal control) Stop
F171(SPDH) Pulse output(JOG positioning) Stop
F172(PLSH) Pulse output (JOG operation) Stop
F173(PWMH) PWM output Stop
F174(SP0H) Pulse output (Selectable data table The operation before rewriting
control operation) continues.
F175(SPSH) Pulse output (Linear interpolation) The operation before rewriting
continues.
F177(HOME) Pulse output (Home return) The operation before rewriting
continues.
4. The regular sampling trace will not stop.
12-12
12.5.3 Procedures and Operation of Rewrite During RUN
FPWIN GR FPWIN GR
Item
Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode
Maximum of 128 steps.
Changes are performed by block.
When PG conversion is executed
Rewriting performed by step.
online, the program will be
Caution is required as rewriting
Rewrite procedure rewritten.
takes place simultaneously with the
change.
If an instruction written in block a is

detected in block b, the condition
before the rewrite will be held. Y
If an instruction written in block a is
contact relays which are on will be
OT/KP detected in block b, the condition
held in the on state. To turn them
before the rewrite will be held.
off in the RUN mode, use forced
output. To turn them off in the RUN
mode, use forced output.
If an instruction written in block a is If an instruction written in block a is
detected in block b, the condition detected in block b, the condition
before the rewrite will be held. before the rewrite will be held.
Set values specified by K constants Set values specified by K constants
TM/CT
in TM/CT instructions are preset in in TM/CT instructions are preset in
all of the corresponding SV in the all of the corresponding SV in the
program. (Elapsed values EV do program. (Elapsed values EV do
not change.) not change.)
Operation
Fun If an instruction written in block a is
of each ･If deleted, the output memory area
High-level detected in block b, the condition
instruction will be held.
instructions before the rewrite will be held.
Writing or deleting a single
When writing MC/MEC instructions, instruction during RUN is not
MC/
be sure to write the instructions as a possible.
MCE
pair. Write or delete the instruction in
FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode.
A subroutine is a program
CALL/ appearing between SUBn and RET Write in the order: RET, SUB, CALL
SUB/ instructions. Delete in the order: CALL, SUB,
RET Be sure to write it to an address RET
which follows the ED instruction.
An interrupt program is a program
appearing between INTn and IRET
INT/ Write in the order: IRET, INT
instructions. Be sure to write it to an
IRET Delete in the order: INT, IRET
address which follows the ED
instruction.
12-13
FPWIN GR FPWIN GR
Item
Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode
Writing and deletion of a single
instruction is not possible for a
program with no step ladder area.
A distance with the same number Write or delete both instructions
SSTP/ cannot be defined twice. simultaneously in FPWIN GR ladder
STPE An SSTP instruction cannot be symbol mode.
Operation
written in a subprogram. In the case of an SSTP instruction
of each
only, writing and deletion of a single
instruction
instruction is possible for a program
with a step ladder area.
Write in the order: JP-LBL or
Be sure to write the instruction for
JP/ LOOP-LBL
setting the loop number before LBL-
LOOP/LBL Delete in the order: LBL-JP or LBL-
LOOP instructions.
LOOP
12-14
12.6 Processing During Forced Input and Output
12.6.1 Processing When Forced Input/Output is Initiated During RUN
1. Processing of external input (X)

- Regardless of the state of the input from the input device, forced on/off operation will take precedence
at a contact specified for forced input/output in the above procedure B. At this time, the input LED will
not blink, however, the area of input X in the operation memory will be rewritten.
- As for contacts not specified, the on/off state will be read according to the input status from the input
device.
2. Processing of external output (Y)

- Regardless of the state of the result of operation, forced on/off will take precedence at a contact
specified for forced input/output in the above procedure A. At this time, the area of output Y in the
operation memory will be forcibly rewritten. External output will take place according to the input/output
update timing in the above diagram.
- The on/off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result.
3. Processing of Timer (T) and Counter (C)

- Regardless of the timer/counter input condition, forced on/off operation will take precedence at a
contact specified for forced input/output. At this time, the contact of the timer (T) or counter (C) in the
operation memory will be rewritten. Timing and counting will not take place during control.
- The on/off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result.
Operation during operation

For small-sized PLCs FP0, FP0R, FPΣ and FP-X
The internal relay R or output Y specified by OT or KP instruction is rewritten according to the results of
operation. However, as the R or Y is set/reset again right before the peripheral service (as the above
procedure C), the monitoring value with the tooling software or the output to external devices is forcibly
rewritten to a specified value.
For medium-sized PLCs FP2, FP2SH

For the internal relay R and output Y specified by OT or KP instruction, the value of the forced
processing has a priority. When rewritten by a high-level instruction, the result of the instruction has a
priority.
12-15
12-16
Chapter 13
Specifications
13.1 Table of Specifications
13.1.1 General Specifications

Item Description
Rated operating voltage 24 V DC
Operating voltage range 20.4 to 28.8 V DC
Allowable momentary C10, C14, C16: 5 ms(at 20.4 V), 10 ms(at 21.6 V)
power off time C32, T32, F32 : 10 ms(at 20.4 V)
Fuse Built-in (Not replaceable)
Ambient temperature 0 to +55 °C
Storage temperature -40 to +70 °C (T32 only: -20 to +70 °C)
Ambient humidity 10 to 95 % RH (at 25 °C, No condensation)
Storage humidity 10 to 95 % RH (at 25 °C, No condensation)
Tr output type Ry output type
Between “input terminals” and “output 500 V AC 1500 V AC
terminals” for 1 minute for 1 minute
Between “output terminals” and “output 1500 V AC
-
terminals” (Between different commons) for 1 minute
Breakdown voltage
Between “input terminals” and “power/ground 500 V AC 500 V AC
(Detection current: 5 mA)
terminals” for 1 minute for 1 minute
Between “output terminals” and 500 V AC 1500 V AC
“power/ground terminals” for 1 minute for 1 minute
Between “ground terminal” and “power 500 V AC 500 V AC
terminal” for 1 minute for 1 minute
Tr output type Ry output type
Between “input terminals” and “output
Over 100 MΩ Over 100 MΩ
terminals”
Between “output terminals” and “output
- Over 100 MΩ
terminals” (Between different commons)
Insulation resistance
Between “input terminals” and “power/ground
(Test voltage: 500 V DC) Over 100 MΩ Over 100 MΩ
terminals”
Between “output terminals” and
“power/ground terminals”
Between “ground terminals” and “power
terminal”
5 to 9 Hz, Single amplitude of 3.5 mm, 1 sweep/min.,
2
Vibration resistance 9 to 150 Hz, Constant acceleration of 9.3 m/s , 1 sweep/min.,
10 min. on 3 axes (Towards X,Y & Z directions)
Shock resistance 147 m/s2, 4 times on 3 axes (Towards X,Y & Z directions)
1000 V[P-P] with pulse width 50 ns, 1μs (using a noise simulator)
Noise immunity
(Power supply terminal)
Operating condition Must be free from corrosive gases and excessive dust
Overvoltage category Category II
Pollution level Pollution level 2
Weight C10: 100 g, C14: 105 g, C16: 85 g, C32: 115 g, T32: 115 g, F32: 120 g
13-2
Unit’s current consumption table
Control unit Expansion Input circuit Output circuit
current unit current current current
consumption consumption consumption consumption
This is the current This is the This is the This is the current
consumed from current current consumed by the
the control unit consumed from consumed by the output circuits of
power supply the expansion input circuits of the various units.
connector. If unit power the various units. This value
expansion units or supply This value indicates the
intelligent units are connector. If a indicates the current used to
added, the current unit is not listed current that flows drive the output
is increased by the below, it means into the input circuits. This value
value indicated that it has no circuit. does not include
below. power supply the load current
connector value.
FP0R-C10 100 mA or less − 15.9 mA or less −
FP0R-C14 120 mA or less − 21.1 mA or less −
FP0R FP0R-C16 70 mA or less − 21.1 mA or less 20 mA or less
control unit FP0R-C32
FP0R-T32 90 mA or less − 42.2 mA or less 40 mA or less
FP0R-F32
FP0-E8X 10 mA or less 37.6 mA or less −
FP0-E8R 10 mA or less 50 mA or less 18.8 mA or less −
FP0-E8YR 10 mA or less 100 mA or less − −
FP0/FP0R FP0-E8YT/P 15 mA or less − − 26 mA or less
expansion FP0-E16X 10 mA or less − 75.2 mA or less −
unit FP0-E16R 20 mA or less 100 mA or less 37.6 mA or less −
FP0-E16T/P 20 mA or less − 37.6 ma or less 26 mA or less
FP0-E16YT/P 25 mA or less − − 52 mA or less
FP0-E32T/P 35 mA or less − 75.2 mA or less 52 mA or less
FP0-A21 20 mA or less 100 mA or less − −
FP0-A80 20 mA or less 60 mA or less − −
FP0-A04V 20 mA or less 100 mA or less − −
FP0 FP0-A04I 20 mA or less 130 mA or less − −
intelligent FP0-TC4
unit FP0-TC8 25 mA or less − − −
FP0-RTD6
FP0-IOL 30 mA or less 40 mA or less − −
FP0-CCLS 40 mA or less 40 mA or less − −
Programmable display
80 mA or less − − −
(5 VDC, RS232C type)
C-NET
AFP15402 50 mA or less − − −
adapter S2
13-3
13.1.2 Control Specifications
Item C10, C14 C16 C32 T32 F32
Programming method Relay symbol
Control method Cyclic operation
Program Built-in memory Flash ROM
memory Memory capacity 16000 steps 32000 steps
Rewriting during Available (Simultaneous rewriting capacity: 512 steps)
RUN
Download during Available (All programs)
RUN
Security function Password function (4-digit, 8-digit), Read protection setting
Comment Memory capacity 328 kbytes (All comments including I/O comments, annotations,
memory interlinear comments)
Download during Available (All comments)
RUN
Without expansion units: 0.2 ms or less
I/O update time & base time With expansion units: 0.2 ms or less + (1×the number of expansion
unit) ms
Basic instruction: from 0.08 μs, Timer instruction: 2.2 μs,
Up to 3k steps
Operation High-level instruction: from 0.32μs (MV instruction)
speed Basic instruction: from 0.58 μs, Timer instruction: 3.66 μs,
After 3k steps
High-level instruction: from 1.62μs (MV instruction)
Basic instruction Approx. 110 types
High-level instruction Approx. 210 types
External input (X) 1760 points
External output (Y) 1760 points
Internal Relay (R) 4096 points
Special Internal Relay(R) 224 points
Link Relay (L) 2048 points
1024 points (Factory default: Timer 1008 points: T0 to T1007,
Timer/Counter (T/C)
Counter 16 points: C1008 to C1023)
Data register(DT) 12315 words 32765 words
Special data register(DT) 440 words (DT90000 to DT90443)
Link data register (LD) 256 words
Index register (I0 to ID) 14 words
Master control relay(MCR) 256 points
Number of labels (JMP, LOOP) 256 labels
Differential points Number of points that is within the program capacity
Number of step ladder 1000 stages
Number of subroutines 500 subroutines
Available Sampling by commands/Sampling at regular time
intervals
Sampling trace For one sampling: 16 bits + 3 words
C10/C14/C16=300 samples
C32/T32/F32=1000 samples
High speed counter (HSC) At single phase 6 points (Max. 50 kHz) or second phase 3 points
*1
(Max. 15 kHz)
*1 *2
Pulse output - 4 points (Max. 50 kHz)
PWM output - 4 points (Max. 4.8 kHz) *1 *2
Pulse catch input 8 points in total (including HSC and interrupt input)
Interrupt program Input: 8 programs (C10 only. Input: 6 programs)
Periodical: 1 program
Pulse match: 4 programs
Periodical interrupt 0.5 ms unit: 0.5 ms to 1.5 s/10 ms unit: 10 ms to 30 s
Constant scan 0.5 ms unit: 0.5 ms to 600 ms
13-4
Item C10, C14 C16 C32 T32 F32
Backup by F12, *4
All areas
Flash P13Instruction
ROM Counter: 16 points
Backup*3 Auto backup when
*4 Internal relay: 128 points -
power is OFF
Data register : 315 words
All areas *5
(Built-in *5
RAM backup - All areas
backup
battery) *6
*7
Clock/Calendar - Available-
Communication port Tool port/USB port/COM port
Self-diagnosis functions Watchdog timer (Approx. 690 ms), program syntax checking
*1) The specification is when rated input voltage is at 24 V DC and temperature at 25 °C.
Frequency may decrease depending on voltage, temperature or operating condition.
*2) No. of channels: A total of 4 channels is available for pulse output and PWM output.
Frequency: Pulse output can be specified up to 50 kHz. PWM output can be specified up to 4.8 kHz.
An error on the pulse width that is a maximum of 40µs may occur for the setting value depending on
voltage, temperature or operating condition.
*3) Guaranteed number of writing is up to 10000 times.
*4) Auto backup area when power is off
Type C10, C14, C16 C32, T32
C1008 to 1023 (C: Contact, EV: C1008 to 1023 (C: Contact, EV:
Backup Elapsed value) Elapsed value)
area R2480 to 255F R2480 to 255F
DT12000 to 12314 DT32450 to 32764
*5) All the areas of timer/counter, internal relays, link relays, link registers and data registers can be held.
Non-hold areas and hold areas can be specified by the setting of system register.
*6) Notes about built-in backup battery (T32 only)
Secondary battery is used for this product.
It has not been charged when it is shipped from the factory. Energize and charge it before you use it.
The secondary battery does not have a function to notify the battery voltage reduction. However, if
the battery is out of charge and the hold area becomes indefinite, the values in the hold areas will be
cleared to 0 when the power is turned on next time.
(We recommend to add a program for clearing the data to 0 when the values in hold areas become
indefinite.)
- Relation between charging time and backup time
- Backup time
When ambient temperature is 70 °C: 14 days
When ambient temperature is -20 °C: 25 days
- Predicted backup life
When ambient temperature is 34 °C or lower: 10 years
(The temperature when the power is off has little influence on the battery life.)
*7) Precision of Clock/Calendar (T32 only):
When ambient temperature is 0 °C: Less than 104 seconds per month
13-5
13.1.3 Communication Specifications
Tool port
Description
Interface RS232C
Baud rate 2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 bit/s
Communication method Half-duplex operation
Synchronous method Asynchronous communication method
Data length 7 bits / 8 bits
Transmission format Start code: STX / No STX
End code: CR / CR+LF / None / ETX
Stop bit: 1 bit / 2 bits
Order of data transmission Transmits from bit 0 character by character.
Communication function Computer link (Slave)
General-purpose communication (In the RUN mode only)
USB port
Description
Standard (Baud rate) USB2.0 Fullspeed
Communication mode Computer link (Slave)

Description
Interface RS232C
Baud rate 2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 bit/s
Order of data transmission Transmits from bit 0 character by character.
Computer link (Master/Slave)
General-purpose communication
Communication function
MODBUS RTU (Master/Slave)
PC(PLC) link (A maximum of 16 units can be connected by converting
to RS485.)
Factory default
Baud rate Data length Parity Stop bit
COM port (RS232C port) 9600 bit/s 8 bits Odd 1 bit
13-6
COM port (RS485 port)
Item Description
Interface RS485
Communication mode 1:N communication
Note1) 2)
Transmission distance Max. 1200 m
Baud rate 19200, 115200 bps Note2) 3))
Communication method Two-wire, half-duplex transmission
Transmission line Shielded twisted-pair cable or VCTF
Computer link ASCII
Transmission General-purpose serial
ASCII, Binary
code communication
MODBUS RTU Binary
Data length 7 bits/8bits
Communication Parity 7 bits/8bits
format (to be set
Stop bit None/Even/Odd
by system
register)
Note4) Start code STX/No STX
End code CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
No. of connected units Note2) 5) Transmits from bit 0 character by character.
Computer link (Master/Slave)
Communication function General-purpose communication
MODBUS RTU (Master/Slave)
PC(PLC) link
Note1) When connecting a commercially available device that has an RS485 interface, please confirm
operation using the actual device. In some cases, the number of units, transmission distance, and baud
rate vary depending on the connected device.
Note2) The values for the transmission distance, baud rate and number of units should be within the
values noted in the graph below.
Note3) The settings of the baud rate switches on the side of the unit and the system register No. 415
should be the same. Only 19200 bps can be specified when the C-NET adapter is connected with the
RS485 interface.
Note4)) The start code and end code can be used only in the general-purpose serial communication
mode.
Note5) Unit numbers should be registered by the system register.
Factory default
Port type Baud rate Data length Parity Stop bit
COM port (RS485 port) 115200 bit/s 8 bits Odd 1 bit
Note:
If the potential difference between the power supplies of RS485 devices exceeds 4 V, the unit may not
communicate as it is the non-isolated type. The large potential difference leads to the damage to the
devices.
13-7
13.2 I/O Number Allocation
13.2.1 I/O Numbers for FP0R Control Unit

The I/O allocation for the FP0R control unit is fixed.
Unit type Allocation points I/O No.
Input: 6 points X0 to X5
C10
Output: 4 points Y0 to Y3
C14
C16
Input: 16 points X0 to XF
C32/T32/F32
Output: 16 points Y0 to YF
13-8
13.2.2 I/O Numbers for FP0 Expansion Unit
• I/O numbers do not need to be set as I/O allocation is performed automatically by the PLC when an
expansion I/O unit is added.
• The I/O allocation for expansion units is determined by the installation location.
Expansion Expansion Expansion
Unit type Allocation points
unit 1 unit 2 unit 3
E8X Input: 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67
Input: 4 points X20 to X23 X40 to X43 X60 to X63
E8R
Output: 4 points Y20 to Y23 Y40 to Y43 Y60 to Y63
E8YT/P
Output: 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67
E8YR
FP0/FP0R
E16X Input: 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F
expansion unit
E16R Input: 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67
E16T/P Output: 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67
E16YT/P Output: 16 points Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F
Input: 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F
E32T/P
Output: 16 points Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F
Input: 16 points WX2 WX4 WX6
(ch0) (X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)
FP0 analog I/O Input: 16 points WX3 WX5 WX7
FP0-A21
unit (ch1) (X30 to X3F) (X50 to X5F) (X70 to X7F)
WY2 WY4 WY6
Output: 16 points
FP0 A/D Input: 16 points WX2 WX4 WX6
converter unit FP0-A80 (ch0, 2, 4, 6) (X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)
FP0 FP0-TC4
thermocouple FP0-TC8 Input: 16 points WX3 WX5 WX7
unit (ch1, 3, 5, 7) (X30 to X3F) (X50 to X5F) (X70 to X7F)
FP0 Input (16 points) WX3 WX5 WX7
FP0-RTD
RTD unit CH1, 3, 5 (X30 to X3F) (X50 to X5F) (X70 to X7F)
WY2 WY4 WY6
Output (16 points)
WX2 WX4 WX6
Input: 16 points
(X20 to X2F) (X40 to X4F) (X60 to X6F)
FP0 D/A FP0-A04V Output: 16 points WY2 WY4 WY6
converter unit FP0-A04I (ch0, 2) (Y20 to Y2F) (Y40 to Y4F) (Y60 to Y6F)
Output: 16 points WY3 WY5 WY7
(ch1, 3) (Y30 to Y3F) (Y50 to Y5F) (Y70 to Y7F)
FP0 I/O link Input: 32 points X20 to X3F X40 to X5F X60 to X7F
FP0-IOL
unit Output: 32 points Y20 to Y3F Y40 to Y5F Y60 to Y7F
• The data of each channel for FP0 A/D converter unit (FP0-A80), FP0 thermocouple unit (FP0-
TC4/FP0-TC8), FP0 D/A converter unit (FP0-A04V/P0-A04I) is switched and read/write using a
program that includes the flag for switching converted data.
• Regarding FP0 CC-Link slave unit, please refer to the exclusive manual.
13-9
13.3 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants
Number of points and range of
Item memory area available for use Function
C10, C14, C16 C32, T32, F32
External input Note1) (X) 1760 points (X0 to X109F) Turns on or off based on external input.
External output Note1) (Y) 1760 points (Y0 to Y109F) Externally outputs on or off state
Internal relay Note2) (R) 4096 points (R0 to R255F) Relay which turns on or off only within program.
Link relay Note2) (L) 2048 points (L0 to L127F) This relay is a shared relay used for PLC link.
This goes on when the timer reaches the
Relay
Timer Note2) (T) specified time. It corresponds to the timer

1024 points (T0 to T1007/C1008 to
number.
C1023) Note3)
This goes on when the counter increments. It
Counter Note2) (C)
corresponds to the counter number.
Relay which turns on or off based on specific
Special internal relay (R) 224 points (from R9000)
conditions and is used as a flag.
Note1) Code for specifying 16 external input points as
External input (WX) 110 words (WX0 to WX109)
one word (16 bits) of data.
Note1)
External output Code for specifying 16 external output points as
110 words (WY0 to WY109)
(WY) one word (16 bits) of data.
Note2) Code for specifying 16 internal relay points as
Internal relay (WR) 256 words (WR0 to WR255)
one word (16 bits) of data.
Code for specifying 16 link relay points as one
Link relay (WL) 128 words (WL0 to WL127)
word (16 bits) of data.
12315 words 32765 words
Note2) Data memory used in program. Data is handled
Data register (DT) (DT0 to (DT0 to
Memory area
in 16-bit units (one word).

DT12314) DT32764)
This is a shared data memory which is used
Link register Note2) (LD) 256 words (LD0 to LD255) within the PLC link. Data is handled in 16-bit
units (one word).
Data memory for storing a target value of a timer
Timer/Counter set value
1024 words (SV0 to SV1023) and setting value of a counter. Stores by
area Note2) (SV)
timer/counter number
Data memory for storing the elapsed value
Timer/Counter elapsed
1024 words (EV0 to EV1023) during operation of a timer/counter. Stores by
value area Note2) (EV)
timer/counter number.
Special data register 440 words Data memory for storing specific data. Various
(DT) (DT90000 to DT90439) settings and error codes are stored.
Register can be used as an address of memory
Index register (I) 14 words (I0 to ID)
area and constants modifier.
Master control relay
256 points
points (MCR)
Instruction point
Number of labels
256 points
(JP and LOOP)
Control
Number of step ladders 1000 stages

Number of subroutines 500 subroutines
C10: 11 programs (6 external input points, 1 periodical interrupt point, 4-pulse match
Number of interrupt points)
programs Other than C10: 13 programs (8 external input points, 1 periodical interrupt point, 4-
pulse match points)
Decimal constants K-32, 768 to K32, 767 (for 16-bit operation)
(Integer type) (K) K-2, 147, 483, 648 to K2, 147, 483, 647 (for 32-bit operation)
Constant
Hexadecimal constants H0 to HFFFF (for 16-bit operation)

(H) H0 to HFFFFFFFF (for 32-bit operation)
F-1.175494 x 10-38 to F-3.402823 x 1038
Floating point type (F)
F 1.175494 x 10-38 to F 3.402823 x 1038
Note1) The number of points noted above is the number reserved as the calculation memory. The actual number of
points available for use is determined by the hardware configuration.
Note2) There are two types, one is the hold type that the last state is stored even if the power supply turns off or the
mode is changed to PROG. mode from RUN mode, and the other is the non-hold type that the state is reset.
For C10/C14/C16/C32: The hold type areas and non-hold type areas are fixed. For information on the
sections of each area, refer to the performance specifications.
For T32/F32: The settings of the hold type areas and non-hold type areas can be changed using the system
registers.
On T32, if the battery has run out, the data in the hold area may be indefinite (Not cleared to 0)
Note3) The points for the timer and counter can be changed by the setting of system register 5. The number given in
the table are the numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting.
13-10
13.4 Power Supply Unit and I/O Link Unit Specifications
13.4.1 Power Supply Unit Specifications (AFP0634)

Item Description
Input Rated operating voltage 100-240 V AC
Operating voltage range 85-264 V AC
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
Operating frequency 47 to 63 Hz
The number of phase Single phase
Inrush current 30 A(0-p) or less (Cold start)
Leakage current 0.75 mA or less
Holding time 10 ms or more
Output Rated voltage 24 V DC
Voltage accuracy ±5%
Rated current 0.7 A
Operating output current 0 to 0.7 A
Output ripple 500 mV or less
Over current regulation 0.735 A or more
Over voltage regulation Possible
Life time 20000h ( at 55 °C)
13.4.2 I/O Link Unit Specifications (AFP0732)

Item Description
Communication method Two-wire half-duplex communication
Duplex cable (twisted-pair cable or
Transmission line
VCTF 0.75 mm2 x 2C <JIS> or equivalent)
Max. 700 m (when using twisted-pair cable)
Transmission distance (Total length)
Max. 400 m (when using VCTF cable)
Baud rate 0.5Mbps
No. of I/O points per one I/O link unit 64 points (Input: 32 points + Output: 32 points) Note)
Remote I/O map allocation 32X/32Y
Interface RS485-compliant
Transmission error check CRC method
Note) Those numbers of points are the numbers that can be used for I/O link via a host computer and
the network MEWNET-F. When setting the output of the I/O link error flag to ON (available), it is 63
points (31 input points & 32 input points).
13-11
13-12
Chapter 14
Dimensions and Others
14.1 Dimensions
14.1.1 C10/C14 Control Unit (Terminal Block)
(Unit: mm)
Note) As for the expansion unit, refer to the dimensions only.
Target expansion units: E8RS, E16RS
14-2
14.1.2 C10/C14 Control Unit (Molex Connector)
(Unit: mm)
Target expansion units: E8RM,E16RM
14-3
14.1.3 C16 Control Unit (MIL Connector)
(Unit: mm)
Target expansion units: E16X, E16YT, E16YP, E16T, E16P, E8X, E8YT, E8YP
14-4
14.1.4 C32/T32/F32 Control Unit (MIL Connector)
(Unit: mm)
Target FP0 expansion units: E32T, E32P
14-5
14.1.5 Power Supply Unit
(Unit: mm)
14.1.6 I/O Link Unit
(Unit: mm)
14.1.7 When Using DIN Rail
(Unit: mm)
14-6
14.2 Cable/Adapter Specifications
14.2.1 AFC8503/AFC8503S (PC connection cable)
(Unit: mm)
14.2.2 AFC85305/AFC8531/AFC8532 (For extending for the tool port)
(Unit: mm)
14-7
14-8
Chapter 15
Appendix
15.1 System Registers / Special Internal Relays / Special
Data Registers
Precaution for System Registers
What is the system register area

• System registers are used to set values (parameters) which determine operation ranges and functions
used. Set values based on the use and specifications of your program.
• There is no need to set system registers for functions which will not be used.
Type of system registers

The registers to be used depend on each PLC.
1. Allocation of timers and counters (System registers 5)

The number of timers and counters is set by specifying the starting counter number.
2. Hold/non-hold type setting (System registers 6 to 13)

When these registers are set to "hold type", the values in the relays and data memory will be retained
even if the system is switched to PROG. mode or the power is turned off. If set to "non-hold type" the
values will be cleared to "0".
3. Operation mode setting on error (System registers 20, 23 and 26)

Set the operation mode when errors such as battery error, duplicated use of output, I/O verification error
and operation error occur.
4. Time settings (System registers 31 to 34)

Set time-out error detection time and the constant scan time.
5. MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link settings (System registers 40 to 47, 50 to 55, and 57)
These settings are for using link relays and link registers for MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link communication.
Note) The default value setting is "no PC(PLC) link communication".
6. Input settings (System registers 400 to 405)

When using the high-speed counter function, pulse catch function or interrupt function, set the operation
mode and the input number to be used for the function.
7. Tool and COM ports communication settings (System registers 410 to 421)
Set these registers when the Tool port and COM ports are to be used for computer link, general-purpose
serial communication, PC(PLC) link, and modem communication.
8. Input time constant settings (System registers 430 to 433)

Changing the input signal width to be loaded enables to prevent the malfunctions caused by chattering
or noises.
15-2
Checking and changing the set value of system register
If you are going to use a value which is already set(the value which appears when read),
there is no need write it again.
Using programming tool software

Produce:
1. Set the control unit in the PROG mode.
2.Option ->PLC Configuration
3.When the function for which setting are to be entered is selected in the PLC Configuration
dialog box, the value and setting status for the selected system register are displayed.
To change the value and setting status, write in the new value and /or select the setting status.
4.To register these settings, choose OK
Precautions for system register setting

-System register settings are effective from the time they are set.
However, the system registers after No. 400 become effective when the mode is changed from PROG.
mode to RUN. With regard to the modem connection setting, when the power is turned off and on or
when the mode is changed from PROG. to RUN, the controller sends a command to the modem which
enables it for reception.
-When the initialized operation is performed, all set system register values (parameters) will be initialized
15-3
15.1.1 Table of System Registers for FP0R
Default
No. Name Descriptions
value
Starting number setting for
5 1008 0 to 1024
counter
Hold type area starting number
6 setting for timer and counter 1008 0 to 1024
(T32/F32)
7 setting for internal relays 248 0 to 256
(T32/F32)
Hold/
Non-
8 setting for data registers 0 0 to 32765
hold 1
(T32/F32)
Hold or non-hold setting for step
14 ladder process Non-hold Hold/Non-hold
(T32/F32)
Previous value is held for a
leading edge detection Hold/
4 Hold
instruction (DF instrucion) with Non-hold
MC Note)
Hold type area starting word
10 number for PC(PLC) link relays 0 0 to 64
(for PC(PLC) link 0) (T32/F32)
Hold type area starting word
11 number for PC(PLC) link relays 64 64 to 128
Hold/
Non-
hold 2
12 for PC(PLC) link registers 0 0 to 128
13 for PC(PLC) link registers 128 128 to 256
Disable or enable setting for
20 Disabled Disabled/Enabled
duplicated output
Action
Operation setting when an I/O
on 23 Stop Stop/Continuation of operation
verification error occurs
error
Operation setting when an
26 Stop Stop/Continuation of operation
operation error occurs
Wait time setting for multi-frame 6500.0
31 10 to 81900 ms
communication ms
Communication timeout setting
Time 10000.0
32 for SEND/RECV, RMRD/RMWT 10 to 81900 ms
set- ms
commands
ting
0: Normal scan
Constant value settings for scan Normal
34 0 to 600 ms: Scans once each
time scan
specified time interval
15-4
FP0R
Default
value
Range of link relays used for
40 0 0 to 64 words
PC(PLC) link
Range of link data registers
41 0 0 to 128 words
used for PC(PLC) link
Starting word number for link
PC 42 0 0 to 63
relay transmission
(PLC) 43 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
link 0
Starting number for link data
set- 44 0 0 to 127
register tranmission
ting
Link data register transmission
45 0 0 to 127 words
size
46 PC(PLC) link switch flag Normal Normal/reverse
Maximum unit number setting
47 16 1 to 16
for MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link
Range of link relays used for
50 0 0 to 64 words
PC(PLC) link
Range of link data registers
51 0 0 to 128 words
used for PC(PLC) link
PC Starting word number for link
52 64 64 to 127
(PLC) relay transmission
link 1 53 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
set- Starting number for link data
54 128 128 to 255
ting) register tranmission
Link data register transmission
55 0 0 to 127 words
size
Maximum unit number setting
57 16 1 to 16
for MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link
15-5
FP0R
No. Name Default value Descriptions
Do not set input X0 as high-speed counter.
Two-phase input (X0, X1)
Two-phase input (X0, X1), Reset input (X2)
Incremental input (X0)
CH0: Incremental input (X0), Reset input (X2)
Do not set input Decremental input (X0)
High-speed CH0
X0 as high-speed Decremental input (X0), Reset input (X2)
counter
counter Individual input (X0, X1)
operation
400 Individual input (X0, X1), Reset input (X2)
mode
Incremental/decremental control input (X0, X1)
settings (X0
Incremental/decremental control input (X0, X1),
to X2)
Reset input (X2)
Controller input settings 1

CH1:
High-speed counter

Do not set input
CH1 Incremental inptu (X1), Reset input (X2)
X1 as high-speed
Decremental input (X1)
counter
Decremental input (X1), Reset input (X2)
Two-phase input (X3, X4)
Two-phase input (X3, X4), Reset input (X5)
CH2: Incremental input (X3), Reset input (X5)
High-speed CH2
X3 as high-speed Decremental input (X5), Reset input (X5)
counter
operation
400 Individual input (X3, X4), Reset input (X5)
mode
Incremental/decremental control (X3, X4)
settings (X3
Incremental/decremental control (X3, X4),
to X5)
Reset input (X5)
Does not set input X4 as high-speed counter.
CH3:
Does not set
CH3 Incremental input (X4), Reset input (X5)
input X4 as high-
speed counter
Decremental input (X4), Reset input (X5)
High-speed counter
CH4: Incremental input (X6)

Controller input

High-speed CH4
settings 2
X6 as high-speed Two-phase input (X6, X7)

counter/
401 pulse output
Incremental/decremental control input (X6, X7)
settings
CH5:
(X6 to X7)
Do not set input
CH5 Incremental input (X7)
X7 as high-speed
counter
Note1) If the operation mode is set to Two-phase, incremental/decremental, or incremental/decremental
control, the setting for CH1 or CH3 is invalid in system register 400 and the setting for CH5 is
invalid in system register 401.
Note2) If reset input settings overlap, the CH1 setting takes precedence in system register 400 and the
CH3 setting takes precedence in system register 401.
Note3) If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay, the follwing
precedence order is effective: [High-speed counter]→[Pulse catch]→[Interrupt input].
<Example>
When the high-speed counter is being used in the addition input mode, even if input X0 is
specified as an interrupt input or as pulse catch input, those settings are invalid, and X0
functions as counter input for the high-speed counter.
15-6
FP0R
Default
value
Normal output (Y0, Y1)
CH0: Pulse output (Y0, Y1)
Pulse output (Y0, Y1)/Home input X4
Normal
Controller output settings 2 (PLS/PWM)
output Pulse output (Y0, Y1)/Home input X4/Position

control starting input X0
PWM output (Y0), Normal output (Y1)
Transistor type C16 or over

CH1: Pulse output (Y2, Y3)
Normal Pulse output (Y2, Y3)/Home input X5
output Pulse output (Y3, Y4)/Home input X5/Position
Pulse/ control starting input X1
PWM output PWM output (Y2), Normal output (Y3)
402 Normal output (Y4, Y5)
settings
Pulse output (Y4, Y5)
(Y0 to Y7) CH2: Pulse output (Y4, Y5)/Home input X6
Normal
Pulse output (Y4, Y5)/Home input X6/Position
output control starting input X2
Pulse output (Y6, Y7)
CH3: Pulse output (Y6, Y7)/Home input X7
Normal
Pulse output (Y6, Y7)/Home input X7/Position
output control starting input X3
Inter- Pulse catch

403 Not set
rupt/ input settings
The pressed contact is set for the pulse catch.
Pulse
catch Interrupt input
settings 404 Not set
settings
The pressed contact is set for the interrupt input.
Inter-
Interrupt edge
rupt Leading
405 setting for
edge edge
settings controller input
The pressed contact is up and set to trailing edge.
Note1) When using the pulse output/PWM output, the controller output settings must be specified.
The output that has been set to the pulse output/PWM output cannot be used as the normal
output.
Note2) X4 to X7 can be used as the home input of the pulse output CH0 to CH3.
When using the home return function of the pulse output, always set the home input. In that
case, X4 to X7 cannot be set as the high-speed counter.
Note3) C16 type:
- For performing the home return for the pulse output CH0 with deviation counter clear, the
above Y6 should be set to the normal output to use Y6 for the deviation counter clear signal.
- For performing the home return for the pulse output CH1 with deviation counter clear, the
above Y7 should be set to the normal output to use Y7 for the deviation counter clear signal.
- The home return cannot be performed for the pulse output CH2 with deviation counter clear.
Note4) C32/T32/F32 type:
When performing theo home return with deviation counter clear, the deviation counter clear
signals corresponding to each CH are used fixedly as follows; CH0=Y8, CH1=Y9, CH2=YA,
CH3=YB
For performing the home return for each type,
it is necessary to specify the home input corresponding to each channel to be used for the home
return in the system register 401.
Home input corresponding to each channel: CH0=4, CH1=X5, CH2=X6, CH3=X7
For performing the JOG positioning for each type,
it is necessary to specify the position control starting input signal corresponding to each channel
to be used for the JOG positioning.
Note3) The settings for pulse catch and interrupt input can only be specified in system registers 403 to
405.
15-7
FP0R
Default
value
410 Unit No. setting 1 1 to 99
Communication Computer link
Computer link Note2)
mode setting General-purpose communications
412
Selection of modem
connection Disabled Enabled/Disabled
Enter the settings for the various items.
- Data lenght bit: 7 bits/8 bits
- Parity check: none/with odd/with even
Data lenght
- Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits
bit: 8 bits
413 Communication Parity check: - The following setting is valid only when
format setting “with odd” the communication mode specified by
Stop bit: 1 bit system register 412 has been set to
Tool “General-purpose serial communication”.
port
- Terminator CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
set-
- Header: STX not exist/STX exist
ting
Communication 2400 bps / 4800 bps / 9600 bps /
415 speed (Baud rate) 9600 bps 19200 bps / 38400 bps / 57600 bps /
setting 115200 bps
Starting address for
received buffer of
420 4096 0 to 32764
general (serial data)
communication mode
Buffer capacity
setting for data
421 received of general 2048 0 to 2048
(serial data)
communication mode
410 Unit No. setting 1 1 to 99
Computer link
Communication General-purpose serial communication
Computer link
mode setting PC(PLC) link
412 MODBUS RTU
Selection of modem
Disabled Enabled/Disabled
connection
Enter the settings for the various items.
- Data lenght bit: 7 bits/8 bits
- Parity check: none/with odd/with even
Data lenght
- Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits
bit: 8 bits
Communication - The following setting is valid only when
413 Parity check:
format setting the communication mode specified by
COM Odd
Stop bit: 1 bit system register 412 has been set to
port
“General-purpose serial communication”.
set-
- Terminator CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
ting
- Header: STX not exist/STX exist
Communication 2400 bps / 4800 bps / 9600 bps /
415 speed (Baud rate) 9600 bps 19200 bps / 38400 bps / 57600 bps /
setting 115200 bps
Starting address for
416 received buffer of 0 0 to 32764
general (serial data)
communication mode
Buffer capacity
setting for data
417 received of general 2048 0 to 2048
(serial data)
communication mode
Note1) The communication format in a PLC link is fixed at the following settings:
Data length is 8 bits, odd parity, stop bit is 1.
The communication speed (baud rate) is fixed at 115200 bps.
Note2) The general-purpose communication with the tool port is available only in RUN mode. In PROG
mode, the computer link mode must be used regardless of settings.
15-8
FP0R
Add- Default
Item Name Description
ress value
Controller input time
430 constant setting 1
X0 to X3 None
Cont- Controller input time 0.1 ms
roller 431 constant setting 1 0.5 ms
input X4 to X7 1 ms
time Controller input time 2 ms
1 ms
cons- constant setting 2 4 ms
432
tant X8 to XB 8 ms
set- (C32/T32/F32) 16 ms
tings Controller input time 32 ms
constant setting 2 64 ms
433
XC to XF
(C32/T32/F32)
Note) X6 and X7 is invalid for C10.
15-9
15.1.2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP0R
The special internal relays turn on and off under special conditions. The on and off states are not output
externally. Writing is not possible with a programming tool or an instruction.
WR900 FP0R
Relay No. Name Description
Self-diagnostic Turns on when a self-diagnostic error occurs.
R9000
error flag ⇒ The content of self-diagnostic error is stored in DT90000.
R9001 Not used
R9002 Not used
R9003 Not used
I/O verification
R9004 Turns on when an I/O verification error occurs.
error flag
R9005 Not used
R9006 Not used
Turns on and keeps the on state shen an operation error occurs.
Operation error
R9007 ⇒The address where the error occurred is stored in DT90017.
flag (hold)
(indicates the first operation error which occurred).
Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs.
Operation error
R9008 ⇒The address where the operation error occurred is stored in
flag (non-hold)
DT90018. The contents change each time a new error occurs.
This is set if an overflow or underflow occurs in the calculation
R9009 Carry flag
results, and as a result of a shift system instruction being executed.
Turns on for an instant when the compared results become larger
R900A > Flag
in the comparison instructions (F60 to F63).
Turns on for an instant,
- when the compared results are equal in the comparison
R900B = Flag instructions (F60 to F63).
- when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic
instructions.
Turns on for an instant when the compared results become smaller
R900C < Flag
in the comparison instructions (F60 to F63).
Turns on when the set time elapses (set value reaches 0) in the
Auxiliary timer timing operation of the F137(STMR)/F183(DSTM) auxiliary timer
R900D
instruction flag instruction. The flag turns off when the trigger for auxiliary timer
instruction turns off.
Tool port
R900E communication Turns on when communication error at tool port is occurred.
error
Turns on when scan time exceeds the time specified in system
Constant scan
R900F register 34 during constant scan execution.
error flag
This goes on if 0 has been set using system register 34.
A: Available, N/A: Not available
15-10
WR901 FP0R
R9010 Always on relay Always on.
R9011 Always off relay Always off.
R9012 Scan pulse relay Turns on and off alternately at each scan.
Initial (on type) Goes on for only the first scan after operation (RUN) has been
R9013
pulse relay started, and goes off for the second and subsequent scans.
Initial (off type) Goes off for only the first scan after operation (RUN) has been
R9014
pulse relay started, and goes on for the second and subsequent scans.
Step ladder initial
Turns on for only the first scan of a process after the boot at the
R9015 pulse relay (on
step ladder control.
type)
R9016 Not used
R9017 Not used
0.01 s clock Repeats on/off operations in
R9018
pulse relay 0.01 sec. cycles.
0.02 s clock Repeats on/off operations in

R9019
pulse relay 0.02 s. cycles.
0.1 s clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 0.1

R901A
relay s. cycles.
0.2 s clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 0.2

R901B
relay s. cycles.
1 s clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 1 s.

R901C
relay cycles.
2 s clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 2 s.

R901D
relay cycles.
1 min clock pulse Repeats on/off operations in 1

R901E
relay min. cycles.
R901F Not used
15-11
WR902 FP0R
Turns off while the mode selector is set to PROG.
R9020 RUN mode flag
Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN.
R9021 Not used
R9022 Not used
R9023 Not used
R9024 Not used
R9025 Not used
R9026 Message flag Turns on while the F149 (MSG) instruction is executed.
R9027 Not used
R9028 Not used
Turns on during forced on/off operation for input/output relay
R9029 Forcing flag
timer/counter contacts.
Interrupt enable Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by the ICTL
R902A
flag instruction.
Interrupt error
R902B Turns on when an interrupt error occurs.
flag
Sampling by the instruction=0
R902C Sample point flag
Sampling at constant time intervals=1
Sampling trace When the sampling operation stops=1,
R902D
end flag When the sampling operation starts=0
Sampling stop When the sampling stop trigger activates=1
R902E
trigger flag When the sampling stop trigger stops=0
Sampling enable When sampling starts=1
R902F
flag When sampling stops=0
15-12
WR903 FP0R
R9030 Not used
R9031 Not used
- Turns on when the general-purpose communication function
COM port
is being used
R9032 communication mode
- Goes off when the MEWTOCOL-COM or the PLC link
flag
function is being used.
Print instruction Off: Printing is not executed.
R9033
execution flag On: Execution is in progress.
RUN overwrite Goes on for ony the first scan following completion of a rewrite
R9034
complete flag during the RUN operation.
R9035 Not used
R9036 Not used
- Goes on is a transmission error occurs during data
COM port
communication.
R9037 communication error
- Goes off when a request is made to send data, using the
flag
F159 (MTRN) instruction.
COM port reception
done flag during - Turns on when the terminator is received during general -
R9038
general purpose purpose serial communication.
communication
COM port
- Goes on when transmission has been completed in general-
transmission done
purpose serial communication.
R9039 flag during general-
- Goes off when transmission is requested in general-purpose
purpose serial
serial communication.
communication
R903A Not used
R903B Not used
R903C Not used
R903D Not used
TOOL port reception
done flag during - Turns on the terminator is received during general -purpose
R903E
general purpose serial communication.
communication
TOOL port
- Goes on when transmission has been completed in general-
transmission done
purpose serial communication.
R903F flag during general-
- Goes off when transmission is requested in general-purpose
purpose serial
serial communication.
communication
Note) R9030 to R9030F can be changed during 1 scan.
15-13
WR904 FP0R
Relay
Name Description
No.
TOOL port - Turns on when the general-purpose communication function is being
R9040 operation mode used
flag - Goes off when the computer link function is being used.
COM port PLC
R9041 Turn on while the PLC link function is used.
link flag
R9042 Not used
R9043 Not used
Monitors whether the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV) instructions can
COM port
be executed or not.
SEND/RECV
R9044 Off: None of the above mentioned instructions can be executed.
instruction
(During executing the instruction)
execution flag
On: One of the above mentioned instructions can be executed.
COM port Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the execution of
SEND/RECV the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV) instructions as follows:
R9045 instruction Off: No abonormality detected.
execution end On: An abnormality detected. (communication error)
flag End code: DT90124
R9046 Not used
R9047 Not used
R9048 Not used
R9049 Not used
R904A Not used
R904B Not used
R904C
Not used
to R904F
Note) R9040 to R904F can be changed during 1 scan.
WR905 FP0R
Relay
Name Description
No.
MEWNET-W0
When using MEWNET-W0
PLC link
R9050 - Turns on when a transmission error occurs at PLC link.
transmission
- Turns on when there is an error in the PLC link area settings.
error flag
R9051 to
Not used
R905F
15-14
WR906 FP0R
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 1 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9060 No.1 link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
MEWNET- occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
W0 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 8 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9067 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
link 0 No.8 occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
trans- Turns on when Unit No. 9 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9068 mission Unit link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
assurance No.9
relay Turns on when Unit No. 10 is communicating properly in
R9069 Unit PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when
No.10 an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 11 is communicating properly in
R906A No.11 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when
an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
R906B No.12 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when
R906C No.13 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when
R906D PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when
No.14 an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.
R906E No.15 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when
R906F No.16 PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when
15-15
WR907 FP0R
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 1 is in the RUN mode.
R9070
No.1 Turns off when Unit No. 1 is in the PROG. mode.
R9071
R9072
R9073
R9074
R9075
R9076
MEWNET- No.7 Turns off when Unit No. 7 is in the PROG. mode.
W0 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 8 is in the RUN mode.
R9077
PC(PLC) No.8 Turns off when Unit No. 8 is in the PROG. mode.
link 0 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 9 is in the RUN mode.
R9078
operation No.9 Turns off when Unit No. 9 is in the PROG. mode.
mode relay Unit Turns on when Unit No. 10 is in the RUN mode.
R9079
R907A
R907B
R907C
R907D
R907E
R907F
15-16
WR908 FP0R
MEWNET- occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
W0 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 8 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9087 PC(PLC) link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
link 1 No.8 occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
trans- Turns on when Unit No. 9 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9088 mission Unit link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
assurance No.9
occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
relay Turns on when Unit No. 10 is communicating properly in PC(PLC)
R9089 Unit link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
No.10 occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
R908A No.11 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
R908B No.12 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
R908C No.13 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
R908D link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
No.14 occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 1 mode.
R908E No.15 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
R908F No.16 link 1 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
15-17
WR909 FP0R
R9090
R9091
R9092
R9093
R9094
R9095
R9096
MEWNET- No.7 Turns off when Unit No. 7 is in the PROG. mode.
W0 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 8 is in the RUN mode.
R9097
PC(PLC) No.8 Turns off when Unit No. 8 is in the PROG. mode.
link 1 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 9 is in the RUN mode.
R9098
operation No.9 Turns off when Unit No. 9 is in the PROG. mode.
mode relay Unit Turns on when Unit No. 10 is in the RUN mode.
R9099
R909A
R909B
R909C
R909D
R909E
R909F
15-18
WR910 FP0R
Relay
Name Description
No.
R9110 HSC-CH0
- Turns on the channel of high-speed counter during the
R9111 HSC-CH1
High-speed control using F165(CAM0), F166(HC1S), F167(HC1R),
R9112 HSC-CH2
counter F178(PLSM) instructions.
R9113 HSC-CH3
control flag - Turns off when the control is cleared or this instruction is
R9114 HSC-CH4
completed.
R9115 HSC-CH5
R9116 to
Not used
R911F
R9120 PLS-CH0
Pulse output - Turns on while the pulses are being output using
R9121 PLS-CH1
instruction F171(SPDH), F172 (PLSH), F173(PWMH), F174 (SP0H),
R9122 PLS-CH2
flag F175(SPSH), F177(HOME) instructions.
R9123 PLS-CH3
R9124 to
Not used
R912F
R9130 PLS-CH0 - Turns on the channel of pulse output during the control
R9131 Pulse output PLS-CH1 using F166(HC1S), F167(HC1R) instructions.
R9132 control flag PLS-CH2 - Turns off when the control is cleared or this instruction is
R9133 PLS-CH3 completed.
R9134 to
Not used
R913F
15-19
15.1.3 Table of Special Data Registers for FP0R
FP0R (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Self-diagnostic error The self-diagnostic error code is stored here
DT90000 A N/A
code when a self-diagnostic error occurs.
DT90001 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90002 Not used N/A N/A
When the state of installation of FP0
expansion I/O unit has changed since the
power was turned on, the bit corresponding to
Extension (right side) the unit No. will turn on. Monitor using binary
DT90010 I/O verify error unit display. A N/A
[0 to 3]

15-20
Read- Writ-
ing ing
One shift-out hexadecimal digit is stored in bit
Operation auxiliary positions 0 to 3 when the data shift instruction,
DT90014 register for data shift F105 (BSR) or F106 (BSL) is executed. The A A
instruction value can be read and written by executing F0
(MV) instruction.
The divided remainder (16-bit) is stored in

DT90015 DT90015 when the division instruction F32(%) A A
or F52(B%) instruction is executed. The
Operation auxiliary
divided remainder (32-bit) is stored in
register for division
DT90015 and DT90016 when the division
instruction
instruction F33(D%) or F53(DB%) is
DT90016 executed. The value can be read and written A A
by executing F0(MV) instruction.
After commencing operation, the address

Operation error where the first operation error occurred is
DT90017 A N/A
address (hold type) stored. Monitor the address using decimal
display.
The address where an operation error
Operation error occurred is stored. Each time an error occurs,
DT90018 A N/A
address (latest type) the new address overwrites the previous
address.
The data stored here is increased by one
every 2.5 ms. (H0 to HFFFF)
2.5 ms ring counter
DT90019 Note1) Difference between the values of the two A N/A
points (absolute value) x 2.5 ms = Elapsed
time between the two points.
The data stored here is increased by one
every 10.67 µs. (H0 to HFFFF)
10 µs ring counter Difference between the values of the two
DT90020 Note1) Note2) A N/A
points (absolute value) x 10.67 µs = Elapsed
time between the two points.
Note) The exact value is 10.67 µs.
Note1) It is renewed once at the beginning of each one scan.
Note2) As DT90020 is renewed even if F0(MV), DT90020 and D instruction is being executed, it can be
used to measure the block time.
15-21
Read- Writ-
ing ing
The current scan time is stored here. Scan
time is calculated using the formula:
Scan time (current
DT90022 Note) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 A N/A
value)
ms
Example: K50 indicates 5 ms.
The minimum scan time is stored here. Scan
time is calculated using the formula:
Scan time (minimum
DT90023 Note) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 A N/A
value)
ms
Example: K50 indicates 5 ms.
The maximum scan time is stored here. The
scan time is calculated using the formula:
Scan time (maximum
DT90024 Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 A N/A
value) Note)
ms
Example: K125 indicates 12.5 ms.
The mask conditions of interrupts using the
instruction can be stored here. Monitor using
Mask condition binary display.
monitoring register
DT90025 A N/A
for interrupts
(INT0 to 11)

The value set by ICTL instruction is stored.
Periodical interrupt
DT90027 K0: periodical interrupt is not used. A N/A
interval (INT24)
K1 to K3000: 0.5ms to 1.5s or 10ms to 30s
K0: Sampling by the SMPL instruction
DT90028 Sample trace interval A N/A
K1 to K3000 (x 10 ms): 10 ms to 30 s
DT90030
DT90031 The contents of the specified message (Data
DT90032 Character storage by length) are stored in these special data
A N/A
DT90033 F149 MSG instruction registers when F149 (MSG) instruction is
DT90034 executed.
DT90035
Note) Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode, and shows the operation cycle time. (In PROG.
mode, the scan time for the operation is not displayed.) The maximum and minimum values are
cleared each time the mode is switched from RUN to PROG.
15-22
Read- Writ-
ing ing
The number of data that match the searched
Work1 for SRC
DT90037 data is stored here when F96 (SRC) A N/A
instructions
insturction is executed.
The position of the first matching data is
Work2 for SRC
DT90038 stored here when an F96 (SRC) instruction is A N/A
instructions
executed.
The pulse output instruction can be continued
or cleared by writing a value with MV
instruction (F0).
Control code setting
High-speed counter
DT90052 A A
control flag
15-23
Read- Writ-
ing ing
A value can be written with F0 (MV) instruction
to reset the high-speed counter, disable
counting, continue or clear high-speed counter
instruction.
Control code setting
Pulse output control

DT90052 A A
flag
15-24
Read- Writ-
ing ing
Hour and minute data of the clock/calender
are stored here. This data is read-only data. It
cannot be overwritten.
Clock/calender
DT90053 monitor (hour/minute) A N/A
(T32 only)
The year, month, day, hour, minute, second

Clock/calender setting and day-of-the-week data for the
DT90054 (minute/second) clock/calender is stored. The built-in
(T32 only) clock/calender will operate correctly through
the year 2099 and supports leap years. The
Clock/calender setting clock/calender can be set by writing a value
DT90055 (day/hour) using a programming tool software or a
(T32 only) program that uses the F0 (MV) instruction.(see
example for DT90058)
Clock/calender setting
DT90056 (year/month) A A
(T32 only)
Clock/calender setting
DT90057 (day-of-the-week)
(T32 only)
As a day of the week is not automatially set on
FPWIN GR, fix what day is set to 00, and set
each value for 00 to 06.
15-25
Read- Writ-
ing ing
The clock/calender is adjusted as follows.
When setting the clock/calender by
program
By setting the highest bit of DT90058 to 1, the
time becomes that written to DT90054 to
DT90057 by F0 (MV) instruction. After the
time is set, DT90058 is cleared to 0. (Cannot
be performed with any instruction other than
F0 (MV) instruction.)
<Example>
Set the time to 12:00:00 on the 5th day when
the X0 turns on.
Note) If the values of DT90054 to DT90057

Clock/calender setting are changed with the programming tool
and 30 seconds software, the time will be set when the new
DT90058 A A
correction register values are written. Therefore, it is
(T32 only) unnecessary to write to DT90058.
When the correcting times less than 30

seconds
By setting the lowest bit of DT90058 to 1, the
value will be moved up or down and become
exactly 0 seconds. After the correction is
completed, DT90058 is cleared to 0.
Example:
Correct to 0 seconds with X0: on
At the time of coorection, if between 0 and 29

seconds, it will be moved down, and if
between 30 and 59 seconds, it will be moved
up.
In the example above, if the time was 5
minutes 29 seconds, it will become 5 minutes
0 seconds;and, if the time was 5 minutes 35
seconds, it will become 6 minutes 0 seconds.
Communication error Error code is sotred here when a
DT90059 N/A N/A
code communication error occurs.
15-26
Read- Writ-
ing ing
Step ladder process
DT90060
(0 to 15)
Step ladder process
DT90061
(16 to 31)
Step ladder process
DT90062
(32 to 47)
Step ladder process
DT90063
(48 to 63)
Step ladder process
DT90064
(64 to 79)
Step ladder process
DT90065
(80 to 95)
Step ladder process
DT90066
(96 to 111)
Step ladder process
DT90067
(112 to 127)
Indicates the startup condition of the step
Step ladder process
DT90068 ladder process. When the process starts up,
(128 to 143)
the bit corresponding to the process number
Step ladder process
DT90069 turns on.
(144 to 159)
Step ladder process
DT90070 Monitor using binary display.
(160 to 175) A
A Note)
Step ladder process
DT90071
(176 to 191)
Step ladder process
DT90072
(192 to 207)
Step ladder process
DT90073 Note) A programming tool software can be
(208 to 223)
used to write data.
Step ladder process
DT90074
(224 to 239)
Step ladder process
DT90075
(240 to 255)
Step ladder process
DT90076
(256 to 271)
Step ladder process
DT90077
(272 to 287)
Step ladder process
DT90078
(288 to 303)
Step ladder process
DT90079
(304 to 319)
Step ladder process
DT90080
(320 to 335)
Step ladder process
DT90081
(336 to 351)
15-27
Read- Writ-
ing ing
Step ladder process
DT90082
(352 to 367)
Step ladder process
DT90083
(368 to 383)
Step ladder process
DT90084
(384 to 399)
Step ladder process
DT90085
(400 to 415)
Step ladder process
DT90086
(416 to 431)
Indicates the startup condition of the step
Step ladder process
DT90087 ladder process. When the process starts up,
(432 to 447)
the bit corresponding to the process number
Step ladder process
DT90088 turns on .
(448 to 463)
Step ladder process
DT90089 Monitor using binary display.
(464 to 479) A
A Note)
Step ladder process
DT90090
(480 to 495)
Step ladder process
DT90091
(496 to 511)
Step ladder process
DT90092 Note) A programming tool software can be
(512 to 527)
used to write data.
Step ladder process
DT90093
(528 to 543)
Step ladder process
DT90094
(544 to 559)
Step ladder process
DT90095
(560 to 575)
Step ladder process
DT90096
(576 to 591)
Step ladder process
DT90097
(592 to 607)
15-28
Read- Writ-
ing ing
Step ladder process
DT90098
(608 to 623)
Step ladder process
DT90099
(624 to 639)
Step ladder process
DT90100
(640 to 655)
Step ladder process
DT90101
(656 to 671)
Step ladder process
DT90102
(672 to 687)
Step ladder process
DT90103
(688 to 703)
Step ladder process
DT90104
(704 to 719)
Step ladder process
DT90105
(720 to 735)
Step ladder process
DT90106
(736 to 751)
Step ladder process
DT90107 Indicates the startup condition of the step
(752 to 767)
Step ladder process ladder process. When the process starts up,
DT90108 the bit corresponding to the process number
(768 to 783)
Step ladder process turns on.
DT90109
(784 to 799)
Step ladder process Monitor using binary display
DT90110
(800 to 815)
A A
Step ladder process
DT90111
(816 to 831)
Step ladder process
DT90112
(832 to 847)
Step ladder process
DT90113
(848 to 863)
A programming tool software can be used to
Step ladder process
DT90114 write data.
(864 to 879)
Step ladder process
DT90115
(880 to 895)
Step ladder process
DT90116
(896 to 911)
Step ladder process
DT90117
(912 to 927)
Step ladder process
DT90118
(928 to 943)
Step ladder process
DT90119
(944 to 959)
Step ladder process
DT90120
(960 to 975)
Step ladder process
DT90121
(976 to 991)
Step ladder process
DT90122 (992 to 999)
(higher byte is not used.)
15-29
Read- Writ-
ing ing
COM SEND/RECV For details, refer to Programming Manual
DT90124 N/A N/A
instruction end code (F145 and F146).
Forced ON/OFF
DT90126 operating station Used by the system N/A N/A
display
DT90127
to Not used - N/A N/A
DT90139
The number of times the receiving operation
DT90140
is performed.
The current interval between two receiving
DT90141
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The minimum inerval between two receiving
DT90142
The maximum interval between two receiving
DT90143
MEWNET-W0 operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
A N/A
PC(PLC) link 0 status The number of times the sending operation is
DT90144
performed.
The current interval between two sending
DT90145
The minimum interval between two sending
DT90146
The maximum interval between two sending
DT90147
The number of times the receiving operation
DT90148
is performed.
The current interval between two receiving
DT90149
The minimum inerval between two receiving
DT90150
The maximum interval between two receiving
DT90151
MEWNET-W0 operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
A N/A
PC(PLC) link 1 status The number of times the sending operation is
DT90152
performed.
The current interval between two sending
DT90153
The minimum interval between two sending
DT90154
The maximum interval between two sending
DT90155
Area used for measurement of receiving
DT90156
MEWNET-W0 interval.
A N/A
PC(PLC) link 0 status Area used for measurement of sending
DT90157
interval.
15-30
Read- Writ-
ing ing
Area used for measurement of receiving
DT90158
MEWNET-W0 interval.
A N/A
PC(PLC) link 1 status Area used for measurement of sending
DT90159
interval.
MEWNET-W0
DT90160 Stores the unit No. of PC(PLC) link 0. A N/A
PC(PLC) link 0 unit No.
MEWNET-W0
DT90161 PC(PLC) link 0 error Stores the error contents of PC(PLC) link 0. A N/A
flag
DT90162
DT90169
Duplicated destination for PC(PLC) inter-link
DT90170
address
DT90171 Counts how many times a token is lost.
Counts how many times two or more tokens
DT90172
are detected.
DT90173 Counts how many times a signal is lost.
No. of times underfined commands have
DT90174
been received.
MEWNET-W0
No. of times sum check errors have occurred A N/A
DT90175 PC(PLC) link 0 status
during reception.
No. of times format errors have occurred in
DT90176
received data.
No. of times transmission errors have
DT90177
occurred.
DT90178 No. of times procedural errors have occurred.
No. of times overlapping parent units have
DT90179
occurred.
DT90180
DT90189
DT90194
DT90218
15-31
Read- Writ-
ing ing
Unit No. (Station No.)
0: Unit No. (Station No.) 1 to 8,
DT90219 selection for DT90220 to A A
1: Unit No. (Station No.) 9 to 16
DT90251
System regis-
DT90220
ter 40 and 41
PC(PLC)
System regis-
DT90221 link
ter 42 and 43
Unit
System regis- The contents of the system register settings
DT90222 (station)
ter 44 and 45 partaining to the PLC inter-link function for
No. 1 or 9
System regis- the various unit numbers are stored as
DT90223
ter 46 and 47 shown below.
System regis-
DT90224
ter 40 and 41 <Example>
PC(PLC)
System regis- When DT90219 is 0
DT90225 link
ter 42 and 43
Unit
System regis-
DT90226 (station)
ter 44 and 45
No. 2 or 10
System regis-
DT90227
ter 46 and 47
System regis-
DT90228
ter 40 and 41
PC(PLC)
System regis-
DT90229 link
ter 42 and 43
Unit A N/A
System regis- • When the system register 46 in the home
DT90230 (station)
ter 44 and 45 unit is in the standard setting, the values in
No. 3 or 11
System regis- the home unit are copied in the system
DT90231
ter 46 and 47 registers 46 and 47.
System regis- When the system register 46 in the home
DT90232
ter 40 and 41 unit is in the reverse setting, the registers
PC(PLC)
System regis- 40 to 45 and 47 corresponding to the
DT90233 link
ter 42 and 43 home unit mentioned in the left column will
Unit
System regis- be changed to 50 to 55 and 57, and the
DT90234 (station)
ter 44 and 45 system register 46 will be set as it is.
No. 4 or 12
System regis- Also, the system registers 40 to 45
DT90235 corresponding to other units will be
ter 46 and 47
System regis- changed to the values which the received
DT90236 values are corrected, and the registers 46
ter 40 and 41
PC(PLC) and 57 in the home unit are set for the
System regis-
DT90237 link registers 46 and 47.
ter 42 and 43
Unit
System regis-
DT90238 (station)
ter 44 and 45
No. 5 or 13
System regis-
DT90239
ter 46 and 47
15-32
Read- Writ-
ing ing
System regis-
DT90240 The contents of the system register
ter 40 and 41
settings partaining to the PLC inter-link
PC(PLC) System regis- function for the various unit numbers are
DT90241 link stored as shown below.
ter 42 and 43
Unit
(station) System regis- <Example> when DT90219 is 0.
DT90242
No. 6 or 14 ter 44 and 45
System regis-
DT90243
ter 46 and 47
System regis-
DT90244
ter 40 and 41
PC(PLC) System regis-

DT90245 link ter 42 and 43
• When the system register 46 in the
Unit (sta- home unit is in the standard setting, the A N/A
tion) No. 7 System regis- values in the home unit are copied in
DT90246
or 15 ter 44 and 45 the system registers 46 and 47.
When the system register 46 in the
System regis- home unit is in the reverse setting, the
DT90247
ter 46 and 47 registers 40 to 45 and 47
System regis-
corresponding to the home unit
DT90248 mentioned in the left column will be
ter 40 and 41
changed to 50 to 55 and 57, and the
PC(PLC) System regis- system register 46 will be set as it is.
DT90249 link ter 42 and 43 Also, the system registers 40 to 45
Unit (sta- corresponding to other units will be
tion) No. 8 System regis- changed to the values which the
DT90250
or 16 ter 44 and 45 received values are corrected, and the
System regis-
registers 46 and 57 in the home unit
DT90251 are set for the registers 46 and 47.
ter 46 and 47
DT90252 Not used

DT90253 Not used
N/A N/A
DT90254 Not used
DT90255 Not used
15-33
Read- Writ-
ing ing
Counting area for input (X0) or Note)
DT90300 Elapsed Lower words A A
(X0, X1) of the main unit.
value
Note)
DT90301 area Higher words A A
HSC-CH0
The target value is set when Note)
DT90302 Target Lower words A A
instructions F166 (HC1S) and
value
F167 (HC1R) are executed.
DT90303 area Higher words A A Note)
Counting area for input (X1) of
DT90304 Elapsed Lower words A A Note)
the main unit.
value
HSC-CH1
value
Counting area for input (X2) or

value
Note)
HSC-CH2
value
Counting area for input (X3) of

the main unit.
value
HSC-CH3
value
Counting area for input (X4) or Note)

DT90316 Elapsed Lower words A A
value
Note)
HSC-CH4
value
F167 (HC1R) are executed. Note)
Note) Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 (DMV) instruction only.
Writing in the target value area is available by F166 (HC1S) and F167 (HC1R) instructions only.
15-34
Read- Writ-
ing ing
Counting area for input (X5) of A
DT90320 Elapsed Lower words A Note1)
value the main unit.
area A
DT90321 Higher words A Note1)
HSC-CH5
The target value is set when A
DT90322 Target Lower words A Note1)
value instructions F166 (HC1S) and
F167 (HC1R) are executed. A
DT90323 area Higher words A Note1)

Note1) Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 (DMV) instruction only.
Writing in the target value area is available by F166 (HC1S) and F167 (HC1R) instructions only.
15-35
Read- Writ-
ing ing
DT90370 HSC-CH0 When HSC control is executed by A N/A
DT90371 HSC-CH1 F0 (MV)S, DT90052 instruction, A N/A
DT90372 Control flag monitor HSC-CH2 the setting value for the target CH A N/A
DT90373 area HSC-CH3 is stored in each CH. A N/A
DT90374 HSC-CH4 A N/A
DT90375 HSC-CH5 A N/A
DT90380 PLS-CH0 When pulse output control is A N/A
Control flag monitor
DT90381 PLS-CH1 executed by F0 (MV)S, DT90052 A N/A
area (Transistor
DT90382 PLS-CH2 instruction, the setting value for the A N/A
output type only)
DT90383 PLS-CH3 target CH is stored in each CH. A N/A
15-36
Read- Writ-
ing ing
DT90400 Elapsed value Lower words Available for the transistor A A
area output type only.
DT90401 Higher words Note) When controlling the A A
DT90402 Lower words pulse output CH by A N/A
Target value
F166(HC1S), F167(HC1R)
DT90403 area Higher words A N/A
instructions, the target
DT90404 Target value Lower words value is stored. A N/A
area for match The target value for match
DT90405 ON/OFF Higher words ON/OFF is stored. A N/A
Corrected PLS- The initial speed of the
DT90406 speed of initial CH0 calculated result is stored. A N/A
speed
Lower words
Deceleration The minimum speed for the
DT90407 minimum change of speed. A N/A
speed
If the elapsed value corsses
DT90408 Acceleration Lower words A N/A
over this position when
forbidden area
changing the speed,
starting
DT90409 Higher words acceleration cannot be A N/A
position
performed.
Target value
F166(HC1S), F167(HC1R)
speed
Lower words
speed
forbidden area
changing the speed,
starting
position
performed.
15-37
Read- Writ-
ing ing
Target value
F166(HC1S), F167(HC1R)
speed
Lower words
speed
forbidden area
changing the speed,
starting
position
performed.
Target value
F166(HC1S), F167(HC1R)
speed
Lower words
speed
forbidden area
changing the speed,
starting
position
performed.
15-38
15.2 Table of Basic Instructions
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps *3
FP0R
FP-X
FPΣ
FP2
Name Boolean Symbol Description
Sequence basic instructions

Start Begins a logic operation with a Form A 1
ST
(normally open) contact. (2)
Start Not Begins a logic operation with a Form B 1
ST/
(normally closed) contact. (2)
Out Outputs the operated result to the specified 1
OT
output. (2)
Not Inverts the operated result up to this
/ 1
instruction.
AND Connects a Form A (normally open) contact 1
AN
serially. (2)
AND Not Connects a Form B (normally closed) contact 1
AN/
serially. (2)
OR Connects a Form A (normally open) contact 1
OR
in parallel. (2)
OR Not Connects a Form B (normally closed) contact 1
OR/
in parallel. (2)
Leading Begins a logic operation only for one scan
edge ST↑ when the leading edge of the trigger is 2 *2 *2
start detected.
Trailing Begins a logic operation only for one scan
edge ST↓ when the trailing edge of the trigger is 2 *2 *2
start detected.
Leading Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
edge AN↑ serially only for one scan when the leading 2 *2 *2
AND edge of the trigger is detected.
Trailing Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
edge AN↓ serially only for one scan when the trailing 2 *2 *2
AND edge of the trigger is detected.
Leading Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
edge OR OR↑ in parallel only for one scan when the leading 2 *2 *2
edge of the trigger is detected.
Trailing Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
edge OR OR↓ in parallel only for one scan when the trailing 2 *2 *2
edge of the trigger is detected.
Leading Outputs the operated result to the specified
edge out OT↑ output only for one scan when leading edge 2
of the trigger is detected. (for pulse relay)
Trailing Outputs the operated result to the specified
edge out OT↓ output only for one scan when trailing edge of 2
the trigger is detected. (for pulse relay)
Alterna- ALT Inverts the output condition (on/off) each time
3
tive out the leading edge of the trigger is detected.
AND ANS Connects the multiple instruction blocks
serially. 1
stack
OR stack ORS Connects the multiple instruction blocks in
parallel. 1
: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially

*1) The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models.
*2) This instruction is available for FP-X Ver. 2.0 or later, and FPΣ Ver. 3.10 or later.
*3) In the FP2/FP2SH/10SH, when using X1280, Y1280, R1120 (special internal relay included), L1280, T256, C256 or
anything beyond for the ST, ST/, OT, AN, AN/, OR and OR/ instructions, the number of steps is shown in parentheses.
Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when a relay number has an index modifier, the number of steps is shown in
parentheses. For the FPΣ and FP-X, the number of steps varies according to the relay number to be used.
15-39
FP2SH/FP10SH
Steps *5 *6
FP0/FP-e
FP0R
FP-X
FPΣ
FP2
Push stack PSHS Stores the operated result up to this

1
instruction. *2
Read stack RDS Reads the operated result stored by
1
the PSHS instruction. *2
Pop stack POPS Reads and clears the operated result
1
stored by the PSHS instruction
Leading edge DF Turns on the contact for only one
differential scan when the leading edge of the 1
trigger is detected.
Trailing edge DF/ Turns on the contact for only one
differential scan when the trailing edge of the 1
trigger is detected.
Leading edge DFI Turns on the contact for only one
differential scan when the leading edge of the
1
(initial execution trigger is detected. The leading edge
type) detection is possible on the first scan.
Set SET Output is set to and held at on.
3
Reset RST Output is set to and held at off.

3
Keep KP Outputs at set trigger and holds until 1

reset trigger turns on. (2)
No operation NOP No operation. 1
Basic function instructions
On-delay timer TML After set value “n” x 0.001 seconds, 3
timer contact “a” is set to on. (4) *3
TMR After set value “n” x 0.01 seconds, 3
TMX After set value “n” x 0.1 seconds, 3
TMY After set value “n” x 1 second, timer 4
contact “a” is set to on. (5) *3
Auxiliary timer F137 After set value “S” x 0.01 seconds,
(16-bit) (STMR) the specified output and R900D are 5
set to on.
Auxiliary timer F183 After set value “S” x 0.01 seconds,
(32-bit) (DSTM) the specified output and R900D are 7
set to on.
Time constant F182 Executes the filter processing for the
9
processing specified input.
Counter CT Decrements from the preset value “n”
3
(4) *3

*1) The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models.
*2) The allowable number of using the PSHS and RDS instruction depends on the models.
*3) For FP2SH, FP10SH and FP-X Ver2.0 or later, any device can be set for the setting value of counter or timer instruction.
*4) This instruction is available for FP-X Ver. 2.0 or later.
*5) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when using Y1280, R1120 (special internal relay included), L1280 or anything beyond for the
KP instruction, the number of steps is shown in parentheses. Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when a relay number has
an index modifier, the number of steps is shown in parentheses.
*6) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when timer 256 or higher, or counter 255 or lower, is used, the number of steps is the number
in parentheses. Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when a timer number or counter number has an index modifier, the
number of steps is the number in parentheses. For the FPΣ and FP-X, the number of steps varies according to the
specified timer number or counter number.
15-40
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
FPΣ
FP2
UP/DOWN F118 Increments or decrements from the

counter (UDC) preset value “S” based on up/down
input. 5
Shift SR Shifts one bit of 16-bit [word internal

register relay (WR)] data to the left. 1
(2)
*1
Left/right F119 Shifts one bit of 16-bit data range

shift (LRSR) specified by “D1” and “D2” to the left or
register to the right. 5
Control instructions
Master MC Starts the master control program.
control 2
relay
Master MCE Ends the master control program.
control 2
relay end
Jump JP The program jumps to the label 2
instruction and continues from there. (3)
*2
Label LBL 1
Auxiliary F19 The program jumps to the label
3
jump (SJP) instruction specified by “S” and
continues from there.
1
Label LBL
Loop LOOP The program jumps to the label 4
instruction and continues from there (the (5)
number of jumps is set in “S”). *3
Label LBL
1
Break BRK Stops program execution when the
predetermined trigger turns on in the 1
TEST/RUN mode only.
*1) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when internal relay WR240 or higher is used, the number of steps is the number in
parentheses. Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the specified internal relay number (word address) has an index
modifier, the number of steps is the number in parentheses.
*2) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the number “n” in a jump instruction has an index modifier, the number of steps
isthenumber in parentheses.
*3) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the number “n” in a loop instruction has an index modifier, the number of steps is the
number in parentheses.
15-41
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
FPΣ
FP2
End ED The operation of program is ended.

1
Indicates the end of a main program.
Conditional CNDE The operation of program is ended when
1
end the trigger turns on.
Eject EJECT Adds page break for use when printing.
1
Step ladder instructions

Start step SSTP The start of program “n” for process
3
control
Next step NSTL Starts the specified process “n” and
clears the process currently started. 3
(Scan execution type)
NSTP Starts the specified process “n” and
clears the process currently started. 3
(Pulse execution type)
Clear step CSTP Resets the specified process “n”.
3
Clear multi- SCLR Resets multiple processes specified by
5
ple steps “n1” and “n2”. *1
Step end STPE End of step ladder area
1
Subroutine instructions
Subroutine CALL When the trigger is on: Executes the
call subroutine. 2
When the trigger is off: Not execute the (3)
subroutine. The output in the *2
subroutine is maintained.
Output off FCAL When the trigger is on: Executes the
type subroutine. 4
subroutine When the trigger is off: Not execute the (5)
call subroutine. But, the output in *2
the subroutine is cleared.
Subroutine SUB Indicates the start of the subroutine
1
entry program “n”.
Subroutine RET Ends the subroutine program.
1
return
Interrupt instructions
Interrupt INT Indicates the start of the interrupt program
1
“n”.
Interrupt IRET Ends the interrupt program.
1
return
Interrupt ICTL Select interrupt enable/disable or clear in
5
control “S1” and “S2” and execute.
*1) Available for FP-e only.
*2) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the number “n” of a subroutine program has an index modifier, the number of steps is
the number in parentheses.
15-42
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
FPΣ
FP2
Special setting instructions

Communica- SYS1 Change the communication conditions
tion condi- for the COM port or tool port based on
tions setting the contents specified by the character *1 *1
constant.
Password Change the password specified by the
setting PLC based on the contents specified by *2
the character constant.
Interrupt Set the interrupt input based on the
setting contents specified by the character
constant.
PLC link time Set the system setting time when a PLC
setting link is used, based on the contents 13
specified by the character constant.
MEWTOCOL- Change the communication conditions of
COM the COM. port or tool port for
response MEWTOCOL-COM based on the
control contents specified by the character
constant.
High-speed Change the operation mode of the high-
counter speed counter, based on the contents
operation specified by the character constant.
*3 *3
mode
changing
System SYS2 Change the setting value of the system
registers register for the PLC link function.
“No. 40 to 7
No. 47”
changing
*1) With FP-X Ver2.0 or later, and FPΣ Ver 3.10 or later, the baud rate can be selected from 300, 600 or 1200 bps.
*2) With FPΣ 32k type, the 8-digit password can be selected.
*3) With FPΣ 32k type and FP-X Ver1.10 or later, it can be used.
15-43
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
FPΣ
FP2
Data compare instructions

16-bit ST= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-
5
bit data in the comparative condition “S1=S2”.
data
ST<> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-
compare bit data in the comparative condition “S1<S2” 5
(Start) or “S1>S2”.
ST> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-
5
bit data in the comparative condition “S1>S2”.
ST>= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-
bit data in the comparative condition “S1>S2” 5
or “S1=S2”.
ST< Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-
5
bit data in the comparative condition “S1<S2”.
ST<= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-
bit data in the comparative condition “S1<S2” 5
or “S1=S2”.
16-bit AN= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the 5
data
comparative condition “S1=S2”.
compare Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
AN<>
(AND) serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the 5
comparative condition “S1<S2” or “S1>S2”.
AN> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
comparative condition “S1>S2”.
AN>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
comparative condition “S1>S2” or “S1=S2”.
AN< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
comparative condition “S1<S2”.
AN<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
comparative condition “S1<S2” or “S1=S2”.
16-bit OR= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the 5
data
comparative condition “S1=S2”.
compare Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
OR<>
(OR) parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the 5
comparative condition “S1<S2” or “S1>S2”.
OR> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
comparative condition “S1>S2”.
OR>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
comparative condition “S1>S2” or “S1=S2”.
OR< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
comparative condition “S1<S2”.
OR<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
comparative condition “S1<S2” or “S1=S2”.
15-44
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
FPΣ
FP2
32-bit STD= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-

bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, 9
data S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
compare STD<> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-
(Start)
S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
STD> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-
S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
STD>= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-
S1)>(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
STD< Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-
S1)<(S2+1, S2)”.
STD<= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-
S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
32-bit AND= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
data comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
compare AND<> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the
(AND) 9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”
or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
AND> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
AND>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
AND< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”.
AND<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
9
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
32-bit ORD= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
data comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
compare ORD<> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the
(OR) 9
or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
ORD> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
ORD>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
ORD< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”.
ORD<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
9
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
15-45
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
FPΣ
FP2
Floating STF= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-

point S1)=(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
type real STF<> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-

number S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
data STF> Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-
compare *1 *1
S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
(Start) Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-
STF>=
S1)>(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
STF< Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-

S1)<(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
STF<= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-

S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
Floating ANF= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact

point comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
type real ANF<> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact

number 9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” *1 *1
data or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
ANF> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
compare
(AND) comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
ANF>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact

9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)” *1 *1
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
ANF< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
ANF<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact

9
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
Floating ORF= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
point *1 *1
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
type real ORF<> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
number 9
data or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.
ORF> Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
compare
(OR) comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
ORF>= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in

9
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)” *1 *1
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
ORF< Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in
comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”. *1 *1
ORF<= Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in

9
or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
*1) This instruction is available for FP-X V1.10 or later and FPΣ 32k type
15-46
15.3 Table of High-level Instructions
The high-level instructions are expressed by the prefixes “F” or “P” with numbers. For most of the high-level
instructions, “F” and “P” types are available. The differences between the two types are explained as follows:
- Instructions with the prefix “F” are executed in every scan while its trigger is in the on.
- Instructions with the prefix “P” are executed only when the leading edge of its trigger is detected.
For the FP0/FP0R/FPΣ/FP-X, the P type high-level instructions are not available.
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Boo- Ope-
FPΣ
FP2
Name Description
ber lean rand
Data transfer instructions

F0 16-bit data MV S, D (S)→(D)
5
P0 move PMV
F1 32-bit data DMV S, D (S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
7
P1 move PDMV
F2 16-bit data MV S, D
P2 invert and PMV/ (S)→(D) 5
move
F3 32-bit data DMV/ S, D
P3 invert and PDMV/ (S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 7
move
F4 Reading of GETS S, D The head word No. of the specified slot is
P4 head word PGETS read.
5
No. of the *1 *1
specified slot
F5 Bit data BTM S, n, The specified one bit in “S” is transferred to
P5 move PBTM D the specified one bit in “D”. The bit is 7
specified by “n”.
F6 Hexadecimal DGT S, n, d The specified one digit in “S” is transferred
P6 digit (4-bit) PDGT to the specified one digit in “D”. The digit is 7
data move specified by “n”.
F7 Two 16-bit MV2 S1, (S1)→(D),
7
P7 data move PMV2 S2, D (S2)→(D+1)
F8 Two 32-bit DMV2 S1, (S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D),
11
P8 data move PDMV2 S2, D (S2+1, S2)→(D+3, D+2)
F10 Block move BKMV S1, The data between “S1” and “S2” is
7
P10 PBKMV S2, D transferred to the area starting at “D”.
F11 Block copy COPY S, D1, The data of “S” is transferred to the all area
7
P11 PCOPY D2 between “D1” and “D2”.
F12 Data read ICRD S1, The data stored in the expansion memory
from EEP- S2, D of the EEP-ROM specified by “S1” and “S2” 11
*2
ROM are transferred to the area starting at “D”.
P13 Data write to PICWT S1, The data specified by “S1” and “S2” are
11
EEP-ROM S2, D transferred to the EEP-ROM starting at “D”. *2
from F-ROM S2, D of the F-ROM specified by “S1” and “S2” 11
are transferred to the area starting at “D”.
P13 Data write to PICWT S1, The data specified by “S1” and “S2” are
11
F-ROM S2, D transferred to the F-ROM starting at “D”.
P12 from IC card PICRD S2, D of the IC card specified by “S1” and “S2” 11
are transferred to the area starting at “D”.
F13 Data write to ICWT S1, The data specified by “S1” and “S2” are
P13 IC card PICWT S2, D transferred to the IC card expansion 11
memory area starting at “D”.
F14 Program read PGRD S The program specified using “S” is
P14 from IC PPGRD transferred into the CPU from IC memory 3
memory card card and executes it.
*1) This instruction is available for FP2/FP2SH Ver. 1.5 or later.FP10SH cannot be used
*2) This instruction is available for FP0 Ver. 2.0 or later and FP-e.
15-47
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Ope-
FPΣ
FP2
Name Boo-lean Description
ber rand
F15 16-bit data XCH D1, D2 (D1)→(D2), (D2)→(D1)

5
P15 exchange PXCH
F16 32-bit data DXCH D1, D2 (D1+1, D1)→(D2+1, D2)
5
P16 exchange PDXCH (D2+1, D2)→(D1+1, D1)
F17 Higher/lower SWAP D The higher byte and lower byte of “D”
P17 byte in 16-bit PSWAP are exchanged. 3
data exchange
F18 16-bit data BXCH D1, Exchange the data between “D1” and
P18 block PBXCH D2, D3 “D2” with the data specified by “D3”. 7
exchange
Control instruction
F19 Auxiliary jump SJP S The program jumps to the label
instruction specified by “S” and 3
continues from there.
Binary arithmetic instructions
F20 16-bit data + S, D (D)+(S)→(D)
5
P20 addition P+
F21 32-bit data D+ S, D (D+1, D)+(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
7
P21 addition PD+
F22 16-bit data + S1, (S1)+(S2)→(D)
7
P22 addition P+ S2, D
F23 32-bit data D+ S1, (S1+1, S1)+(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)
11
P23 addition PD+ S2, D
F25 16-bit data - S, D (D)-(S)→(D)
5
P25 subtraction P-
F26 32-bit data D- S, D (D+1, D)-(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
7
P26 subtraction PD-
F27 16-bit data - S1, (S1)-(S2)→(D)
7
P27 subtraction P- S2, D
F28 32-bit data D- S1, (S1+1, S1)-(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)
11
P28 subtraction PD- S2, D
F30 16-bit data * S1, (S1)X(S2)→(D+1, D)
7
P30 multiplication P* S2, D
F31 32-bit data D* S1, (S1+1, S1)X(S2+1, S2)→(D+3, D+2,
11
P31 multiplication PD* S2, D D+1, D)
F32 16-bit data % S1, (S1)÷(S2)→quotient (D)
7
P32 division P% S2, D remainder (DT9015)
F33 32-bit data D% S1, (S1+1, S1)÷(S2+1, S2)→quotient (D+1,
P33 division PD% S2, D D) 11
remainder (DT9016, DT9015)
F34 16-bit data *W S1, (S1)X(S2)→(D)
P34 multiplication P*W S2, D
7
(result in 16
bits)
F35 16-bit data +1 D (D)+1→(D)
3
P35 increment P+1
F36 32-bit data D+1 D (D+1, D)+1→(D+1, D)
3
P36 increment PD+1
F37 16-bit data -1 D (D)-1→(D)
3
P37 decrement P-1
F38 32-bit data D-1 D (D+1, D)-1→(D+1, D)
3
P38 decrement PD-1
F39 32-bit data D*D S1, (S1+1, S1)x(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)
P39 multiplication PD*D S2, D
11
(result in 32
bits)
15-48
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Boo-
FPΣ
FP2
Name Operand Description
ber lean
BCD arithmetic instructions

F40 4-digit BCD B+ S, D (D)+(S)→(D)
5
P40 data addition PB+
F41 8-digit BCD DB+ S, D (D+1, D)+(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
7
P41 data addition PDB+
F42 4-digit BCD B+ S1, S2, D (S1)+(S2)→(D)
7
P42 data addition PB+
F43 8-digit BCD DB+ S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)+(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)
11
P43 data addition PDB+
F45 4-digit BCD data B- S, D (D)-(S)→(D)
5
P45 subtraction PB-
F46 8-digit BCD data DB- S, D (D+1, D)-(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
7
P46 subtraction PDB-
F47 4-digit BCD data B- S1, S2, D (S1)-(S2)→(D)
7
P47 subtraction PB-
F48 8-digit BCD data DB- S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)-(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)
11
P48 subtraction PDB-
F50 4-digit BCD data B* S1, S2, D (S1)X(S2)→(D+1, D)
7
P50 multiplication PB*
F51 8-digit BCD data DB* S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)X(S2+1, S2)→(D+3, D+2,
11
P51 multiplication PDB* D+1, D)
F52 4-digit BCD data B% S1, S2, D (S1)÷(S2)→quotient (D)
7
P52 division PB% remainder (DT9015)
F53 8-digit BCD data DB% S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)÷(S2+1, S2)→quotient
P53 division PDB% (D+1, D) 11
remainder (DT9016, DT9015)
F55 4-digit BCD data B+1 D (D)+1→(D)
3
P55 increment PB+1
F56 8-digit BCD data DB+1 D (D+1, D)+1→(D+1, D)
3
P56 increment PDB+1
F57 4-digit BCD data B-1 D (D)-1→(D)
3
P57 decrement PB-1
F58 8-digit BCD data DB-1 D (D+1, D)-1→(D+1, D)
3
P58 decrement PDB-1
Data compare instructions
F60 16-bit data CMP S1, S2 (S1)>(S2)→R900A: on
P60 compare PCMP (S1)=(S2)→R900B: on 5
(S1)<(S2)→R900C: on
F61 32-bit data DCMP S1, S2 (S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)→R900A: on
P61 compare PDCMP (S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)→R900B: on 9
(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)→R900C: on
F62 16-bit data band WIN S1, S2, (S1)>(S3)→R900A: on
P62 compare PWIN S3 (S2)< or=(S1)< or=(S3)→R900B: on 7
(S1)<(S2)→R900C: on
15-49
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Boo- Ope-
FPΣ
FP2
Name Description
ber lean rand
F63 32-bit data DWIN S1, S2, (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3)→R900A: on

P63 band PDWIN S3 (S2+1, S2)< or=(S1+1, S1)< or=(S3+1,
13
compare S3)→R900B: on
(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)→R900C: on
F64 Block data BCMP S1, S2, Compares the two blocks beginning with
7
P64 compare PBCMP S3 “S2” and “S3” to see if they are equal.
Logic operation instructions
F65 16-bit data WAN S1, S2, D (S1) AND (S2)→(D)
7
P65 AND PWAN
F66 16-bit data WOR S1, S2, D (S1) OR (S2)→(D)
7
P66 OR PWOR
F67 16-bit data XOR S1, S2, D
{(S1) AND (S2)} OR {(S1) AND (S2)}→(D)
P67 exclusive PXOR 7
OR
F68 16-bit data XNR S1, S2, D
{(S1) AND (S2)} OR {(S1) AND (S2)}→(D)
P68 exclusive PXNR 7
NOR
F69 16-bit data WUNI S1, S2,
([S1] AND [S3]) OR ([S2] AND [S3])→(D)
P69 unite PWUNI S3, D
When (S3) is H0, (S2)→(D) 9
When (S3) is HFFFF, (S1) →(D)
Data conversion instructions

F70 Block check BCC S1, S2, Creates the code for checking the data
P70 code PBCC S3, D specified by “S2” and “S3” and stores it in
calculation “D”. 9
The calculation method is specified by
“S1”.
F71 Hexadecima HEXA S1, S2, D Converts the hexadecimal data specified
P71 l data → PHEXA by “S1” and “S2” to ASCII code and stores
ASCII code it in “D”. 7
Example: HABCD→ H 42 41 44 43
B A D C
F72 ASCII code AHEX S1, S2, D Converts the ASCII code specified by “S1”
P72 → Hexadeci- PAHEX and “S2” to hexadecimal data and stores
mal data it in “D”. 7
Example: H 44 43 42 41 → HCDAB
D C B A
F73 4-digit BCD BCDA S1, S2, D Converts the four digits of BCD data
P73 data → PBCDA specified by “S1” and “S2” to ASCII code
ASCII code and stores it in “D”. 7
Example: H1234→ H 32 31 34 33
2 1 4 3
F74 ASCII code ABCD S1, S2, D Converts the ASCII code specified by “S1”
P74 → 4-digit PABCD and “S2” to four digits of BCD data and
BCD data stores it in “D”. 9
Example: H 34 33 32 31 → H3412
4 3 2 1
F75 16-bit binary BINA S1, S2, D Converts the 16 bits of binary data
P75 data → PBINA specified
ASCII code by “S1” to ASCII code and stores it in “D”
7
(area of “S2” bytes).
Example: K-100→ H 30 30 31 2D 20 20
0 0 1 -
15-50
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Ope-
FPΣ
FP2
Name Boolean Description
ber rand
F76 ASCII code → ABIN S1, S2, Converts the ASCII code specified by
P76 16-bit binary PABIN D “S1” and “S2” to 16 bits of binary data
data and stores it in “D”. 7
Example: H 30 30 31 2D 20 20 → K-100
0 0 1 -
F77 32-bit binary DBIA S1, S2, Converts the 32 bits of binary data
P77 data → ASCII PDBIA D (S1+1,
11
code S1) to ASCII code and stores it in D
(area of “S2” bytes).
F78 ASCII code → DABI S1, S2, Converts the ASCII code specified by
P78 32-bit binary PDABI D “S1” and “S2” to 32 bits of binary data 11
data and stores it in (D+1, D).
F80 16-bit binary BCD S, D Converts the 16 bits of binary data
P80 data → 4-digit PBCD specified by “S” to four digits of BCD
5
BCD data data and stores it in “D”.
Example: K100 → H100
F81 4-digit BCD BIN S, D Converts the four digits of BCD data
P81 data → 16-bit PBIN specified by “S” to 16 bits of binary data
5
binary data and stores it in “D”.
Example: H100 → K100
F82 32-bit binary DBCD S, D Converts the 32 bits of binary data
P82 data → 8-digit PDBCD specified by (S+1, S) to eight digits of
7
BCD data BCD data and stores it in (D+1, D).
F83 8-digit BCD DBIN S, D Converts the eight digits of BCD data
P83 data → 32-bit PDBIN specified by (S+1, S) to 32 bits of binary 7
binary data data and stores it in (D+1, D).
F84 16-bit data INV D Inverts each bit of data of “D”.
P84 invert (com- PINV 3
plement of 1)
F85 16-bit data NEG D Inverts each bit of data of “D” and adds
P85 complement PNEG 1 (inverts the sign). 3
of 2
F86 32-bit data DNEG D Inverts each bit of data of (D+1, D) and
P86 complement PDNEG adds 1 (inverts the sign). 3
of 2
F87 16-bit data ABS D Gives the absolute value of the data of
3
P87 absolute PABS “D”.
F88 32-bit data DABS D Gives the absolute value of the data of
3
P88 absolute PDABS (D+1, D).
F89 16-bit data EXT D Extends the 16 bits of data in “D” to 32
P89 sign extension PEXT bits in (D+1, D). 3
F90 Decode DECO S, n, D Decodes part of the data of “S” and

P90 PDECO stores 7
it in “D”. The part is specified by “n”.
F91 7-segment SEGT S, D Converts the data of “S” for use in a 7-
P91 decode PSEGT segment display and stores it in (D+1, 5
D).
F92 Encode ENCO S, n, D Encodes part of the data of “S” and
P92 PENCO stores it in “D”. The part is specified by 7
“n”.
F93 16-bit data UNIT S, n, D The least significant digit of each of the
P93 combine PUNIT “n” words of data beginning at “S” are 7
stored (united) in order in “D”.
15-51
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Boo- Ope-
FPΣ
FP2
Name Description
ber lean rand
F94 16-bit data distribute DIST S, n, Each of the digits of the data of “S”
P94 PDIST D are stored in (distributed to) the least
7
significant digits of the areas
beginning at “D”.
F95 Character→ ASCII ASC S, D Twelve characters of the character
P95 code PASC constants of “S” are converted to
15
ASCII code and stored in “D” to
“D+5”.
F96 16-bit table data SRC S1, The data of “S1” is searched for in
P96 search PSRC S2, the areas in the range “S2” to “S3”
7
S3 and the result is stored in DT9037
and DT9038
F97 32-bit table data DSRC S1, The data of (S1+1, S1) is searched
P97 search PDSRC S2, for in the 32-bit data designated by
S3 “S3”, beginning from “S2”, and the 11
result if stored in DT90037 and
DT90038.
Data shift instructions
F98 Data table shift-out CMPR D1, Transfer “D2” to “D3”. Any parts of
P98 and compress PCMPR D2, the data between “D1” and “D2” that
7
D3 are 0 are compressed, and shifted in
order toward “D2”.
F99 Data table shift-in CMPW S, D1, Transfer “S” to “D1”. Any parts of the
P99 and compress PCMP D2 data between “D1” and “D2” that are
7
W 0 are compressed, and shifted in
order toward “D2”.
F100 Right shift of SHR D, n Shifts the “n” bits of “D” to the right.
P100 multiple bits (n bits) PSHR 5
in a 16-bit data
F101 Left shift of multiple SHL D, n Shifts the “n” bits of “D” to the left.
P101 bits (n bits) in a 16- PSHL 5
bit data
F102 Right shift of n bits DSHR D, n Shifts the “n” bits of the 32-bit data
P102 in a 32-bit data PDSHR area specified by (D+1, D) to the 5
right.
F103 Left shift of n bits in DSHL D, n Shifts the “n” bits of the 32-bit data
5
P103 a 32-bit data PDSHL area specified by (D+1, D) to the left.
F105 Right shift of one BSR D Shifts the one digit of data of “D” to
P105 hexadecimal digit (4- PBSR the right. 3
bit)
F106 Left shift of one BSL D Shifts the one digit of data of “D” to
P106 hexadecimal digit PBSL the left. 3
(4-bit)
F108 Right shift of BITR D1, Shifts the “n” bits of data range by
7
P108 multiple bits (n bits) PBITR D2, n “D1” and “D2” to the right.
F109 Left shift of multiple BITL D1, Shifts the “n” bits of data range by
7
P109 bits (n bits) PBITL D2, n “D1” and “D2” to the left.
F110 Right shift of one WSHR D1, Shifts the one word of the areas by
5
P110 word (16-bit) PWSHR D2 “D1” and “D2” to the right.
F111 Left shift of one WSHL D1, Shifts the one word of the areas by
5
P111 word (16-bit) PWSHL D2 “D1” and “D2” to the left.
F112 Right shift of one WBSR D1, Shifts the one digit of the areas by
P112 hexadecimal digit (4- PWBSR D2 “D1” and “D2” to the right. 5
bit)
F113 Left shift of one WBSL D1, Shifts the one digit of the areas by
P113 hexadecimal digit (4- PWBSL D2 “D1” and “D2” to the left. 5
bit)
15-52
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num Ope-
FPΣ
FP2
-ber rand
FIFO instructions
F115 FIFO buffer define FIFT n, D The “n” words beginning from “D” are
5
P115 PFIFT defined in the buffer.
F116 Data read from FIFR S, D The oldest data beginning from “S”
P116 FIFO buffer PFIFR that was written to the buffer is read 5
and stored in “D”.
F117 Data write into FIFW S, D The data of “S” is written to the buffer
5
P117 FIFO buffer PFIFW starting from “D”.
Basic function instructions
F118 UP/DOWN counter UDC S, D Counts up or down from the value
preset in “S” and stores the elapsed 5
value in “D”.
F119 Left/right shift LRSR D1, Shifts one bit to the left or right with
register D2 the area between “D1” and “D2” as 5
the register.
Data rotate instructions
F120 16-bit data right ROR D, n Rotates the “n” bits in data of “D” to
5
P120 rotate PROR the right.
F121 16-bit data left ROL D, n Rotates the “n” bits in data of “D” to
5
P121 rotate PROL the left.
F122 16-bit data right RCR D, n Rotates the “n” bits in 17-bit area
P122 rotate with carry PRCR consisting of “D” plus the carry flag 5
flag (R9009) data (R9009) data to the right.
F123 16-bit data left RCL D, n Rotates the “n” bits in 17-bit area
P123 rotate with carry PRCL consisting of “D” plus the carry flag 5
flag (R9009) data (R9009) data to the left.
F125 32-bit data right DROR D, n Rotates the number of bits specified
P125 rotate PDROR by “n” of the double words data (32
5
bits) specified by (D+1, D) to the
right.
F126 32-bit data left DROL D, n Rotates the number of bits specified
P126 rotate PDROL by “n” of the double words data (32 5
bits) specified by (D+1, D) to the left.
F127 32-bit data right DRCR D, n Rotates the number of bits specified
P127 rotate with carry PDRCR by “n” of the double words data (32
5
flag (R9009) data bits) specified by (D+1, D) to the right
together with carry flag (R9009) data.
F128 32-bit data left DRCL D, n Rotates the number of bits specified
P128 rotate with carry PDRCL by “n” of the double words data (32
5
flag (R9009) data bits) specified by (D+1, D) to the left
together with carry flag (R9009) data.
Bit manipulation instructions
F130 16-bit data bit set BTS D, n Sets the value of bit position “n” of
5
P130 PBTS the data of “D” to 1.
F131 16-bit data bit BTR D, n Sets the value of bit position “n” of
5
P131 reset PBTR the data of “D” to 0.
F132 16-bit data invert BTI D, n Inverts the value of bit position “n” of
5
P132 PBTI the data of “D”.
F133 16-bit data bit test BTT D, n Tests the value of bit position “n” of
P133 PBTT the data of “D” and outputs the result 5
to R900B.
F135 Number of on (1) BCU S, D Stores the number of on bits in the
5
P135 bits in 16-bit data PBCU data of “S” in “D”.
F136 Number of on (1) DBCU S, D Stores the number of on bits in the
7
P136 bits in 32-bit data PDBCU data of (S+1, S) in “D”.
15-53
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num Boo- Ope-
FPΣ
FP2
Name Description
-ber lean rand
Basic function instruction

F137 Auxiliary STMR S, D Turns on the specified output and
5
timer (16-bit) R900D after 0.01 s × set value.
Special instructions
F138 Hours, min- HMSS S, D Converts the hour, minute and second
P138 utes and sec- PHMSS data of (S+1, S) to seconds data, and
5
onds to the converted data is stored in (D+1, D). *1
seconds data
F139 Seconds to SHMS S, D Converts the seconds data of (S+1, S)
P139 hours, PSHMS to hour, minute and second data,
5
minutes and and the converted data is stored in *1
seconds data (D+1, D).
F140 Carry flag STC - Turns on the carry flag (R9009).
1
P140 (R9009) set PSTC
F141 Carry flag CLC - Turns off the carry flag (R9009).
1
P141 (R9009) reset PCLC
F142 Watching WDT S The time (allowable scan time for the
P142 dog timer PWDT system) of watching dog timer is 3
update changed to “S” × 0.1 (ms) for that scan.
F143 Partial I/O IORF D1, D2 Updates the I/O from the number
P143 update PIORF specified by “D1” to the number 5
specified by “D2”.
F144 Serial data TRNS S, n The COM port received flag (R9038) is
communica- set to off to enable reception.
5
tion control Beginning at “S”, “n” bytes of the data *2
registers are sent from the COM port.
F145 Data send SEND S1, S2, Sends the data to another station in the
9
P145 PSEND D, N network (MEWNET). (via link unit)
F146 Data receive RECV S1, S2, Receives the data to another station
9
P146 PRECV N, D in the network (MEWNET). (via link unit)
F145 Data send SEND S1, S2, Sends the data to the slave station as
9
P145 D, N the MOD bus master. (via COM port) *3
F146 Data receive RECV S1, S2, Receives the data from the slave station
9
P146 N, D as the MOD bus master. (via COM port) *3
F145 Data send SEND S1, S2, Sends the data to the slave station of
9
P145 D, N the MOD bus master, type II. *4 *4
9
P146 N, D of the MOD bus master, type II. *4 *4
F145 Data send SEND S1, S2, Sends the data to the slave station as
P145 D, N the MEWTOCOL master. (via COM 9
*3 *3
port)
P146 N, D as the MEWTOCOL master. (via COM 9
*3 *3
port)
F147 Printout PR S, D Converts the ASCII code data in the
area starting with “S” for printing, and
5
outputs it to the word external output
relay WY specified by “D”.
F148 Self- ERR n Stores the self-diagnostic error number
P148 diagnostic PERR (n: k100 “n” in (DT9000), turns R9000 on, and 3
error set to K299) turns on the ERROR LED.
F149 Message MSG S Displays the character constant of “S” in
13
P149 display PMSG the connected programming tool.
*1) The instruction is available for FP0 T32 (V2.3 or later) and FP-e.
*2) This instruction is available for FP0 V1.20 or later and FP-e.
*3) This instruction is available for FP-X V1.20 or later and FPΣ 32k type.
*4) This instruction is available for FP-X V2.50 or later and FPΣ V3.20 or later.s
15-54
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Ope-
FPΣ
FP2
ber rand
F150 Data read from READ S1, S2, Reads the data from the
9
P150 intelligent unit PREAD n, D intelligent unit. *3
F151 Data write into WRT S1, S2, Writes the data into the intelligent
9
P151 intelligent unit PWRT n, D unit. *3
F152 Data read from RMRD S1, S2, Reads the data from the
P152 MEWNET-F PRMRD n, D intelligent unit at the MEWNET-F 9
slave station (remote I/O) slave station.
F153 Data write into RMWT S1, S2, Writes the data into the intelligent
P153 MEWNET-F PRMWT n, D unit at the MEWNET-F (remote 9
slave station I/O) slave station.
F155 Sampling SMPL - Starts sampling data.
1
P155 PSMPL *5 *4
F156 Sampling STRG - When the trigger of this
P156 trigger PSTRG instruction turns on, the sampling 1
*5 *4
trace stops.
F157 Time addition CADD S1, S2, The time after (S2+1, S2)
P157 PCADD D elapses from the time of (S1+2,
9
S1+1, S1) is stored in (D+2, D+1, *1
D).
F158 Time CSUB S1, S2, The time that results from
P158 subtraction PCSUB D subtracting (S2+1, S2) from the
9
time (S1+2, S1+1, S1) is stored *1
in (D+2, D+1, D).
F159 Serial port MTRN S, n, D This is used to send data to an
P159 communication PMTRN external device through the
7
specified CPU COM port or MCU *2 *2
COM port.
F161 MCU serial port MRCV S, D1, Data is received from external
P161 reception PMRCV D2 equipment via the COM port of 7
*2 *2
the specified MCU.
BIN arithmetic instruction
F160 Double word DSQR S, D
P160 (32-bit) data PDSQR √(S)→(D) 7
square root
High speed counter/Pulse output instruction for FP0, FP-e
F0 High-speed MV S, Performs high-speed counter and
counter and DT9052 Pulse output controls according
Pulse output to the control code specified by 5
controls “S”. The control code is stored in
DT9052.
1 Change and DMV S, Transfers (S+1, S) to high-speed
read of the DT9044 counter and Pulse output elapsed 7
elapsed value value area.
of high-speed DT9044, Transfers value in high-speed
counter and D counter and Pulse output elapsed 7
Pulse output value area to (D+1, D).
F166 High-speed HC1S n, S, Yn Turns output Yn on when the
counter output elapsed value of the built-in high-
set (with speed counter reaches the target 11
channel value of (S+1, S).
specification)
*1) The instruction is available for FP0 T32 (V2.3 or later) and FP-e.
*2) The instruction is available for FP2/FP2SH Ver. 1.5 or later, and the pulse execution type can be specified.
FP10SH cannot be used.
*3) This instruction is available for FPΣ Ver. 2.0 or later.
*4) This instruction is only available for FP-X Ver.2.0 or later.
15-55
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Boo-
FPΣ
FP2
ber lean
F167 High-speed HC1R n, S, Yn Turns output Yn off when the

counter output elapsed value of the built-in high-
reset (with speed counter reaches the target 11
channel value of (S+1, S).
specification)
F168 Positioning SPD1 S, n Outputs a positioning pulse from
control (with the specified output (Y0 or Y1)
5
channel according to the contents of the
specification) data table beginning at “S”.
F169 Pulse output (with PLS S, n Outputs a pulse from the
channel specified output (Y0 or Y1)
5
specification) according to the contents of the
data table beginning at “S”.
F170 PWM output (with PWM S, n Performs PWM output from the
channel specified output (Y0 or Y1)
5
specification) according to the contents of the
data table beginning at “S”.
High speed counter/Pulse output instruction for FP0R
F0 High-speed MV S, Performs high-speed counter
counter and Pulse DT90052 and Pulse output controls
output controls according to
5
the control code specified by “S”.
The control code is stored in
DT90052.
F1 Change and read DMV S, Transfers (S+1, S) to high-speed
of the elapsed DT90300 counter and Pulse output
7
value of high- elapsed value area (DT90045,
speed counter DT90044).
and Pulse output DT90300, Transfers value in high-speed
D counter and Pulse output
7
elapsed value area (DT90045,
DT90044) to (D+1, D).
F165 Cam control CAM0 S Controls cam operation (on/off
patterns of each cam output)
3
according to the elapsed value of
the high-speed counter.
F166 Target value much HC1S n, S, D Turns output Yn on when the
on (with channel elapsed value of the high-speed
specification) counter or pulse output reaches
(High-speed the target value of (S+1, S). 11
counter
control/Pulse
output control)
F167 Target value much HC1R n, S, D Turns output Yn off when the
off (with channel elapsed value of the high-speed
specification) counter or pulse output reaches
(High-speed the target value of (S+1, S). 11
counter
control/Pulse
output control)
F171 Pulse output (JOG SPDH S, n Positioning pulses are output
positioning type from the specified channel, in
5
0/1) (Trapezoidal accordance with the contents of
control) the data table that starts with S.
F172 Pulse output (JOG PLSH S, n Pulse strings are output from the
operation 0 and 1) specified output, in accordance
5
with the contents of the data
table that starts with S.
F173 PWM output (with PWMH S, n PWM output is output from the
channel specified output, in accordance
5
specification) with the contents of the data
15-56
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num-
FPΣ
FP2
Name Boolean Operand Description
ber
F174 Pulse output SP0H S, n Outputs the pulses from the

(Selectable data specified channel according to
5
table control the
operation ) data table specified by S.
F175 Pulse output SPSH S, n Pulses are output from channel,
(Linear in accordance with the
interpolation) designated data table, so that 5
the path to the target position
forms a straight line.
F176 Pulse output SPCH S, n Pulses are output from channel,
(Circular in accordance with the
forms an arc.
F177 Pulse output HOME S, n Performs the home return
(Home return) according to the specified data 7
table.
F178 Input pulse PLSM S1, S2, D Measures the number of pulses
measurement and cycle of pulses to be input
(No. of pulses, to the high-speed counter of the 5
cycle for input specified channel.
pulses)
15-57
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Boo-
FPΣ
FP2
ber lean
High speed counter/Pulse output instruction for FPΣ/FP-X

F0 High-speed MV S, DT90052 Performs high-speed counter
counter and and Pulse output controls
Pulse output according to
5
controls the control code specified by
“S”. The control code is stored in
DT90052.
F1 Change and read DMV FPΣ: Transfers (S+1, S) to high-
of the elapsed S, DT90044 speed counter and Pulse output
7
value of high- FP-X: elapsed value area (DT90045,
speed counter S, DT90300 DT90044).
and Pulse output FPΣ: Transfers value in high-speed
DT90044, D counter and Pulse output
7
FP-X: elapsed value area (DT90045,
DT90300, D DT90044) to (D+1, D).
F166 Target value HC1S n, S, D Turns output Yn on when the
much on (with elapsed value of the built-in
11
channel high-speed counter reaches the
specification) target value of (S+1, S).
F167 Target value HC1R n, S, D Turns output Yn off when the
much off (with elapsed value of the built-in
11
channel high-speed counter reaches the
specification) target value of (S+1, S).
F171 Pulse output SPDH S, n Positioning pulses are output
(with channel from the specified channel, in
specification) accordance with the contents of
5
(Trapezoidal the data table that starts with S.
control and
home return)
F172 Pulse output PLSH S, n Pulse strings are output from the
(with channel specified output, in accordance
5
(JOG operation) table that starts with S.
F173 PWM output PWMH S, n PWM output is output from the
(with channel specified output, in accordance
5
F174 Pulse output SP0H S, n Outputs the pulses from the
(with channel specified channel according to
specification) the
5
(Selectable data data table specified by S.
table control
operation )
F175 Pulse output SPSH S, n Pulses are output from channel,
(Linear in accordance with the
*2
forms a straight line.
F176 Pulse output SPCH S, n Pulses are output from channel,
(Circular in accordance with the
*2
forms an arc.
*1) The elapsed value area differs depending on used channels.
*2) This instruction is available for FPΣ C32T2, C28P2, C32T2H and C28P2H.
15-58
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num Ope-
FPΣ
FP2
-ber rand
Screen display instructions

F180 FP-e screen SCR S1, S2, Register the screen displayed on
display S3, S4 the FP-e. 9
*1
registration
F181 FP-e screen DSP S Specify the screen to be displayed
display on the FP-e. 3
*1
switching
Basic function instruction
F182 Time FILTR S1, S2, Executes the filter processing for
constant S3, D the specified input. 9
*2 *3
processing
F183 Auxiliary DSTM S, D Turn on the specified output and
timer (32-bit) R900D after 7
*4
0.01 s. × set value.
Data transfer instructions
F190 Three 16-bit MV3 S1, S2, (S1)→(D), (S2)→(D+1),
10
P190 data move PMV3 S3, D (S3)→(D+2)
F191 Three 32-bit DMV3 S1, S2, (S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D), (S2+1,
P191 data move PDMV3 S3, D S2)→(D+3, D+2), (S3+1, 16
S3)→(D+5, D+4)
Logic operation instructions
F215 32-bit data DAND S1, S2, (S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1,
7
P215 AND PDAND D S2)→(D+1,
D)
F216 32-bit data DOR S1, S2, (S1+1, S1) OR (S2+1, S2)→(D+1,
12
P216 OR PDOR D D)
F217 32-bit data DXOR S1, S2,
P217 XOR PDXOR D {(S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1, S2)} OR
12
{(S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1,
S2)}→(D+1, D)
F218 32-bit data DXNR S1, S2, {(S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1, S2)} OR
P218 XNR PDXNR D {(S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1, 12
S2)}→(D+1, D)
F219 Double word DUNI S1, S2, {(S1+1, S1) AND (S3+1, S3)} OR
P219 (32-bit) data PDUNI S3, D {(S2+1, S2) AND (S3+1, 16
unites S3)}→(D+1, D)
Data conversion instructions
F230 Time data → TMSEC S, D The specified time data ( a date
P230 second PTMSEC and time) is changed to the second 6
*5 *6 *7 *7
conversion data.
F231 Second SECTM S, D The specified second data is
P231 data→ time PSECTM changed into time data (a date and 6
*5 *6 *7 *7
conversion time).
*1) This instruction is available for FP-e only.
*4) This instruction is available for FP10SH Ver. 3.10 or later.
*5) This instruction is available for FPΣ 32k type.
*7) This instruction is available for FP2/FP2SH Ver. 1.5 or later.FP10SH cannot be used.
15-59
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Ope-
FPΣ
FP2
ber rand
F235 16-bit binary GRY S, D Converts the 16-bit binary data of

P235 data → Gray PGRY “S” to gray codes, and the 6
code conversion converted result is stored in the “D”.
F236 32-bit binary DGRY S, D Converts the 32-bit binary data of
P236 data → Gray PDGRY (S+1, S) to gray code, and the
8
code conversion converted result is stored in the
(D+1, D).
F237 16-bit gray code GBIN S, D Converts the gray codes of “S” to
P237 → binary data PGBIN binary data, and the converted 6
conversion result is stored in the “D”.
F238 32-bit gray code DGBIN S, D Converts the gray codes of (S+1, S)
P238 → binary data PDGBIN to binary data, and the converted 8
conversion result is stored in the (D+1, D).
F240 Bit line to bit COLM S, n, The values of bits 0 to 15 of “S” are
P240 column PCOLM D stored in bit “n” of (D to DC+15). 8
conversion
F241 Bit column to bit LINE S, n, The values of bit “n” of (S) to (S+15)
8
P241 line conversion PLINE D are stored in bits 0 to 15 of “D”.
F250 Binary data → BTOA S1, Converts multiple binary data to
ASCII S2, n, multiple ASCII data. 12
*1
conversion D
F251 ASCII → binary ATOB S1, Converts multiple ASCII data to
data conversion S2, n, multiple binary data. 12
*1
D
F252 ASCII data ACHK S1, Checks the ASCII data strings to be
10
check S2, n used in F251 (ATOB) instruction. *2 *3
Character strings instructions
F257 Comparing SCMP S1, These instructions compare two
P257 character S2 specified character strings and
10
strings output the judgment results to a
special internal relay.
F258 Character string SADD S1, These instructions couple one
12
P258 coupling S2, D character string with another.
F259 Number of LEN S, D These instructions determine the
P259 characters in a number of characters in a character 6
character string string.
F260 Search for SSRC S1, The specified character is searched
10
P260 character string S2, D in a character string.
F261 Retrieving data RIGHT S1, These instructions retrieve a
P261 from character S2, D specified number of characters from
8
strings (right the right side of the character string.
side)
F262 Retrieving data LEFT S1, These instructions retrieve a
P262 from character S2, D specified number of characters from
8
strings (left the left side of the character string.
side)
F263 Retrieving a MIDR S1, These instructions retrieve a
P263 character string S2, character string consisting of a
from a character S3, D specified number of characters from 10
string the specified position in the
character string.
F264 Writing a MIDW S1, These instructions write a specified
P264 character string S2, D, number of characters from a
12
to a character n character string to a specified
string position in the character string.
F265 Replacing SREP S, D, A specified number of characters in
P265 character p, n a character string are rewritten,
12
strings starting from a specified position in
the character string.
15-60
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Ope-
FPΣ
FP2
ber rand
Integer type data processing instructions

F270 Maximum MAX S1, Searches the maximum value in the
P270 value (word PMAX S2, D word data table between the “S1” and
data (16-bit)) “S2”, and stores it in the “D”. The 8
*1
address relative to “S1” is stored in
“D+1”.
F271 Maximum DMAX S1, Searches for the maximum value in
P271 value (double PDMAX S2, D the double word data table between
word data (32- the area selected with “S1” and “S2”, 8
*1
bit)) and stores it in the “D”. The address
relative to “S1” is stored in “D+2”.
F272 Minimum value MIN S1, Searches for the minimum value in
P272 (word data (16- PMIN S2, D the word data table between the area
bit)) selected with “S1” and “S2”, and 8
*1
stores it in the “D”. The address
F273 Minimum value DMIN S1, Searches for the minimum value in
P273 (double word PDMIN S2, D the double word data table between
data (32-bit)) the area selected with “S1” and “S2”, 8
*1
and stores it in the “D”. The address
F275 Total and MEAN S1, The total value and the mean value of
P275 mean values PMEAN S2, D the word data with sign from the area
8
(word data (16- selected with “S1” to “S2” are *1
bit)) obtained and stored in the “D”.
F276 Total and DMEAN S1, The total value and the mean value of
P276 mean values PDMEAN S2, D the double word data with sign from
8
(double word the area selected with “S1” to “S2” *1
data (32-bit)) are obtained and stored in the “D”.
F277 Sort (word SORT S1, The word data with sign from the
P277 data (16-bit)) PSORT S2, area specified by “S1” to “S2” are
S3 sorted in ascending order (the 8
*1
smallest word is first) or descending
order (the largest word is first).
F278 Sort (double DSORT S1, The double word data with sign from
P278 word data (32- PDSORT S2, the area specified by “S1” to “S2” are
bit)) S3 sorted in ascending order (the 8
*1
smallest word is first) or descending
order (the largest word is first).
F282 Scaling of SCAL S1, The output value Y is found for the
P282 16-bit data PSCAL S2, D input value X by performing scaling 8
*1
for the given data table.
F283 Scaling of DSCAL S1, The output value Y is found for the
P283 32-bit data PDSCAL S2, D input value X by performing scaling 10
for the given data table.
F284 Inclination RAMP S1, Executes the linear output for the
P284 output of 16-bit S2, specified time from the specified 10
*2 *2
data S3, D initial value to the target value.
Integer type non-linear function instructions
F285 Upper and LIMT S1, When S1>S3, S1→D
P285 lower limit PLIMT S2, When S1<S3, S2→D
10
control S3, D When S1<or = S3<or = S2, S3→D *1
(16-bit data)
*1) This instruction is only available for FP-e Ver.1.2 or later.
*2) This instruction is only available for FP-X Ver.2.0 or later, and FPΣ Ver. 3.10 or later.
15-61
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Ope-
FPΣ
FP2
ber rand
F286 Upper and DLIMT S1, S2, When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3), (S1+1,
P286 lower limit PDLIMT S3, D S1)→(D+1, D)
control When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3), (S2+1,
16
(32-bit data) S2)→(D+1, D) *1
When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1, S3)<or
= (S2+1, S2), (S3+1, S3)→(D+1, D)
F287 Deadband BAND S1, S2, When S1>S3, S3−S1→D
P287 control PBAND S3, D When S2<S3, S3−S2→D 10
*1
(16-bit data) When S1<or = S3<or = S2, 0→D
F288 Deadband DBAND S1, S2, When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3), (S3+1,
P288 control PDBAND S3, D S3)−(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
(32-bit data) When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3), (S3+1,
16
S3)−(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) *1
When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1, S3)<or
= (S2+1, S2),0→(D+1, D)
F289 Zone control ZONE S1, S2, When S3<0, S3+S1→D
P289 (16-bit data) PZONE S3, D When S3=0, 0→D 10
*1
When S3>0, S3+S2→D
F290 Zone control DZONE S1, S2, When (S3+1, S3)<0, (S3+1,
P290 (32-bit data) PDZONE S3, D S3)+(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
When (S3+1, S3)=0, 0→(D+1, D) 16
*1
When (S3+1, S3)>0, (S3+1,
S3)+(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)
BCD type real number operation instructions
F300 BCD type sine BSIN S, D SIN(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
6
P300 operation PBSIN
F301 BCD type BCOS S, D COS(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
P301 cosine PBCOS 6
operation
F302 BCD type BTAN S, D TAN(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
P302 tangent PBTAN 6
operation
F303 BCD type BASIN S, D SIN-1(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
P303 arcsine PBASIN 6
operation
F304 BCD type BACOS S, D COS-1(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
P304 arccosine PBACOS 6
operation
F305 BCD type BATAN S, D TAN-1(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
P305 arctangent PBATAN 6
operation
Floating-point type real number operation instructions
F309 Floating-point FMV S, D (S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
P309 type data PFMV 8
*2
move
F310 Floating-point F+ S1, S2, (S1+1, S1)+(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)
P310 type data PF+ D 14
*2
addition
F311 Floating-point F- S1, S2, (S1+1, S1)−(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)
P311 type data PF- D 14
*2
subtraction
F312 Floating-point F* S1, S2, (S1+1, S1)×(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)
P312 type data PF* D 14
*2
multiplication
F313 Floating-point F% S1, S2, (S1+1, S1)÷(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)
P313 type data PF% D 14
*2
division
*1) This instruction is only available for FP-e Ver.1.2 or later.
*2) This instruction is available for FP-e Ver.1.21 or later, and FP0 V2.1 or later.
15-62
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Boo- Ope-
FPΣ
FP2
Name Description
ber lean rand
F314 Floating-point type SIN S, D SIN(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)

10
P314 data sine operation PSIN *1
F315 Floating-point type COS S, D COS(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
P315 data cosine PCOS 10
*1
operation
F316 Floating-point type TAN S, D TAN(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
P316 data tangent PTAN 10
*1
operation
-1
F317 Floating-point type ASIN S, D SIN (S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
P317 data arcsine PASIN 10
*1
operation
F318 Floating-point type ACOS S, D COS-1(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
P318 data arccosine PACOS 10
*1
operation
-1
F319 Floating-point type ATAN S, D TAN (S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
P319 data arctangent PATAN 10
*1
operation
F320 Floating-point type LN S, D LN(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
P320 data natural PLN 10
*1
logarithm
F321 Floating-point type EXP S, D EXP(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
P321 data exponent PEXP 10
*1
F322 Floating-point type LOG S, D LOG(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)

10
P322 data logarithm PLOG *1
F323 Floating-point type PWR S1, (S1+1, S1) ^ (S2+1, S2)→(D+1,
14
P323 data power PPWR S2, D D) *1
F324 Floating-point type FSQR S, D
10
P324 data square root PFSQR √(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) *1
F325 16-bit integer data to FLT S, D Converts the 16-bit integer data
P325 floating-point type PFLT with sign specified by “S” to real
6
data conversion number data, and the converted *1
data is stored in “D”.
F326 32-bit integer data to DFLT S, D Converts the 32-bit integer data
P326 floating-point type PDFLT with sign specified by (S+1, S) to
data conversion real number data, and the 8
*1
converted data is stored in (D+1,
D).
F327 Floating-point type INT S, D Converts real number data
P327 data to 16-bit integer PINT specified by (S+1, S) to the 16-
conversion (the bit integer data with sign (the
largest integer not largest integer not exceeding the 8
*1
exceeding the floating-point data), and the
floating-point type converted data is stored in “D”.
data)
F328 Floating-point type DINT S, D Converts real number data
P328 data to 32-bit integer PDINT specified by (S+1, S) to the 32-
conversion (the bit integer data with sign (the
largest integer not largest integer not exceeding the 8
*1
exceeding the floating-point data), and the
floating-point type converted data is stored in (D+1,
data) D).
15-63
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Ope-
FPΣ
FP2
ber rand
F329 Floating-point FIX S, D Converts real number data specified

P329 type data to 16-bit PFIX by (S+1, S) to the 16-bit integer data
integer con- with sign (rounding the first decimal
version (rounding point down), and the converted data 8
*1
the first decimal is stored
point down to in “D”.
integer)
F330 Floating-point DFIX S, D Converts real number data specified
P330 type data to 32-bit PDFIX by (S+1, S) to the 32-bit integer data
version (rounding point down), and the converted data 8
*1
the first decimal is stored
point down to in (D+1, D).
integer)
F331 Floating-point ROFF S, D Converts real number data specified
P331 type data to 16-bit PROFF by (S+1, S) to the 16-bit integer data
version (rounding point off), and the converted data is 8
*1
the first decimal stored in “D”.
point off to
integer)
F332 Floating-point DROFF S, D Converts real number data specified
P332 type data to 32-bit PDROFF by (S+1, S) to the 32-bit integer data
version (rounding point off), and the converted data is 8
*1
the first decimal stored in (D+1, D).
point off to
integer)
F333 Floating-point FINT S, D The decimal part of the real number
P333 type data round- PFINT data specified in (S+1, S) is rounded
ding the first down, and the result is stored in 8
*1
decimal point (D+1, D).
down
F334 Floating-point FRINT S, D
The decimal part of the real number
P334 type data round- PFRINT data stored in (S+1, S) is rounded
8
ding the first off, and the result is stored in (D+1, *1
decimal point off D).
F335 Floating-point F+/- S, D The real number data stored in (S+1,
P335 type data sign PF+/- S) is changed the sign, and the 8
*1
changes result is stored in (D+1, D).
F336 Floating-point FABS S, D Takes the absolute value of real
P336 type data absolute PFABS number data specified by (S+1, S),
8
and the result (absolute value) is *1
stored in (D+1, D).
F337 Floating-point RAD S, D The data in degrees of an angle
P337 type data degree PRAD specified in (S+1, S) is converted to
8
→ radian radians (real number data), and the *1
result is stored in (D+1, D).
F338 Floating-point DEG S, D The angle data in radians (real
P338 type data radian PDEG number data) specified in (S+1, S) is
8
→ degree converted to angle data in degrees, *1
and the result is stored in (D+1, D).
Floating-point type real number data processing instructions
F345 Floating-point FCMP S1, (S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)→ R900A: on
P345 type data compare PFCMP S2 (S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)→ R900B on 10
(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)→ R900C: on
F346 Floating-point FWIN S1, (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3)→ R900A: on
P346 type data band PFWIN S2, (S2+1, S2)<or =(S1+1, S1)<or
14
compare S3 =(S3+1, S3) → R900B on
(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)→ R900C: on
15-64
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Ope-
FPΣ
FP2
ber rand
F347 Floating-point FLIMT S1, S2, When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3),

P347 type data PFLIMT S3, D (S1+1, S1) →(D+1, D)
upper and When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3),
lower limit (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D) 17
control When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1,
S3)<or =(S2+1, S2), (S3+1,
S3)→(D+1, D)
F348 Floating-point FBAND S1, S2, When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3),
P348 type data PFBAND S3, D (S3+1, S3)−(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
dead-band When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3),
17
control (S3+1, S3)−(S2+1, S2)→ (D+1, D)
When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1,
S3)<or =(S2+1, S2), 0.0→(D+1, D)
F349 Floating-point FZONE S1, S2, When (S3+1, S3)<0.0,
P349 type data PFZONE S3, D (S3+1, S3)+(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
zone control When (S3+1, S3)=0.0, 0.0→ (D+1,
17
D)
When (S3+1, S3)>0.0, (S3+1,
S3)+(S2+1, S2) →(D+1, D)
F350 Floating-point FMAX S1, S2, Searches the maximum value in the
P350 type data PFMAX D real number data table between the
maxi-mum area selected with “S1” and “S2”,
8
value and stores it in the (D+1, D). The
(D+2).
F351 Floating-point FMIN S1, S2, Searches the minimum value in the
P351 type data PFMIN D real number data table between the
mini-mum area selected with “S1” and “S2”,
8
value and stores it in the (D+1, D). The
(D+2).
F352 Floating-point FMEAN S1, S2, The total value and the mean value
P352 type data total PFMEAN D of the real number data from the
and mean area selected with “S1” to “S2” are
8
values obtained. The total value is stored in
the (D+1, D) and the mean value is
stored in the (D+3, D+2).
F353 Floating-point FSORT S1, S2, The real number data from the area
P353 type data sort PFSORT S3 specified by “S1” to “S2” are stored
in ascending order (the smallest 8
word is first) or descending order
(the largest word is first).
F354 Scaling of FSCAL S1, S2, Scaling (linearization) on a real
P354 real number PFSCAL D number data table is performed, and
12
data the output (Y) to an input value (X) *1 *2 *3 *3
is calculated.
*3) This instruction is available for FP2/FP2SH Ver. 1.5 or later. FP10SH cannot be used.
15-65
FP2SH/FP10SH
FP0/FP-e
Steps
FP0R
FP-X
Num- Ope-
FPΣ
FP2
ber rand
Time series processing instruction

F355 PID processing PID S PID processing is performed
depending on the control value
(mode and parameter) specified
4
by (S to S+2) and (S+4 to S+10), *1
and the result is stored in the
(S+3).
F356 Easy PID EZPID S1, Temperature control (PID) can be
S2, easily performed using the image 10
*2 *2
S3, S4 of a temperature controller.
Compare instructions
F373 16-bit data DTR S, D If the data in the 16-bit area
P373 revision PDTR specified by “S” has changed
detection since the previous execution,
internal relay R9009 (carry flag) 6
will turn on. “D” is used to store
the data of the previous
execution.
F374 32-bit data DDTR S, D If the data in the 32-bit area
P374 revision PDDTR specified by (S+1, S) has changed
detection since the previous execution,
internal relay R9009 (carry flag) 6
will turn on. (D+1, D) is used to
store the data of the previous
execution.
Index register bank processing instructions
F410 Setting the SETB n Index register (I0 to ID) bank
P410 index register PSETB number change over. 4
bank number
F411 Changing the CHGB n Index register (I0 to ID) bank
P411 index register PCHGB number change over with
4
bank number remembering preceding bank
number.
F412 Restoring the POPB - Changes index register (I0 to ID)
P412 index register PPOPB bank number back to the bank
2
bank number before F411 (CHGB)/P411
(PCHGB) instruction.
File register bank processing instructions
F414 Setting the file SBFL n File register bank number change
P414 register bank PSBFL over. 4
*3
number
F415 Changing the CBFL n File register bank number change
P415 file register PCBFL over with remembering preceding 4
*3
bank number bank number.
F416 Restoring the PBFL - Changes file register bank
P416 file register PPBFL number back to the bank before
2
bank number F415 (CBFL)/P415 (PCBFL) *3
instruction.
*1) This instruction is available for FP0 (V2.1 or later) only.
*2) This instruction is available for FP-X V.1.20 or later, and FPΣ 32k type.
*3) This instruction is not available for FP10SH.
15-66
15.4 Table of Error codes
 Difference in ERROR display
There are differences in the way errors are displayed depending on the model.
Model Display Display method
FP1,FP-M,FP2,FP3,FP10SH LED ERROR. Continually lit
FPΣ,FP0, FP0R, FP-X LED ERROR/ALARM Flashes/continually lit
FP-e Screen display ERR. Continually lit
 Error Confirmation When ERROR Turns ON

When the “ERROR” on the control unit (CPU unit) turns on or flashes, a self-diagnostic error or syntax
check error has occurred. Confirm the contents of the error and take the appropriate steps.
-Error Confirmation Method

Procedure:1.Use the programming tool software to call up the error code.
By executing the “STATUS DISPLAY”, the error code and content of error are displayed.
2.Check the error contents in the table of error codes using the error code ascertained above.
-Syntax check error

This is an error detected by the total check function when there is a syntax error or incorrect setting
written in the program. When the mode selector is switched to the RUN mode, the total check function
automatically activates and eliminates the possibility of incorrect operation from syntax errors in the
program.
When a syntax check error is detected

-ERROR turns on or flashes.
-Operation will not begin even after switching to the RUN mode.
-Remote operation cannot be used to change to RUN mode.
Clearing a syntax check error

By changing to the PROG. mode, the error will clear and the ERROR will turn off.
Steps to take for syntax error

Change to the PROG. mode, and then execute the total check function while online mode with the
programming tool connected. This will call up the content of error and the address where the error
occurred.
Correct the program while referring to the content of error.
15-67
-Self-diagnostic Error
This error occurs when the control unit (CPU unit) self-diagnostic function detects the occurrence of an
abnormality in the system. The self-diagnostic function monitors the memory abnormal detection, I/O
abnormal detection, and other devices.
When a self-diagnostic error occurs

- The ERROR turns on or flashes.
- The operation of the control unit (CPU unit) might stop depending on the content of error and the
system register setting.
- The error codes will be stored in the special data register DT9000(DT90000).
- In the case of operation error, the error address will be stored in the DT9017(DT90017) and
DT9018(DT90018).
Clearing the self-diagnostic error

At the “STATUS DISPLAY”, execute the “error clear”. Error codes 43 and higher can be cleared.
-You can use the initialize/test switch to clear an error. However, this will also clear the contents of
operation memory.
-Errors can also be cleared by turning off and on the power while in the PROG. mode.
However, the contents of operation memory, not stored with the hold type data, will also be cleared.
-The error can also be cleared depending on the self-diagnostic error set instruction F148(ERR).
Steps to take for self-diagnostic error

The steps to be taken will differ depending on the error contents. For more details, use the error code
obtained above and consult the table of self-diagnostic error codes.
 MEWTOCOL-COM Transmission Errors

These are error codes from a PC or other computer device that occur during an abnormal response
when communicating with a PLC using MEWTOCOL-COM.
15-68
15.4.1 Table of Syntax Check Error
Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
tion Description and steps to take
code
FP0R
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
status
A program with a syntax error has been written.

Syntax
E1 Stops ⇒ Change to PROG. mode and correct the A A A A A A A A
error error.
Two or more OT(Out) instructions and
KP(Keep) instructions are programmed using
the same relay. Also occurs when using the
same timer/counter number.
Duplicated ⇒ Change to PROG. mode and correct the
E2
(Note) output Stops program so that one relay A A A A A A A A
error is not used for two or more OT instructions. Or,
set the duplicated output to “enable” in system
register 20. A timer/counter instruction double
definition error will be detected even if double
output permission has been selected.
For instructions which must be used in a pair
such as jump (JP and LBL), one instruction is
Not paired either missing or in an incorrect position.
E3 Stops A A A A A A A A
error ⇒ Change to PROG. mode and enter the two
instructions which must
be used in a pair in the correct positions.
An instruction has been written which does not
agree with system register settings. For
Parameter example, the number setting in a program does
E4 mismatch Stops not agree with the timer/counter range setting. A A A A A A A A
error ⇒ Change to PROG. mode, check the system
register settings, and change so that the
settings and the instruction agree.
An instruction which must be written in a
specific area (main program area or
subprogram area) has been written to a
E5 Program
(Note) Stops different area (for example, a subroutine SUB A A A A A A A A
area error to RET is placed before an ED instruction).
⇒ Change to PROG. mode and enter the
instruction into the correct area.
A: Available
Note) This error is also detected if you attempt to execute a rewrite containing a syntax error during RUN.
In this case, nothing will be written to the CPU and operation will continue.
15-69
Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
code
FP0R
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
status
The program is too large to compile in the

program memory.
⇒ Change to PROG. mode and reduce the
Compile
total number of steps for the program.
E6 memory Stops -FP10SH
A A A A A A A
full error If memory expansion is possible, compilation
will become possible when the memory is
expanded.
In the program, high-level instructions, which
execute in every scan and at the leading edge
of the trigger, are programmed to be triggered
High-level by one contact. (e.g. F0 (MV) and P0 (PMV)
E7 instruction Stops are programmed using the same trigger A A A A A A
type error continuously.)
⇒ Correct the program so that the high-level
instructions executed in every scan and only
at the leading edge are triggered separately.
High-level There is an incorrect operand in an instruction
instruction which requires a specific combination of
E8 operand Stops operands (for example, the operands must all A A A A A A A A
combina- be of a certain type).
tion error ⇒ Enter the correct combination of operands.
No
Program may be damaged.
E9 program Stops A A
⇒Try to send the program again.
error
Rewrite When inputting with the programming tool
software, a deletion, addition or change of
during
Conti- order of an instruction(ED, LBL, SUB, RET,
E10 RUN A A A
nues INT, IRET, SSTP, and STPE) that cannot
syntax perform a rewrite during RUN is being
error attempted. Nothing is written to the CPU.
A: Available
15-70
15.4.2 Table of Self-Diagnostic Error
Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
code
FP0R
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
status
Probably a hardware abnormality

E20 CPU error Stops A A A
⇒Please contact your dealer.
RAM
E21
error1
RAM
E22
error2
E23 RAM Stops Probably an abnormality in the internal RAM.
A A A
error3 ⇒Please contact your dealer.
RAM
E24
error4
RAM
E25
error5
Master
memory The models of master memories are different.
A
E25 model Stops Use the master memories created with the *1)
unmatch same model.
error
FP-e,FP0,FP0R,FPΣ,and FP1
C14,C16:Probably a hardware abnormality.
⇒ Please contact your dealer.
FP-X:
When the master memory cassette is
mounted, the master memory cassette may
be damaged. Remove the master memory,
and check whether the ERROR turns off.
When the ERROR turned off, rewrite the
master memory as its contents are damaged,
and use it again.
When the ERROR does not turn off, please
User’s contact your dealer.
E26 Stops A A A A A A A A
ROM error FP1 C24,C40,C56,C72,and FP-M:
Probably an abnormality in the memory unit
⇒Program the memory unit again and try to
operate. If the same error is detected, try to
operate with another memory unit.
FP2,FP2SH,FP10SH,and FP3:
There may be a problem with the installed
ROM.
-ROM is not installed.
-ROM contents are damaged.
-Program size stored on the ROM is larger
than the capacity of the ROM
⇒Check the contents of the ROM
Units installed exceed the limitations.(i.e.,4 or
Unit more link units)
E27 installation Stops A A A A A A
⇒ Turn off the power and re-configure units
error referring to the hardware manual.
Probably an abnormality in the system
System register.
E28 register Stops A
⇒ Check the system register setting or
error
initialize the system registers.
*1) This error occurs on FP-X Ver2.0 or later. A: Available
15-71
Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
code
FP0R
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
status
Configu-
A parameter error was detected in the
ration
E29 Stops MEWNET-W2 configuration area. Set a A A
parameter correct parameter.
error
Interrupt Probably a hardware abnormality.
E30 Stops ⇒ Please contact your dealer.
error 0
An interrupt occurred without an interrupt
request . A hardware problem or error due to
Interrupt
E31 Stops noise is possible. A A A A A A A A
error 1 ⇒ Turn off the power and check the noise
conditions.
There is no interrupt program for an interrupt
which occurred.
Interrupt
E32 Stops ⇒ Check the number of the interrupt program A A A A A A A A
error 2 and change it to agree with the interrupt
request..
Multi-CPU
This error occurs when a FP3/FP10SH is
data CPU2
E33 used as CPU2 for a multi-CPU system. A A
unmatch Stops ⇒Refer to “Multi-CPU system Manual”.
error
An abnormal unit is installed.
-FPΣ, FP0R(FP0R mode),FP-X, FP2,FP2SH
and FP10SH:
Check the contents of special data register
DT90036 and locate the abnormal unit. Then
I/O status turn off the power and replace the unit with a
E34 Stops new one.
A A A A A
error
-FP3:
DT9036 and locate the abnormal unit. Then
turn off the power and replace the unit with a
new one.
MEWNET-F A unit, which cannot be installed on the slave
station of the MEWNET-F link system, is
slave
E35 Stops installed on the slave station. A A A
illegal unit ⇒Remove the illegal unit from the slave
error station.
MEWNET-F The number of slots or I/O points used for
(remote MEWNET-F(remote I/O) system exceeds the
limitation.
E36 I/O) Stops ⇒Re-configure the system so that the
A A A
limitation number of slots and I/O points is within the
error specified range.
MEWNET-F I/O overlap or I/O setting that is over the
I/O range is detected in the allocated I/O and
E37 Stops MEWNET-F I/O map.
A A A
mapping
error ⇒Re-configure the I/O map correctly
A: Available
15-72
Opera
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
-tion Description and steps to take
code
FP0R
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
status
I/O mapping for remote I/O terminal

MEWNET-F
boards, remote I/O terminal units and I/O link
slave I/O
is not correct.
E38 terminal Stops A A A
⇒Re-configure the I/O map for slave stations
mapping
according to the I/O points of the slave
error
stations.
When reading in the program from the IC
memory card(due to automatic reading
because of the dip switch setting or program
switching due to F14(PGRD) instruction):
- IC memory card is not installed.
- There is no program file or it is damaged.
IC card - Writing is disabled.
E39 Stops A A
read error - There is an abnormality in the
AUTOEXEC.SPG file.
- Program size stored on the card is larger
than the capacity of the CPU.
⇒Install an IC memory card that has the
program properly recorded and execute the
read once again.
Abnormal I/O unit.
FPΣ, FP-X:
DT90002 and abnormal FPΣ expansion unit
(application cassette for FP-X). Then check
the unit.
FP2 and FP2SH:
Check the contents of special data registers
DT90002,DT90003 and abnormal I/O unit.
Then check the unit.
Selection of operation status using system
register21:
-to continue operation, set 1
-to stop operation, set 0
Sele- Verification is possible in FPWIN GR/Pro at
E40 I/O error A A A A A
ctable “I/O error” in the status display function.
MEWNET-TR communication error
FP3 and FP10SH:
Check the contents of special data
registers(FP3:DT9002,DT9003,FP10SH:DT9
0002,DT90003) and the erroneous master
unit and abnormal I/O unit. Then check the
unit.
register21:
Verification is possible in FPWIN GR/Pro at
“I/O error” in the status display function.
A: Available
15-73
Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
code
FP0R
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
status
An abnormality in an intelligent unit.

FPΣ, FP-X:
“DT90006” and locate the abnormal FP
intelligent unit (application cassette for FP-X).
FP2,FP2SH,and FP10SH:
DT90006,DT90007 and locate the abnormal
intelligent unit. Then check the unit referring
to its manual..
register22:
Intelligent Selec-
E41 -to continue operation, set 1 A A A A A
unit error table -to stop operation, set 0
FP3:
DT9006,DT9007 and locate the abnormal
intelligent unit. Then check the unit referring
to its manual..
register22:
I/O unit(Expansion unit) wiring condition has
changed compared to that at time of power-
up.
⇒ Check the contents of special data register
(FP0: DT9010,
FPΣ, FP-X: DT90010,DT90011) and locate
the erroneous expansion unit.
It checks whether an expansion connector is
in agreement.
I/O unit Selec-
E42 ⇒ Check the contents of special data register A A A A A A A
verify error table (FP2,FP2SH,and
FP10SH:DT90010,DT90011,FP3
DT9010,DT9011)
register23:
A: Available
15-74
Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
code
FP0R
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
status
Scan time required for program execution

exceeds the setting of the system watching
dog timer.
System ⇒ Check the program and modify it so that
watching Selec- the program can execute a scan within the
E43 specified time.
A A
dog timer table
error Selection of operation status using system
register24:
Slave
The time required for slave station
station connection exceeds the setting of the system
connecting register 35.
Selec-
E44 time error Selection of operation status using system A A A
table register25:
for
MEWNET-F
system
Operation became impossible when a high-
level instruction was executed.
register26:
-to continue operation, set K1
-to stop operation, set K0
The address of operation error can be
confirmed in either special data registers
Operation Selec- DT9017 and DT9018, or DT90017 and
E45 DT90018. (It varies according to the model to
A A A A A A A A
error table
be used.)
DT9017, DT9018: FP-e, FP0,
FP0R(FP0 mode)
DT90017, DT90018: FP∑, FP-X,
FP0R(FP0R mode),
FP2, FP2SH, FP10SH
A: Available
15-75
Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
code
FP0R
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
status
S-LINK error Occurs only in FP0-SL1

When one of the S-LINK errors (ERR1, 3 or
4) has been detected, error code E46 (remote
Selec- I/O (S-LINK) communication error) is stored.
A
table Selection of operation status using system
register27:
MEWNET-F communication error
A communication abnormally was caused by
Remote
a transmission cable or during the power-
I/O down of a slave station.
E46 commu- FP2, FP2SH, and FP10SH:
nication
DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the
error abnormal slave station and recover the
Selec- communication condition.
A A A
table FP3:
DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal
slave station and recover the communication
condition.
register27:
In the unit on the slave station, an
abnormality such as:
-missing unit
-abnormal intelligent unit was detected.
FP2, FP2SH, and FP10SH:
MEW-NET- DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the
abnormal slave station and recover the slave
F Selec-
E47 condition. A A A
attribute table FP3:
error Check the contents of special data registers
DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal
slave station and recover the slave condition.
register28:
Expansion The power supply for the expansion unit was
unit power turned on after the control unit.
E49 supply Stops Turn on the power supply for the expansion A
sequence unit at the same time or before the control
unit is turned on.
error
The voltage of the backup battery lowered or
the backup battery of control unit is not
Backup installed.
Conti-
E50 battery ⇒ Check the installation of the backup A A A A A
nues battery and then replace battery if necessary.
error
By setting the system register 4, you can
disregard this self-diagnostic error.
15-76
Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
code
FP0R
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
status
MEWNET-F Terminal station setting was not properly

performed.
terminal Conti-
E51 Check stations at both ends of the A A A
station nues communication path, and set them in the
error terminal station using the dip switches.
Set the INITIALIZE/TEST
MEWNET-F selecto1inmjvbgycfrde892 r to the
I/O update Conti- INITIALIZE position while keeping the mode
E52 selector in the RUN position. If the same
A A A
synchro- nues
nous error error occurs after this, please contact your
dealer.
Multi-CPU
I/O regis-
Abnormality was detected when the multi-
tration Conti-
E53 CPU system was used. A
error nues Please contact your dealer.
(CPU2
only)
The voltage of the backup battery for the IC
IC memory memory card lowered. The BATT.LED does
card back- Conti- not turn on.
E54 Charge or replace the backup battery of IC
A A
up battery nues
error memory card.(The contents of the IC
memory card cannot be guaranteed.)
The voltage of the backup battery for IC
IC memory memory card lowers. The BATT.LED does
not turn on.
card back- Cont-
E55 Charge or replace the backup battery of IC A A
up battery inues memory card.
error (The contents of the IC memory card cannot
be guaranteed.)
Incompati- The IC memory card installed is not
ble IC Cont- compatible.
E56 Replace the IC memory card compatible
A A
memory inues
card error with FP2SH/FP10SH.
MEWNET-W2/MCU
No unit for The MEWNET-W2 link unit or
MCU(Multi communication unit) is not
the Conti-
E57 installed in the slot specified using the A A
configu- nues configuration data.
ration Either install a unit in the specified slot or
change the parameter.
E100 Self- The error specified by the F148
to diagnostic Stop (ERR)/P148(PERR) instruction is occurred. A A A A A A
⇒ Take steps to clear the error condition
E199 error set according to the specification you chose.
by F148
E200
(ERR)/P148 Conti-
to A A A A A A
(PERR) nues
E299
instruction
A :Available
15-77
15.4.3 Table of MEWTOCOL-COM Communication Error
Error
Name Description
code
!21 NACK error Link system error

!22 WACK error Link system error
!23 Unit No. overlap Link system error
Transmission format
!24 Link system error
error
Link unit hardware
error
!26 Unit No. setting error Link system error
!27 No support error Link system error
!28 No response error Link system error
!29 Buffer closed error Link system error
!30 Time-out error Link system error
Transmission
impossible error
!33 Communication stop Link system error
!36 No destination error Link system error
Other communication
error
!40 BCC error A transfer error occurred in the received data.
!41 Format error A command was received that does not fit the format.
!42 No support error A command was received that is not supported.
Multiple frames A different command was received when processing multiple
!43
procedure error frames.
A route number that does not exist was specified. Verify the route
!50 Link setting error
number by designating the transmission station.
Transmission Transmission to another device not possible because transmission
!51
time-out error buffer is congested.
Transmit disable Transmission processing to another device is not possible.(Link
!52
error unit runaway, etc.)
Command process cannot be received because of multiple frame
!53 Busy error processing. Or, cannot be received because command being
processed is congested.
!60 Parameter error Content of specified parameter does not exist or cannot be used.
There was a mistake in the contact, data area, data number
!61 Data error
designation, size designation, range, or format designation.
Registration over Operation was does when number of registrations was exceeded
!62
error or when there was no registration.
PC command that cannot be processed was executed during RUN
!63 PC mode error
mode.
15-78
Error
Name Description
code
An abnormality occurred when loading RAM to ROM/IC memory

card. There may be a problem with the ROM or IC memory card.
-When loading, the specified contents exceeded the capacity.
External memory
!64 -Write error occurs.
error
-ROM or IC memory card is not installed.
-ROM or IC memory card does not conform to specifications
-ROM or IC memory card board is not installed.
A program or system register write operation was executed when
!65 Protect error the protect mode (password setting or DIP switch, etc.)or ROM
operation mode was being used.
There was an error in the code format of the address data.
!66 Address error Also. when exceeded or insufficient of address data, there was a
mistake in the range designation.
Cannot be read because there is no program in the program
No program error
!67 area or the memory contains an error. Or, reading was attempted
and No data error
of data that was not registered.
When inputting with programming tool software, editing of an
Rewrite during RUN instruction (ED, SUB, RET, INT, IRET, SSTP, and STPE) that
!68
error cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted.
Nothing is written to the CPU.
!70 SIM over error Program area was exceeded during a program write process.
Exclusive access A command that cannot be processed was executed at the same
!71
control error time as a command being processed.
15-79
15.5 MEWTOCOL-COM Communication Commands
Table of MEWTOCOL-COM commands
Command name Code Description
RC Reads the on and off status of contact.
(RCS) - Specifies only one point.
Read contact area
(RCP) - Specifies multiple contacts.
(RCC) - Specifies a range in word units.
WC Turns contacts on and off.
(WCS) - Specifies only one point.
Write contact area
(WCP) - Specifies multiple contacts.
(WCC) - Specifies a range in word units.
Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area.
Write data area WD Writes data to a data area.
Read timer/counter set value area RS Reads the value set for a timer/counter.
Write timer/counter set value area WS Writes a timer/counter setting value.
Read timer/counter elapsed value area RK Reads the timer/counter elapsed value.
Write timer/counter elapsed value area WK Writes the timer/counter elapsed value.
Register or Reset contacts monitored MC Registers the contact to be monitored.
Register or Reset data monitored MD Registers the data to be monitored.
Monitors a registered contact or data using the
Monitoring start MG
code “MC or MD”.
Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16-
Preset contact area (fill command) SC
point on and off pattern.
Writes the same contents to the data area of a
Preset data area (fill command) SD
specified range.
Read system register RR Reads the contents of a system register.
Write system register WR Specifies the contents of a system register.
Reads the specifications of the programmable
Read the status of PLC RT
controller and error codes if an error occurs.
Switches the operation mode of the
Remote control RM
programmable controller.
Abort AB Aborts communication.
15-80
15.6 Hexadecimal/Binary/BCD
BCD data
Decimal Hexadecimal Binary data
(Binary Coded Decimal)
0 0000 00000000 00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 0001 00000000 00000001 0000 0000 0000 0001
2 0002 00000000 00000010 0000 0000 0000 0010
3 0003 00000000 00000011 0000 0000 0000 0011
4 0004 00000000 00000100 0000 0000 0000 0100
5 0005 00000000 00000101 0000 0000 0000 0101
6 0006 00000000 00000110 0000 0000 0000 0110
7 0007 00000000 00000111 0000 0000 0000 0111
8 0008 00000000 00001000 0000 0000 0000 1000
9 0009 00000000 00001001 0000 0000 0000 1001
10 000A 00000000 00001010 0000 0000 0001 0000
11 000B 00000000 00001011 0000 0000 0001 0001
12 000C 00000000 00001100 0000 0000 0001 0010
13 000D 00000000 00001101 0000 0000 0001 0011
14 000E 00000000 00001110 0000 0000 0001 0100
15 000F 00000000 00001111 0000 0000 0001 0101
16 0010 00000000 00010000 0000 0000 0001 0110
17 0011 00000000 00010001 0000 0000 0001 0111
18 0012 00000000 00010010 0000 0000 0001 1000
19 0013 00000000 00010011 0000 0000 0001 1001
20 0014 00000000 00010100 0000 0000 0010 0000
21 0015 00000000 00010101 0000 0000 0010 0001
22 0016 00000000 00010110 0000 0000 0010 0010
23 0017 00000000 00010111 0000 0000 0010 0011
24 0018 00000000 00011000 0000 0000 0010 0100
25 0019 00000000 00011001 0000 0000 0010 0101
26 001A 00000000 00011010 0000 0000 0010 0110
27 001B 00000000 00011011 0000 0000 0010 0111
28 001C 00000000 00011100 0000 0000 0010 1000
29 001D 00000000 00011101 0000 0000 0010 1001
30 001E 00000000 00011110 0000 0000 0011 0000
31 001F 00000000 00011111 0000 0000 0011 0001
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
63 003F 00000000 00111111 0000 0000 0110 0011
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
255 00FF 00000000 11111111 0000 0010 0101 0101
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
9999 270F 00100111 00001111 1001 1001 1001 1001
15-81
15.7 ASCII Codes
15-82
Record of changes
Manual No. Date Desceiption of changes
ARCT1F475E May.2009 First Edition
ARCT1F475E-1 Sep.2009 Second Edition
ARCT1F475E-2 Aug.2011 3rd Edition

Addition
-FP0R Control Unit(RS485 Type)
-FP0R Expansion Unit
Error correction

FP0R USERS MANUAL fp0r Hard F475e-2 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FP0R USERS MANUAL fp0r Hard F475e-2 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FP0R USERS MANUAL fp0r Hard F475e-2 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER

1. Functions and Restrictions of the Unit .................................1-1

2. Specifications and Functions of Control Unit .....................2-1

4. I/O Allocation ...........................................................................4-1

5. Installation and Wiring ............................................................5-1

6. Preparation of USB Port .........................................................6-1

9. Security Functions .................................................................. 9-1

10. Other Functions ................................................................... 10-1

11. Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting ............................... 11-1

12. Precautions During Programming..................................... 12-1

13. Specifications ...................................................................... 13-1

14. Dimensions and Others ...................................................... 14-1

Type of programming tool Type of unit

FPWIN GR Ver.1 Not used

1. Using the programs in the FP0R specifications.

2. Using the programs in the same specifications as the FP0.

When using the programs in the FP0R specifications.

1. Change in the model setting

2. Resetting of system registers

3. Modification of the programs

The addresses of the following special data registers are changed.

Note) The numbers in parentheses are for FP0-T32.

How to use FP0 compatibility mode

Tools supporting FP0 compatibility mode

Restrictions on switching to FP0 compatibility mode

Model setting for FP0 program Applicable FP0R model

1. P13(PICWT) instruction specifications - EEPROM(FROM) write instruction

②F170(PWM) instruction specifications - PWM output instruction

4. F144(TRNS) instruction specifications - Serial data communication

2)Restriction on the number of sent bytes

5. F169(PLS) instruction specifications - Pulse output (JOG operation)

2)Pulse width specification

6. F168(SPD1) instruction specifications - Positioning control (Home return)

7. Real number calculation process

8. Process when a secondary battery is out of charge (T32 type only)

1.1.1 FP0R Control Units

1.1.3 Link Units

1.1.5 Options and Repair Parts

Controllable I/O points

1.3.1 Required Tools for Programming

2.PC connection cable

1.3.2 Software Environment and Suitable Cable

Full type AFPS10520

Note1) Ver.1.1 must be installed to install the upgrade version.

Conforms to IEC61131-3 programming tool software FPWIN Pro Ver.6

D-sub connector cable

2.1.1 Part Names and Functions

Operation monitor LEDs

USB connector (Mini-USB B type (5-pin))

COM port (RS232C or RS485)

2.2.1 Input Specifications

Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points

Limitations on number of simultaneous output on points

(The above illustration is the terminal block type.)

(The above illustration is the terminal block type.)

2.4.1 Memory Backup Function

Backup of operation memory

Relation between charging time and backup time

Predicted life of built-in backup battery